JP7136463B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

There is a game machine that can change the game state.

JP 2010-110577 A

The proposed game machine lacks variations in the transition of the game state, so that the game becomes monotonous, and there are cases where the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, a first variable display game or a second variable display game is executed as described below, and the result of the first variable display game or the second variable display game is the first result. a first value can be given to the player at any time, and if the result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game is a second result different from the first result, the player is given a value higher than the first value To provide a gaming machine capable of imparting a second value with a low value . The gaming machine includes a main control section, a sub-control section, winning device control means, and game state control means. The main control section can perform variable display control of the first identification information corresponding to the first variable display game and the second identification information corresponding to the second variable display game on the first display means. The slave control unit varies a third variable display game for variably displaying the third identification information corresponding to the first variable display game or the second variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit on the second display means. Display control is possible. The winning device control means can convert the normal variable winning device into an easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to win and a non-easy winning state in which the game ball is not easy to win. The game state control means can transition the game state from the first game state, which is an easy winning state, to the second game state, which is a non-easy winning state, when a predetermined condition is established. The slave control unit displays the third identification information corresponding to the first identification information displayed as the result of the first variation display game when the first variation display game is executed as the result of the third variation display game as the second display. means for displaying third identification information corresponding to the second identification information displayed as the result of the second variation display game when the second variation display game is executed as the second display as the result of the third variation display game. means, and the achievement status of the predetermined condition can be displayed on the second display means . and the specific third identification information, which is the third identification information displayed on the second display means corresponding to the first identification information displayed as a result of the executed first variable display game, is displayed on the first display means. Even if the third identification information is not the third identification information corresponding to the specific second identification information that is the second identification information that is the second identification information, the second identification information is not changed to the third identification information corresponding to the specific second identification information. The variable display of the third variable display game corresponding to the execution of the variable display game is started from the specific third identification information . The predetermined condition includes that the first variable display game or the second variable display game results in the second result. The second result includes a first second result and a second second result, and the predetermined condition differs between the first second result and the second second result.

According to one aspect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 5) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocking|fluctuation of the background part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design A of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows highlighting display and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the emphasis display of the outline of the pattern of 1st Embodiment, and an ambiguous (non-emphasis) display. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the emphasis display of the outline of the pattern of the modification of 1st Embodiment, and an ambiguous (non-emphasis) display. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decoration pattern of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the message display production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline display of the small pattern group of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a contour display switching target portion during temporary stop display of decorative symbols according to the second embodiment; It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game performance of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the pattern display area of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the design displayed on a design display area in the special figure game of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an overview of a reservation display field of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the generation|occurrence|production animation of a hold|hold display of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment; It is a figure (2) which shows an example of the symbol loss production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a missing symbol effect in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol loss production|presentation of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a loss effect when a pending display occurs according to the third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (Part 2) showing an example of a loss effect when a pending display occurs according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the pending|holding display part of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the highlighting display of the outline of the pattern during loss|loss effect|action of the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decoration design during loss production|presentation of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design during loss production|presentation of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game performance of the gaming machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 15 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display time (expected value) for every game state of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of big-hit distribution control for every game state of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of suggestion production|presentation of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a derivation ratio of each suggested content according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 17 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the execution ratio of the notice production|presentation of 5th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect configuration example in the case of performing a plurality of suggestive effect within one variation in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of Modified Example 2 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the execution ratio of the announcement production|presentation of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of Modified Example 3 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the execution ratio of the notice production|presentation of the modification 3 of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of Modified Example 4 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21A is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 1); FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 2); FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 3); FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 4); It is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example (Part 1) of the execution ratio of the announcement effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example (part 2) of the execution ratio of the announcement effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example (part 3) of the execution ratio of the announcement effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example (part 4) of the execution ratio of the announcement effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example (No. 5) of the execution ratio of the announcement effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a display example of a pseudo continuous effect according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a display example (part 1) of a timer effect according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a display example (part 2) of a timer effect according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a display example of a temporary stop during reach according to the sixth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the example of a display of SP ready-to-win production|presentation of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) showing a display example of effect stock according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing a display example of effect stock according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 3) showing a display example of the effect stock according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a front view of a game board showing the arrangement of display devices according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an LED display device (second display means) of the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement aspect and alerting|reporting information of the special-figure 1 variable display part and the special-figure 2 variable display part (2nd variable display part) of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement aspect and alerting|reporting information of the special figure 1 reservation display part and the special figure 2 reservation display part (2nd starting memory display part) of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the display screen during a game in the 1st display means of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example during a game in the 2nd display means of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display which the production|presentation control apparatus of 7th Embodiment performs at the time of power failure recovery. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of display layers in the first display means of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing an example of the order in which devices are activated when power is turned on according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of a display screen when power failure is restored in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a command at the time of RAM initialization and a command at the time of restoration from power failure in Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows the example of the display screen at the time of power failure restoration in the modified example 1 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of power failure recovery in the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen at the time of power failure recovery in the modified example 2 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power failure recovery setting process in the modification 3 of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a display example of the second display means in modification 4 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an operation mode and notification information of an LED display device (second display means) and a hitting method display section of the LED display device in modification 5 of the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the lighting mode of the batch display apparatus of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the batch display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (part 2) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display switching timing of the special figure display in the package display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the special figure display in a display apparatus. It is a figure (part 3) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (4) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display switching timing of the special figure display in the package display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the special figure display in a display apparatus. It is a figure (part 5) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (the 6) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display switching timing of the special figure display in the package display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the special figure display in a display apparatus. It is a figure (the 7) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (part 8) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display switching timing of the special figure display in the package display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the special figure display in a display apparatus. It is a figure (the 9) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. It is a diagram (part 10) showing a display example of the special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the display switching timing of the special figure display in the package display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the special figure display in a display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game performance of the gaming machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of transition condition G according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 6) showing an example of a display screen during a game in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 7) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a modification of the transition condition G of the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ceiling transition control processing according to the tenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ceiling counter initial value setting processing according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a modification of the ceiling transition control process of the tenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a front view showing an example of a game board of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the game performance of the gaming machine of the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation at the time of fluctuating-displaying the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment simultaneously. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of the modification 1 of 10th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front view showing an example of a game board of modification 2 of the tenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an external information signal of the gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart (Part 1) for explaining an external information signal according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart (part 2) for explaining the external information signal of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart (part 3) for explaining an external information signal according to the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the general electricity support performance of the gaming machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop design in the special figure game of the gaming machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving pattern in the special figure game of the gaming machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving pattern in the special figure game of the gaming machine of the modification of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of the modification of 12th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame)
11 is assembled so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), etc. are built in to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in a notification color (eg, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (eg, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided.

Furthermore, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, a production button 25 used for intervening operations for game production, etc.
is provided. The production button 25 functions as a production operation reception unit that accepts an intervention operation to the game production, and also as a production unit that can produce in a desired manner (for example, a light emission mode, a vibration mode, a projection mode, etc.). Function. An option setting section 29 is provided at the left edge of the upper tray 21 for the player to set various options. The option setting unit 29 includes a cross cursor switch capable of accepting input operations in four directions, a central switch located in the center of the cross cursor switch capable of accepting decision operations and the like, and a switch located at the periphery of the cross cursor switch capable of operating volume and the like. There are two accessory switches used for Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

Note that the game machine 10 operates (for example, presses down) the effect button 25 (push button).
Based on the player's operation received from the effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 4) that detects , it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped. It should be noted that such intervention by the player includes not only the effect button 25 but also switches of the option setting section 29 (cross cursor switch,
A central switch, an accessory switch) may be used. In FIG. 4, which will be described later, each switch of the option setting section 29 is grouped into a setting switch 29
It is represented as a.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (see Figure 2). Also, when the player operates one or more of the above-described setting switches 29a (cross cursor switch, center switch, accessory switch) of the option setting unit 29, for example, the sound emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b It is possible to set the volume to be played and the brightness of the game board 30 .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

A board effect device 44 for effecting a game is provided on the upper part of the center case 40. - 特許庁This board effect device 44 changes the display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is operable toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general prize winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable prize winning device 38 which will be described later. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a starting winning opening 36 that forms a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for recovering game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided.
In addition, on the right side of the center case 40 at a lower position than the normal figure start gate 34,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b which can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls to the right so that the game balls can easily flow in, and this movable member. 37b is normally kept in a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot flow in, being almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that it falls to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation is performed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric).

A downflow path 91 through which game balls can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. - 特許庁A guide portion 91 a is provided below the flow-down passage 91 . The upper surface 91b of the guide portion 91a is formed as an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the game balls flowing downward are received by the upper surface 91b and guided to the left where a special variable prize winning device 38, which will be described later, exists. .

In addition, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (big winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. The special variable winning device 38 includes an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 3
8c, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 3
8 c closes the big winning opening (disadvantageous closed state for the player) to the open state (advantageous state for the player) in which the opening/closing member 38 c retreats and can receive the game balls flowing down the game area 32 . Convert. That is, the special variable prize winning device 38 is a large prize winning opening (
Equipped with a big winning mouth), during the big hit game state (first special game state) due to the results of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the small hit game state due to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( During the second special game state), the closed state of the large prize winning port is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large prize winning port and giving the player a predetermined game value (prize balls). is to be given. Inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. .

In addition, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guide channel for guiding the winning game ball into the winning opening and a V channel formed by branching from the guide channel. The special variable prize winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position serving as an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V door is slid forward and backward by a specific area solenoid 38d (see FIG. 3) to block the inflow of game balls into the V channel, and retreats backward to prevent game balls from entering the V channel. It can be changed to an allowable state that allows inflow. In addition, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting game balls that have flowed into the V channel.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path in the special game state and the specific area switch is activated. A high probability state is set based on detection at 38e.

Also, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) large winning opening switches 38a. Also, the number of the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided. , x (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

A warp port (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40 . The game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage inside the center case 40, and a part of it is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the start winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is pushed to the starting winning opening 36.
It becomes easier to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (the general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38) 35) can be aimed at, and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), a normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in the special variable prize winning device 38 or the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), there are the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34. A collective display device 50 that displays a normal figure variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information
is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55, a normal map reservation display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the gaming machine control system of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 , which is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111 . A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a CPU
It comprises a data bus 140 and the like connecting between the unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. FIG.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. An oscillation circuit (
crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC (Di
rect current) 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V, etc. are supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC (
Alternating Current)-DC converter or DC32V voltage to DC12V, DC5V
A normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (random access memory) of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the game control device 100 is provided with power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 or the like is provided for generating and outputting a control signal such as a power outage monitoring signal or a reset signal.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , may be provided on the main substrate. game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. Control signal generating section 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply section 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the gaming microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127 . Setting value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 allows switching between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a setting key. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 can change the hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 127 in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 in the ON state. For example, the game control device 100 can cyclically change settings 1 to 6 by detecting a pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability setting value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a setting value.
D and mounted on the board.

Also, the game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state. . For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
Equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control or a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or R
An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the AM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The variation pattern table stores variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3 stored as starting memory in CPU 111A.
is a table for determining a variation pattern with reference to. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.)
, Contains a table (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which a display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed in a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices to output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113
A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit based on the above.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss) and the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time-saving operating state), the number of start memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, select one variation pattern table. to get. where CP
U111A constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. is driven to perform control for paying out prize balls. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Perform control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, starting port 2 switch 37a in normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in normal starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, special winning port switch 38 of special variable winning device 38
a, It is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable prize winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as 11 V at the high level and 7 V at the low level supplied from these switches is input, and 0
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for converting to a positive logic signal of V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 also receives a detection signal from a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 . Also, the proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V-11
By setting V, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as an improper short circuit in the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch, disconnection of a sensor or switch from a connector, or a floating lead wire due to disconnection. and is configured to output an anomaly detection signal.

In addition, when explaining the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 35a is 1 in FIG.
, but actually a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are brought close to each other through different signal lines. I
/F121. In addition, in FIG. 3, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block, but actually a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (three in this embodiment)
) are provided on the game board 30 . And these plurality of big winning opening switches 38a
Either connected by different signal lines, or, for example, the switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The board radio wave sensor 62 and the later-described magnetic sensor 61 may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F
121 outputs, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, prize winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 38a, and specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8 e is input to the second input port 123 . It should be noted that the output of signals from the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a, which are the starter switches in Special Figure 1 (proximity I/F 12
1) is shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but there are actually two lines.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of the setting value change switch 126, detection signal of the setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) is input from the device 200. FIG.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is obtained by asserting (effective level ), it can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, the payout control device 20
Frame radio wave illegal signal from 0 (signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands signal), payout error status signal (status signal indicating payout error)
, Shoot ball break switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)
A first input port 122 that takes in an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal that is output when an out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. is provided.

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from an out-sensor (not shown) each time it detects one out-ball of the gaming machine 10 . For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging game balls (out balls) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a game performance per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls)
base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135 . Note that the out ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300 .
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determination of an operating state that triggers switching to a game presentation or a customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and the detection signal of this vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124 .

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from the signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus. is configured to again,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122 , 123 and 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, the serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a part that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. It should be noted that detection signals of switches that do not need to be processed, such as starting switches, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, when the game machine is used as a game signal. An error signal indicating the uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by this chip enable signal CE are supplied to the test-firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the opening/closing data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening), and the V door of the special variable winning apparatus 38 are provided. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data for the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened/closed, opening/closing data for the general electric solenoid 37c for opening/closing the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and display data for the performance display device 135. It is

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting display data of the probability set value display device 136 . The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 134c for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. a fourth output port 1 for outputting on/off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71 .
A fifth output port 134e is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal board 71 includes:
A photorelay is provided, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game parlor, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photorelay. can be supplied to Part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Also, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132 from the fifth output port 134e.

Further, the output unit 130 receives opening/closing data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the display device 50 output from the third output port 134c, and a batch output from the fourth output port 134d An external information signal is supplied to an external device such as a management device from a third driver 138c, a fifth output port 134e, or a fourth output port 134d that outputs an on/off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the display device 50. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and generating and outputting a drive signal for the performance display device 135 are provided. It is

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
The output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, may be provided on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Also, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main substrate but on the side of an external substrate (not shown). .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490 . photo coupler 139
is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. For the avoidance of doubt, the transmission and reception of such data shall be
Since the serial communication terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 are used in the same manner as a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 31 for controlling sound output to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
PROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 providing a work area, and FeRAM (which can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. FIG. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the reproduction sound, and instructs the decoration lamp. lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
It also executes processing such as performance time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also contains an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait for notifying that the main control microcomputer 311 is in a state of waiting for reception of commands and data. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling: small amplitude signal transmission) method. From the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data, horizontal synchronizing signal HSY
NC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 .

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 .
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal I
NT is to be input. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The resulting voice is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
A D control circuit 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (a center case 40 is ) provided in the board production device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a driving source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes the effect button switch 25a of the effect button 25, the setting switch 29a of the option setting unit 29, and the effect accessory switch 47 (effect motor switch) to detect the on / off state of the main control microcomputer 311 and the function of inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 is detected and detected to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a signal is provided. Note that in FIG. 4, the option setting unit 29
are collectively referred to as a setting switch 29a for the sake of convenience. , and a detection signal indicating each state of each switch is input to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC3.3V is used based on DC5V.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
and an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on. Moreover, the circuit board which comprises the production|presentation control apparatus 300 is equivalent to a sub-control board (it is also called a sub-board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal figure start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed. A process of judging hit or miss is performed. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the general pattern display unit 55 of the collective display device 50, processing is performed to display the normal pattern variation display game to be stopped and displayed. When the result of this normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 55 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third hit stop symbols, and the general electric solenoid 37c. to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 55 is controlled to display the result of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game A random number value for judging a big hit is extracted and compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for judging a hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the second special figure variable display game is used for judging the big hit. The random value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command, production command) including the determination result of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. do. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed. do That is, the game control device 100, starting winning area of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37)
It constitutes game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small win result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small winning game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state when the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game results in a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, operates the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening/closing member 38c is opened, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A determines that either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize in the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. It is assumed that one round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small winning game state is generated when the result of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) or the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a small win. In the processing, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to enable the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening.

The opening/closing operation pattern (opening/closing operation mode) of the big winning opening performed in these small winning game states is, for example, such that the opening/closing member is kept open for 200 msec four times at intervals of 1500 msec. In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is lost, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 to display the result mode of the difference.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high-probability state is
It is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state.
In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example,
500 ms x 1 time), the opening time of the second hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), the open time of the third hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and opening number of times (
For example, it is possible to set it to be 1700 ms×3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (eg 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 70
4 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of openings of the normal electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, two times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set a second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is changed to the normal probability in the case of the normal operation state (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/
251) can be set to a higher probability (normal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern opening number of times, the normal pattern opening time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Moreover, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal electricity support state (under normal electricity support or during electricity support)
can also be called

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Have D. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d
2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18 display various states.

Collective display device 50, by allocating various status display functions to 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18, round display unit 51, special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, and special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 , a special figure 2 pattern display part 54, a normal figure pattern display part 55, a general figure reservation display part 56, a state display part 57, and a special figure 2 reservation display part 58. The round display unit 51 includes four LEDs, LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special game is displayed by the lighting mode of . The special figure 1 pending display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 has 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1
The pattern in the special figure 1 game is displayed by the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 design display unit 54 displays the design in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of the 8 LEDs (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED) of the 7 segment LED_d2. The general pattern display unit 55 displays the patterns in the general pattern game by lighting modes of three LEDs, LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal-pattern reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reserves in the normal-pattern game by the lighting modes of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays LED_d7, LE
The game state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting modes of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 reservation display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing and timer interrupt processing which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 10. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. Figure 9
4 is a diagram (part 4) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram (No. 5) illustrating a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.

The main process is started by the control section (game microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main processing, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then stack pointer setting processing for setting the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM11
The address range of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5).
. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, and the shooting of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (eg B register) (step S6), and then the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (eg C register) (step S7).

Here, predetermined bits of the first register are masked and other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the 2nd bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th and 1st bits and the 3rd to 7th bits are cleared. Then, predetermined bits of the second register are masked and other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
11C is retained as reference information (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a state reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" with the 0th and 1st bits, the 3rd and 5th to 7th bits cleared, and the 2nd bit is It is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the setting key switch 127. FIG. That is, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register indicates the setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

Also, the value "00010000B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit,
The 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared to '0' and the 2nd bit is RA
It is "0" corresponding to the detection signal ON from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the detection signal OFF from the setting key switch 127. FIG. i.e.
The value "00010000B" of the state reference register indicates the RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

Also, the value "00000100B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit,
The 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared to '0' and the 2nd bit is RA
It is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the setting key switch 127. FIG. i.e.
The value "00000100B" of the state reference register indicates the setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

Also, the value "00010100B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit,
The 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared to '0' and the 2nd bit is RA
It is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the setting key switch 127. FIG. i.e.
The value "00010100B" of the state reference register indicates the power restoration (recovery from power failure) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage location (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage location (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C The detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are preserved without being lost even by the logical sum of the registers.

After that, processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and production control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for the program of the slave control device to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 10
It is possible to prevent the slave control means from failing to receive the command by sending the command to the slave control means before 0 rises first and the slave control means rises. That is, the game control device 100 serves as standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying activation of the main control means and waiting for activation of the sub-control means when power is turned on.

Also, the timing of the power-on delay timer is used to determine the validity of the data held in the RAM area (
This is performed using a storage area not subject to checksum calculation (RAM area, registers, etc. not subject to validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register). Operations can be saved reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch may be changed from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such troublesome operations, it will be detected by performing operations immediately after turning on the power, and initialization operations performed when turning on the power will be detected. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

The second register (C register) stores the detection signal of the setting key switch 127. By storing the signal before the start of the waiting time, the setting key switch 127 can be operated. can be reliably detected. That is, after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 12 is
If the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 is operated after the waiting time has elapsed.
or continue to operate the setting key switch 127 from power-on until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such troublesome operations, it will be detected by performing operations immediately after turning on the power. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a setting confirmation operation cannot be accepted.

Next, processing for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11
), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step S12) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. A determination is made (step S13).

If the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S13; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1
4). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, wait until the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is cut off. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are still retained.
When a power failure occurs here, there is no need to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S15), and the timer value changes to "0". ” (step S16). If the timer value is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, if the timer value is "0
' (step S16; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, the RAM 11
Permission is given to access to a readable and writable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as 1C and EEPROM (step S17), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state).
(step S18).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S19
).

In step S20, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, a process of setting a RAM abnormality flag is performed. It should be noted that the setting of the RAM abnormality flag is temporary and can be updated in the process of checking for abnormality of the RAM that will be executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 1 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S23), blackout inspection area 2
is normal (step S23; Y), checksum calculation processing (step S24) is performed to calculate the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM.

In addition, in the checksum calculation process, the data of the work area for game control and the data of the work area for status display may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the work area for game control and the work area for status display The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the work area for game control. The work area for game control is a work area used for game control among the storage areas in the RWM. The work area for status display is a work area used for status display among the storage areas in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum at the time of power failure match (step S25). If it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 (step S26).

If it is determined that the checksums do not match (not normal) (step S25;
N) bypasses step S26 and proceeds to step S27, thereby making the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 definite. Even when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), step S26 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S27. The RAM abnormality flag becomes definite.

In step S27, the second register (C register) is referred to and the setting key switch 12 is
7 is ON and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. When the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is ON and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, the process proceeds to step S33, and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is ON and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the change switch 112 can be determined at the same time. In addition, the game control device 100, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
A detection signal from the setting key switch 127 and a detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity of the RAM is determined can be used as objects of determination.

In step S28, the controller determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM abnormality flag is on (that is, when the RAM abnormality flag is set), and when the RAM abnormality flag is not on (that is, when the RAM abnormality flag is set).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are the processing executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during setting and the RAM is not cleared and the system is restarted. step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for main abnormality error notification to the effect control device 300 .
Thereby, the production control device 300 performs the production control corresponding to the main abnormality error notification command. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command of main abnormality error notification, displays a message guiding a restart accompanied by RAM clearing on the display device 41, or outputs sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives a command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.例文帳に追加

In step S31, the control section displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped on the performance display device 135.
output to At this time, the controller can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135 . In addition, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability set value display device 136 . At this time, the control unit can display numerical values and characters that are not included in the probability setting values on the probability setting value display device 136 . It should be noted that the control unit, L when the game is stopped
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the collective display device 50 . At this time, the control unit may turn off all of the collective display device 50 or turn on all of them.

At step S32, the control section sends the ON data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from At this time, the control section turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71 . The control unit repeats steps S31 and S32 and waits for power shutdown. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs the security signal from the external information terminal board 71 until the power is cut off. In addition, the game machine 10 waits for the power shutdown,
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71 .

Note that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until power shutdown is awaited. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can display the NMI (No
When an n-Maskable Interrupt occurs, the return address can be stored in RAM to reduce the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for power shutdown in step S31.
And the storage contents of the RAM during the repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by RAM access prohibition, but since RAM clearing at the time of restarting becomes the condition for game control start, the danger that the storage contents of RAM are not protected is limited there is That is, the gaming machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the contents stored in the RAM are not protected. Further, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is turned off, so that steps S31 and S32
can call subroutines to improve program efficiency.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to setting change preparation.
27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This processing is executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the controller determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM abnormality flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM abnormality flag is not on.

In step S34, the controller clears the set value since the RAM abnormality flag is ON. The setting value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the setting value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the standpoint of anti-fraud measures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting a setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the setting of the gaming machine 10 is being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S<b>36 , the control unit transmits a setting change command to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command during setting change. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command during setting change, displays a message guiding that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or displays the speaker 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives a setting change command and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after preparation for setting change (steps S33 to S36) or after preparation for setting confirmation (steps S49 and S50). In step S37, the controller sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the gaming machine 10 outputs the security signal at least until the security signal control timer times out.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. The game machine 10 outputs and sets the security signal in step S37, thereby making it possible to externally recognize the execution of processing related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation.

After permitting the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) to determine whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S
39). When the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off, the control section proceeds to step S5.
5, and when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. In addition, the control unit
Occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 if a power failure has occurred, and proceeds to step S if a power failure has not occurred.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs in a state in which the interrupt is permitted in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, processing for prohibiting interruption (step S4
1), a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S42) is performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Furthermore, checksum calculation processing (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off, and processing for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
) is performed, a process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the game machine waits for the power supply to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-insertion.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is ON. At step S48, the control section refers to the second register (C register) to determine whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Steps S49 and S50 are processes related to setting confirmation preparation. step S4
At 9, the control unit performs processing for setting a setting confirmation mode flag. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is confirming the settings. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the settings are being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is being set when the settings are not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S<b>50 , the control unit transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command during setting confirmation. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command during setting confirmation, displays a message guiding that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, production control device 3
00 receives the setting confirmation command and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. - 特許庁After that, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the controller determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, it executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the controller proceeds to step S52, and if the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on, the controller proceeds to step S58. That is, the game machine 10 proceeds to execute processing related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) upon detection of start-up accompanied by pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and
Upon detection of start-up without pressing of the AM initialization switch 112, the execution of processing relating to recovery from a power failure proceeds.

Next, a description will be given of the processing related to RAM initialization performed after step S52. R.
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM areas other than the set values to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial values at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (
step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear head address 2 as the head address when clearing the RAM, and clears the area (work for game control) of the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C). area) is cleared to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data of the area to be cleared, they are cleared by clearing the data of the area to be cleared to zero.

In step S<b>54 , the control section transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message guiding that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command and notifies the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 4 that the RAM has been initialized.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is OFF after executing the process (steps S38 to S40) related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation, step S55 is executed. Run. After prohibiting the interruption (step S55), the control unit transmits a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (step S
56).

Thereby, the effect control device 300 terminates the notification that the setting is being changed started by receiving the setting change command, or the setting confirmation that is started by receiving the setting confirmation command. .

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag to determine whether or not the setting change mode is in effect (step S57). If the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to 2 to execute processing related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, if the control unit is not in the setting change mode, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes processing related to recovery from power failure.

In step S58, the control unit executes power failure recovery processing. The power failure recovery process saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized, refers to the special figure status to determine whether the special figure game is in the high probability, and determines whether the special figure game is in the high probability If , it includes a process of saving ON information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving ON-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area.

The areas to be initialized in the power failure recovery process are the power failure inspection area, the checksum area, the setting change mode flag, the setting confirmation mode flag, and the area related to error monitoring. In the power failure restoration process, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is in an indeterminate state indicating that the Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In addition, in step S59, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command,
A plurality of commands such as a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a screen designation command, etc. are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted. In addition, the screen designation command means that the control state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are both normal processing (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state),
In the case of a small win (a state that is neither of the second special game states), it is a command to display a customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to display a recovery screen. is a command to

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit design initial value random number, small hit design initial value random number, hit initial After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (value random number, winning design initial value random number) (step S61), interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuing to update the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

Here, the control unit once prohibits the interrupt (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits the interrupt after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). Performance display editing processing is processing related to base calculation and display. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive processing results more quickly. As a result, the gaming machine 10 guarantees derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing processing until the gaming state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. In addition, the control unit
Occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 if a power failure has occurred, and proceeds to step S if a power failure has not occurred.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 as long as power failure does not occur. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal checking (loop processing).

Then, interrupt is permitted (step S63) before the initial value random number update process (step S63).
66) Therefore, if a timer interrupt occurs during initial value random number update processing, the interrupt processing will be executed with priority, and interrupt processing will be put under pressure by waiting for the timer interrupt due to the initial value random number update processing. can be avoided.

Similarly, interrupts are prohibited (step S6) before the performance display editing process (step S65).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed with priority over the timer interrupt,
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the overall game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200,
At the time of power-on, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and waits for the activation of the sub-control means. Means (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit , and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the standby time starts.

It should be noted that the game control device 100 has a function (first 1 initialization means, second initialization means), it is possible to realize optimum and efficient initialization processing according to the situation.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Externally operable setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12
7), and a setting change means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit to enable setting change, and a setting display unit ( The setting (setting value) can be confirmed by providing the probability setting value display device 136). In addition, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM after the elapse of the standby time
111C access is permitted.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM 111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all processes to stop during power failure standby processing (
a loop after step S47), and a RAM abnormality standby process (loop of steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to stop while permitting access to the RAM (RAM 111C) (step S17). making it executable.

Here, the power failure standby process and the RAM abnormality standby process will be described. The power failure standby process is a loop process that is executed after access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all processes to stop. Also, since the power failure standby process is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, the interrupt (timer interrupt) other than the NMI interrupt is prohibited. It should be noted that the standby process at the time of power failure is NMI
NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled for interrupts. However, since the power failure waiting process is a process that is executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of this process. Also, the power failure standby process is a standby process that does not accompany an anomaly notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the power until the power shutdown to the power failure process. The gaming machine 10 inhibits access to the RAM during standby processing at the time of power failure, thereby reducing the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will change due to unstable voltage.

The RAM abnormality standby process is a loop process that is executed after access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all processes to stop.
In addition, since the RAM abnormality standby process is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S1 of the main process, interrupts other than NMI interrupts (timer interrupts) are prohibited. In addition, since the standby process at the time of power failure cannot prohibit interrupts for NMI interrupts, N
An MI interrupt can occur. Since the RAM abnormality standby process is a process of waiting for power shutdown, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during execution of this process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, since access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, the RAM abnormality standby process can store the return address in the RAM, and the risk of program runaway caused by the NMI interrupt is small. In addition, since the game machine 10 transmits the command of the main abnormality error notification to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the abnormality notification by the effect control device 300 can be performed in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. can be done. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be expected to restart quickly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be explained using FIG. Figure 1
1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until when the interrupt is prohibited (from step S38 to step S41, from step S38 to step S55, from step S66 to step S64, from step S66). to step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in The timer interrupt processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7
1). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different.

Next, an input process (step S73) of reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag to determine whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. If the control unit is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the control unit proceeds to step S75, executes the setting change/confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the control unit is neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S76.

In step S76, the control section executes output processing for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electrical solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in various processing.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1
00, and a second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of fire permission viewed from the payout control device 200 is also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. Output to the control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device,
It is configured such that the game ball can be shot when both are allowed to be shot.

Next, the control unit sends commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Payout command transmission processing for outputting 0 (step S77), random number update processing 1 (step S7
8), Random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number that are targets of the initial value random number update process. . Also, the random number update process 2 is
It is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. The random number update process 1 or the random number update process 2 in addition to the random number update process 1 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit controls the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the normal gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 38.
Winning hole switch/state monitoring processing (step S80) is performed to monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from e and monitor errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.). In addition, a starting port switch monitoring process (step S81) for monitoring the winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) is extracted, and a game result preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game.

Next, the control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 game processing (step S83) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game, general figure variation General-purpose game processing (step S
84).

Next, the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game (for example, the LE of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50
D) segment LED editing process (step S85) to drive to display the desired content
), the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (step S86), and the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. A board radio fraud monitoring process (step S87) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S88) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer and a performance display device control process (step S89) are performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The controller prohibits interrupts.

[Step D<b>12 ] The controller initializes the CPU 311 .
[Step D<b>13 ] The controller initializes the VDP 312 .
[Step D14] The controller permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The controller permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 is permitted to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The controller sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so that it differs for each gaming machine. You may

[Step D17] The control unit uses the RWM of the effect control device 300 (for example, the RAM 322)
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, a flag area for production (storage area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the production control device 300)).

[Step D18] The controller clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a) is operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process, or may be performed within a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control section executes hall/player setting mode processing. Hall/player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and the display device 41, volume, etc.,
This is a process of accepting an operation such as changing the brightness of the LED or the display device 41 and the sound volume by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes random number update processing. For example, the random number update process is performed by r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random numbers at least once in each control cycle of the main process using an and function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number simply by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The controller executes a received command check process. The received command check process is a process of analyzing commands received from the game control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is performed by V
This is processing for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 about the content of drawing on the display device 41 . For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The controller determines whether or not it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames, the process proceeds to step D26. If it is time to switch frames, it waits for the time to switch frames. Here, the frame switching timing is determined by the V blank interrupt (
It is timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second≈33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of V sync interrupt). Note that the V blank interrupt occurs each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The period of generation of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 sec ≈ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

By the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the content of the presentation is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of processing cycles). If the processing period is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames will be 100 ms. This is the same as that the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The controller controls VDP3 according to the command set in step D23.
12 is instructed to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw the screen.

[Step D27] The controller executes sound control processing. The sound control processing is processing related to volume control of sounds from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The controller executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The controller executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control section executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets the launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of rental balls)). mode correction.

[Step D31] The control unit executes information disclosure processing. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information regarding game performance to the player.
After executing step D31, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter returns to step D1.
8 to step D31 are repeatedly executed. That is, step D18 to step D
31 is a loop process (
Sometimes referred to as main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the screen effects. A signal for driving control, etc.) is actually output to the port in a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there are cases in which signals, etc., are not output by timer interrupts, just by giving instructions through serial communication or the like.

Next, the display executed by the effect control device 300 during the game of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 . FIG. 13 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment. Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen consisting of one or more images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle different codes are used for different display contents. is attached.

A display screen 500 shown in FIG. 13(1) is a display screen in which symbols are stopped. It is used for period stop display. The display screen 500 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, and a reserved display 505.
, and a pending digestion display 506 are displayed.

The large pattern group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large pattern group 5
01 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 501 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols.

In the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol indicates that
It shows that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, the large symbol group 501 on the display screen 500 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 502 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 501 . The small pattern group 502 is
It includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left, medium and right symbols that constitute the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 501 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 502, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 502 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 501, and has a low degree of freedom of display position (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3".
The special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 500, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0".

Suspension display 505 shows how the number of suspension icons 507 corresponding to the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 game is displayed corresponding to the current gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). hold icon 5
07 has, for example, a spherical shape, and the pending icon 507 can also be displayed with movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.). Further, the pending consumption display 506 shows how the pending consumption icon 508 corresponding to the pending consumption of the special figure game is displayed. Pending digestion icon 508 is, for example, a spherical shape, and pending digestion icon 50
8 can also produce a display with movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays "3" and the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays "0", the pending display 505 shows three pending storage displays indicates that the number of reserved memories is "3". It should be noted that the number of reservations or the number of reservations means the number of starting memories in which the special figure variation display game has not been executed.

Suspension display 505, depending on its display mode (suspension storage display displayed in suspension display 505),
The number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game can be specified, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be notified.

The pending digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state and inform the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. In the display screen 500, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

It should be noted that the reservation display 505, according to the gaming state, the reservation number of either the special figure 1 game or the reservation number of the special figure 2 game was displayed by the reservation icon 507, but the special figure 1
The total pending number of the game pending number and the special figure 2 game pending number may be displayed by the pending icon 507 .

A display screen 510 shown in FIG. 13(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. A display screen 510 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 500 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). On the display screen 510, the left, medium and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being variably displayed. Also, on the display screen 510, the left pattern, the medium pattern, and the right pattern of the small pattern group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "2".
, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the reserved display 505 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 1 game , indicating that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". In addition, on the display screen 510, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

The display screen 500 and the display screen 510 may include effect display elements (not shown) such as background display, character display, and character display. It may be possible.

Here, the decorative design (decorative design) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative design of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 comprises decorative symbols (large symbol group), which will be described later, with left symbols, right symbols, and middle symbols, and stops the left symbols, right symbols, and middle symbols in the order of symbol variation. The gaming machine 10 can display a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B as decorative patterns.

For example, the gaming machine 10 can use the decorative pattern A for the left pattern and the right pattern that can form a pattern combination that will result in a ready-to-win situation, and use the decorative pattern B for the middle pattern that will form a pattern combination that will result in a big win after the ready-to-win condition is formed. can. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 can use the decorative symbol A in the normal game state and the decorative symbol B in the high-probability game state or electric sapo game state.

Decorative pattern A includes patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527. The patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527 are distinguishable from other patterns by different display modes. The decorative pattern A includes two or more pattern constituent elements, at least one of which has distinguishability from other patterns. The decorative design A is a decorative design that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a distinctive design element.

The pattern 521 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 521 includes a background portion 521d and a number portion 521n. The background portion 521d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white circular shape). The number part 521n has identifiability as a design.

A pattern 522 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 522 includes a background portion 522d and a number portion 522n. The background portion 522d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white cross). The number part 522n has identifiability as a design.

The pattern 523 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 523 includes a background portion 523d and a number portion 523n. The background portion 523d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white square shape). The number part 523n has identifiability as a design.

A pattern 524 is a pattern that displays the number "4". The pattern 524 includes a background portion 524d and a number portion 524n. The background portion 524d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white double circle). The number part 524n has identifiability as a design.

The pattern 525 is a pattern that displays the number "5". The pattern 525 includes a background portion 525d and a number portion 525n. The background portion 525d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white triangular shape). The number part 525n has identifiability as a design.

A design 526 is a design that displays the number "6". The pattern 526 includes a background portion 526d and a number portion 526n. The background portion 526d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white rhombus). The number part 526n has identifiability as a design.

The pattern 527 is a pattern that displays the number "7". The pattern 527 includes a background portion 527d and a number portion 527n. The background portion 527d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white star shape). The number part 527n has identifiability as a design.

The decorative pattern B includes patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537. The patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537 are distinguishable from other patterns by different display modes. The decorative design B includes one design component, and the one design component has a discriminating power that allows it to be distinguished from other designs. The decorative design B is a decorative design that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a design constituent element having recognizability.

The pattern 531 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 532 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 533 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 534 is a number "
4" is displayed. The pattern 535 is a pattern that displays the number "5". Design 53
6 is a pattern that displays the number "6". The pattern 537 is a pattern that displays the number "7".

Next, a variable display example using the decorative pattern A and a variable display example using the decorative pattern B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram (
2).

A display screen 512 shown in FIG. 15(1) shows how the decorative symbol A is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 512, the large pattern group 501 swings the pattern 523 (left), the pattern 525 (middle), and the pattern 527 (right) to display the left pattern "3", the middle pattern "5", and the right pattern "7". ” is displayed as a temporary stop.

On the display screen 512, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 512, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates the reserved memory of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "0" and a pending indication 50
5 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 1 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". In addition, on the display screen 512, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

A display screen 514 shown in FIG. 15(2) shows a state in which the decorative symbol B is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 514, the large pattern group 501 swings the pattern 533 (left), the pattern 535 (middle), and the pattern 537 (right) to display the left pattern "3," the middle pattern "5," and the right pattern "7." ” is displayed as a temporary stop.

On the display screen 514, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is in the process of fluctuating display. Also, on the display screen 514, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates the reserved memory of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 50 indicates that the number is "2"
5 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 2 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 game) is "2". Also, on the display screen 514, the pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is being displayed in variation.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol A and a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol B. Next, a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during temporary stop display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using decorative symbols according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 16(1) shows the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

In the pattern 527 during the temporary stop display, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n having distinguishability as the pattern 527 swings in the horizontal direction. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may be an image that displays an animation accompanied by movement.

As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the swinging of the number portion by comparison with the background portion, and realizes a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to understand. Note that the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part in order to facilitate the comparison between the background part and the number part.

FIG. 16(2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

The pattern 537 during temporary stop display swings the entire pattern 537 in the horizontal direction (first temporary stop operation).
while rotating the vertical axis (second temporary stop operation) within a predetermined angle range. That is, the pattern 537
is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations.

As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the temporary stop motion of the entire pattern, and allows the player to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstruction of the game performance. In addition, the game machine 10 makes the outline display of the symbol ambiguous (non-emphasized) in order to emphasize the temporary stop motion of the entire symbol.

Although the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations, a combination of three types of temporary stop operations including deformation operations, etc., or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop operations is also possible. good.

In addition, the entire pattern (for example, pattern 537) or the pattern component (for example, number part 5
27n) is not limited to rocking motion in a narrow sense, but includes periodic motion that can be perceived as temporary stop motion. For example, vertical axis rotation performed within a predetermined angle range, deformation motion repeating a predetermined pattern, and the like are included in rocking motion in the temporary stop motion.

In addition, the temporary stop operation of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is the temporary stop operation in which the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction, but there are two types of temporary stop operation of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display. It may be a temporary stop motion in which the vertical axis rotates within a predetermined angle range, which is one of the stop motions.

Further, the decorative pattern B (for example, the pattern 537) being temporarily stopped is rotated in the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range (second However, it is not limited to this as long as it includes a different form of the temporary stop operation from the pattern component (for example, the number portion 527n) of the decorative pattern A (for example, the pattern 527) during the temporary stop display.
For example, when the temporary stop motion of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop motion of rocking the number portion 527n in the horizontal direction, the temporary stop motion of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display rocks in the horizontal direction. It is acceptable if it includes a temporary stop motion in which the vertical axis rotates within a range of a predetermined angle, which is different from the temporary stop motion. At this time, the temporary stop motion of the pattern 537 during the temporary stop display may include only the temporary stop motion of rotating the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range, or additionally the temporary stop motion of rocking in the horizontal direction. may be included, or other temporary stop operations may be included. Even in this way, the gaming machine 10 clearly distinguishes between the temporary stop operation of the decorative symbol A and the temporary stop operation of the decorative symbol B, and even if the modes of the decorative symbols are diverse, the game machine 10 can easily understand the temporary stop operation for the player. Realize the stop operation.

Further, the game machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display and obscures the outline display of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. Decorative pattern A
This can be realized by making the contour display of the numeral portion of (1) thicker than the contour display of the decorative pattern B during temporary stop display. In addition, emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may be realized by saturation or brightness, and may be achieved by combining the thickness of the outline display with saturation or brightness. There may be. Also, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, and the pattern width (
Alternatively, it may be defined by a ratio of the width of the numeric part).

Regarding the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display, the background portion is fixed and the number portion swings in the horizontal direction, but the background portion may swing. Next, the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display
A swinging example of the background portion of is described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of swinging of the background portion of the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display according to the first embodiment. Note that the rocking motion described below is not limited to a one-way rocking motion, and may be axial rotation, deformation, or the like.

A pattern 527 shown in FIG.
7b and a symbol portion 527s having identifiability as the design 527, the background portion 527
Construct d. A pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(1) includes a base portion 527b and a symbol portion 527.
s and the numeral portion 527n are integrally rocked in the horizontal direction with the same period, phase, and displacement.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) is formed by fixing the base portion 527b and forming the symbol portion 527s.
, the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction. That is, the pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) is
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n oscillate in the horizontal direction with the same period, phase, and displacement.
Note that the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may not be limited to having the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement, while both swinging in the horizontal direction. For example, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may both oscillate in the horizontal direction, but may have different periods, different phases, or different amounts of displacement. Also, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may differ in two or more of the period, phase, and displacement. Also, the base portion 527b is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement. Also, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(3) is formed by fixing the base portion 527b and forming the symbol portion 527s.
swings in the vertical direction, and the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction. That is, in the design 527 shown in FIG. 17(3), the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in different manners. The symbol part 527s and the number part 527n may have the same period and the same phase, or may have different periods and different phases, while oscillating in different modes. Also, the base portion 527b
is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement.
Also, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

Here, the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A will be illustrated with reference to FIG. 18 . FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A of the first embodiment. In the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A shown in FIG.
The amount of displacement is assumed to be 10% of the pattern width (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels). Further, in the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18(1), the base portion and the symbol portion are fixed. Although the amount of displacement of the number portion was 10% of the pattern width, the amount of displacement of the number portion was 10% of the width of the number portion (for example, 20 pixels when the width of the number portion was 200 pixels). It may be

Another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A shown in FIG.
0% (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).

Another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A shown in FIG. 80 pixels for 800 pixels). Also, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(3)
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base portion and the symbol portion is the same horizontal direction as the number portion, the displacement cycle is 1000 ms different from the number portion (larger than the number portion), and the displacement amount is different from the number portion (number 15% (for example, 120 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels) to the pattern width (larger than the part).

In another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A shown in FIG. 80 pixels for 800 pixels). Also, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(4)
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base portion is the same as the number portion in the left and right direction, the displacement period is 1000 ms different from the number portion (larger than the number portion), and the displacement amount is different from the number portion (larger than the number portion). ) 15% of the pattern width (for example, 1 when the pattern width is 800 pixels)
20 pixels). In another example of the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. The amount of displacement is assumed to be 10% with respect to the same pattern width as the number portion.

Next, emphasis display and ambiguous (non-emphasis) display of the outline of the pattern will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing emphasized display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of the pattern according to the first embodiment.

Fig. 19(1) shows the pattern widths and outlines of the decorative patterns A and B, and Fig. 19(2) shows a comparison of the outline thicknesses of the decorative patterns A and B. The decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a number portion width of w2 (<w1), and an outline width (thickness) of the number portion of w3 (<w2).
The decorative pattern B has a pattern width of w4 and an outline width (thickness) of the pattern of w5 (<w4).

The game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A by making the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the pattern of the decorative pattern B. The player can be made to feel that the contour display of the pattern B is ambiguous.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may realize emphasis and non-emphasis of the outline display by the ratio of the width of the symbol and the thickness of the outline (outline ratio). For example, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A by making the contour ratio w3/w2 of the decorative pattern A larger than the contour ratio w5/w4 of the decorative pattern B, thereby enhancing the decoration. The player can be made to feel that the contour display of the pattern B is ambiguous.

Emphasizing the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and de-emphasizing the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. Next, switching of the emphasized state of outline display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-emphasizing) display of the outline of the pattern according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 20(1) shows a comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During variable display (non-temporary stop state), during variable display (temporary stop state), and during stop display, the number part of decorative pattern A is changed to decorative pattern B.
The contour display of the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the whole pattern of B, and the contour display of the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 20(2) shows another example of comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is emphasized compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is similar to the number part of the decorative design A. The outline representation is blurred (de-emphasized) in comparison. Further, during the stop display, the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is not emphasized compared to the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. The contour display is not obscured (de-emphasized). In this manner, the game machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-emphasis display according to the variable display state by switching the highlighting state of the outline display according to the variable display state. In addition, the gaming machine 10
By switching the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state, the player can easily perceive the change in the emphasized state of the contour display. In addition, the game machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstruction of the game presentation, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 20(3) shows another example of comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B,
The overall design of the decorative design B is made obscure (non-emphasized) in outline display as compared with the number part of the decorative design A. - 特許庁Further, during the variable display (non-temporary stop state) and during the stop display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is not emphasized as compared with the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is The contour display is not made ambiguous (de-emphasized) as compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display only during the variable display (temporary stop state), thereby making it possible to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstacles to the game performance. .

Next, as a modification of the first embodiment, the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is deemphasized,
A game machine 10 emphasizing the outline display of the decorative pattern B will be described. Such a gaming machine 10 can strongly appeal the temporary stop action of the decorative symbol B to the player.
In addition, such a game machine 10 prevents the number part of the decorative pattern A from being emphasized more than the base part and the symbol part, and the number part of the decorative pattern A has a sense of unity with the base part and the symbol part. The stop action can be more appealing to the player.

The non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and the emphasis of the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. Next, switching of the emphasized state of outline display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to FIG. 21 . FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of emphasized display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of the pattern according to the modification of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21(1) shows a comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During variable display (non-temporary stop state), during variable display (temporary stop state), and during stop display, the number part of decorative pattern A is changed to decorative pattern B.
The contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the whole pattern of B, and the contour display of the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 21(2) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is the decorative design. The contour display is emphasized compared to the number part of A. Further, during the stop display, the contour display of the number portion of the decorative design A is not made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is the number of the decorative design A. The contour display is not emphasized compared to the part. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-emphasis display according to the variable display state by switching the highlighting state of the outline display according to the variable display state. In addition, the gaming machine 10
By switching the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state, the player can easily perceive the change in the emphasized state of the contour display. In addition, the game machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstruction of the game performance, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 21(3) shows another example of comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the overall pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the overall pattern of the decorative pattern B is the same as that of the decorative pattern A. The outline display is emphasized compared to the numerical portion of the . Further, during variable display (non-temporary stop state) and during stop display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is not made ambiguous (de-emphasized) compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the decorative design B , the contour display is not emphasized as compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display only during the variable display (temporary stop state), thereby making it possible to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstacles to the game performance. .

Here, FIG. 22 shows a more detailed modification of the display mode of the decorative patterns A and B during temporary stop display.
will be used to explain. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stop display using decorative symbols according to a modification of the first embodiment.

FIG. 22(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

The pattern 527 during the temporary stop display has a background portion 527d fixed, and the number portion 527n that is identifiable as the pattern 527 swings in the horizontal direction (first temporary stop operation), and expands and contracts in the vertical direction ( second temporary stop operation). That is, the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions in the number portion. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may be an image that displays an animation accompanied by movement.

As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the temporary stop operation of the number part, and allows the player to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing the hindrance to the game performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10
In order to emphasize the temporary stop operation of the number part, the contour display of the number part is made ambiguous (non-emphasized).

The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions in the number part, but a combination of three types of temporary stop actions with deformation actions etc., or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop actions. A combination may be used.

FIG. 22(2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d). The symbol 537 during temporary stop display swings the entire symbol 537 in the vertical direction. As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the swinging of the entire pattern by emphasizing the outline display of the entire pattern, thereby realizing a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 vaguely (non-emphasizes) the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display.
The contour display of the decorative design B during temporary stop display is emphasized, but the contour display of the decorative design B during temporary stop display is emphasized from the contour display of the number part of decorative design A during temporary stop display. This can be achieved by making it thicker.

In addition, emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may be realized by saturation or brightness, and may be achieved by combining the thickness of the outline display with saturation or brightness. There may be. Further, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, and may be defined by the ratio of the pattern width (or the width of the number portion). In addition, emphasis and non-emphasis of the outline display may be achieved by thickening the outline display of one of the decorative patterns to be compared and thinning the other, or by adjusting the thickness of the outline display of one of the decorative patterns to be compared. may be left unchanged and only the other is changed. Further, the enhancement of the outline display may be performed by setting the outline display to an object that originally does not have the outline display. Further, the non-emphasis of the contour display may be performed by omitting the contour display originally set.

Regarding the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display, the background portion is fixed and the number portion swings in the horizontal direction, but the background portion may swing. Emphasis of the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and non-emphasis of the contour display of the pattern of the decorative pattern B may be always fixed, but can be switched according to the variable display state. Also in the modified example, it is possible to switch the emphasized state of the contour display described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 .

Next, the message effects in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 2
3 is a diagram showing an example of a message display effect of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 controls the thickness of the outline display portion of the message display in the message presentation in the variable display game, thereby enhancing the player's perceptive effect of the message.

A display screen 600 shown in FIG. 23(1) shows how the large symbol group 501 is in the ready-to-win state. In the display screen 600, the large pattern group 501 includes the large pattern (left) and the large pattern (right) as patterns "3".
is rocked to display a temporary stop, and the large pattern (middle) is variably displayed. Note that the display screen 60
0 indicates that the left pattern, middle pattern and right pattern of the small pattern group 502 are fluctuating, and that the special figure fluctuation display game is in the process of fluctuating display.

In addition, the display screen 600 shows a message display effect being executed in relation to the fact that the large symbol group 501 is in the ready-to-win mode. A display screen 600 displays a message display effect 603 . The message display rendering 603 includes a background portion 604 and a message portion 605 . A background portion 604 is a display serving as a background of the message portion 605, and facilitates distinction from other display portions. The background portion 604 has, for example, a balloon shape, and has a different color or the like from the other display portions to facilitate distinction between the background portion 604 and the other display portions. The message section 605 displays a desired message (for example, "chance!") to make the player feel a predetermined sense of expectation.

A display screen 602 shown in FIG. 23B is a display screen following the display screen 600 . The message display effect 603 is a dynamically changing display, and compared to the display screen 600, the background portion 6
04 have the same position and size. On the other hand, the message display rendering 603 enlarges and displays the message portion 605 compared to the display screen 600 . A message display rendering 603 thickens the contour display of the message portion 605 as the message portion 605 is enlarged. That is, the message display effect 603 enhances the player's sense of the message by fixing the position and size of the background portion 604 and displaying the message portion 605 in an enlarged manner. In addition, the message display effect 603 increases the thickness of the outline display of the message portion 605 while fixing the thickness of the outline display of the background portion 604, thereby further enhancing the player's perceptive effect of the message. . The enlargement of the thickness of the outline display of the message portion 605 may be the same as the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message portion 605. The perceptive effect of the message can be further enhanced. Although the case where the thickness of the outline display of the message portion 605 is enlarged has been described as being larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message portion 605, the present invention is not limited to this, and the thickness is made smaller than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message portion 605. By doing so, the player may be alerted and the effect of the message may be enhanced.

Regarding the switching of the outline display of the gaming machine 10 , the large symbol group 501 and the message display effect 603 have been described, but the gaming machine 10 may switch the outline display of the small symbol group 502 . Here, switching of outline display of the small pattern group 502 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of outline display of the small pattern group according to the first embodiment.

First, the normal display position (during stop display) of the small pattern (any one of the small pattern group 502)
is shown in FIG. 24(1). The small pattern group 502 includes a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, all of which are similarly variable display. The variable display of the small symbols is a switching variation in which the symbols are sequentially switched according to the pattern arrangement. Since the small pattern viewed from the display area 540 has no offset setting, it is always displayed at the normal display position where the entire pattern can be observed. For example, figure 5
44 is in the normal display position. The pattern 544 during the static display is displayed with the contour of the entire pattern emphasized compared to the pattern 544 during the variable display.

It should be noted that the switching fluctuation of the small pattern is performed in frame units (display switching time units) in the display device 41.
It is expressed by rewriting the small pattern. Here, the pattern display for each frame is shown in FIG. 24(2).

For example, when the small pattern 543 (symbol "3") is displayed in the display area 540 at the normal display position in one frame, the pattern 544 (symbol "4") is displayed in the display area 540 in the normal display position in the next frame. to display. Similarly, for the small pattern, a pattern 545 (symbol "5") is displayed in the display area 540 at the normal display position in the next frame. Patterns 543 and 54 at the normal display position
4 and 545, the entire pattern can be observed from the display area 511 and has sufficient discrimination power. The pattern 544 during variable display is displayed with the outline of the entire pattern emphasized compared to the pattern 544 during stop display. The same applies to other small symbols including the symbols 543 and 545. FIG.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 cyclically switches the symbols to "3", "4", "5", . . . every frame time (33.3 ms). Therefore, small pattern group 5
In the variable display of 02, the display time per symbol is 33.3 ms, and the display time per symbol at the normal display position is 33.3 ms. In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is always displayed at the normal display position even during the variable display. It assists in making it easy to perceive the changing display of the group 502 . Note that the ambiguous display during the variable display of the small pattern group 502 is limited to outlines, and other portions are displayed in the same manner as during the stop display, thereby ensuring a certain degree of discernment of the entire pattern.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), swinging the first identification component in one direction (e.g., left-right direction) of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left-right direction) different from the first direction; When the type 2 pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying element is set to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. direction and the second direction (for example, vertical axis rotation direction and left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).

(2) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), The first identification component is rocked in both a first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation) and a second direction (eg, left-right direction) different from the first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation and left-right direction). When moving to temporarily stop and display the type 1 symbol, the outline display of the first identifying element is changed to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. and the second direction (for example, left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21).

(3) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), The first identification component is rocked in both a first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation) and a second direction (eg, left-right direction) different from the first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation and left-right direction). When moving to temporarily stop and display the type 2 symbol, the outline display of the first identifying element is changed to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. and the second direction (for example, left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 22).

(4) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), swinging the first identification component in one direction (e.g., left-right direction) of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left-right direction) different from the first direction; When the type 1 pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying element is set to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. direction and the second direction (for example, vertical axis rotation direction and left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 21, and 22).

(5) The gaming machine 10 has a first display area (for example, the display area of the large symbol group 501) and a second display area (for example, , the display area 540 of the small pattern group 502), and a control means capable of independently deriving the result mode of the variable display game in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) and, the control means,
A first pattern group (for example, a large pattern group 501) is variably displayed in a first display area, and a second pattern group (for example, a small pattern group 502) smaller than the first pattern group is variably displayed in the first display area. At this time, the thickness of the outline display during the variable display for each symbol in the second symbol group is made thinner than the thickness of the outline display during the stop of the variation (see FIG. 24).

(6) Gaming machine 10 includes display means (for example, display device 41) capable of displaying effects related to variable display games (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game), and message display (message display effect 603 ), the message display is configured to include a character portion (message portion 605) and a background portion (background portion 604) serving as the background of the character portion, and the character portion is enlarged while the size of the background portion is fixed. Along with displaying, a control unit (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300) that changes the outline display of the character part from the first thickness to the second thickness different from the first thickness ( See Figure 23).

(7) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), swinging the first identification component in one direction (e.g., left-right direction) of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left-right direction) different from the first direction; When the type 2 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying element is set to a second form (for example, non-highlighted display) thinner than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. and the second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21)
.

(8) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s), and a pattern that contains a first identification component and excludes a second identification component. and a control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) for switching between the second type symbol (for example, the decorative symbol B) and displaying it on the display means, and the control means is the first When the seed pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identification component is set to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), and the first identification component is rotated in the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction). and a second direction different from the first direction (for example, the horizontal direction).
Outline representation of the first identifying component in a second aspect (e.g., highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identifying component in at least one of the first and second orientations 17, 19, 20
reference).

(9) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s), and a pattern that contains a first identification component and excludes a second identification component. and a control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) for switching between the second type symbol (for example, the decorative symbol B) and displaying it on the display means, and the control means is the first When the seed pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying component is set to the first mode (for example, highlighted display), and the first identifying component is set to the first direction (for example,
vertical axis rotation direction) or a second direction different from the first direction (for example, left-right direction), and the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. , outlining the first identifying component in a second aspect (e.g., non-highlighting) that is narrower than the first aspect, and moving the first identifying component in at least one of the first orientation and the second orientation. 17, 19, and 21 (Figs. 17, 19, 21
reference).

[Second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, which can change the thickness of the outline display for each part of the decorative pattern, will be described. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof may be omitted. First, the outline display switching of the decorative pattern during temporary stop display by rotating the vertical axis will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of decorative symbols according to the second embodiment.

Fig. 25(1) shows that "7" (design 537) of the decorative design B shown in Fig. 25(1) rotates along the vertical axis and is temporarily stopped. A pattern 550 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated counterclockwise on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. A pattern 551 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is viewed from the front. The pattern 552 is
It shows how "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated rightward on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 552 and from the symbol 552 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 550 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 25(2), the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the contour display for each switching target contour display portion (the left half of the pattern, the right half of the pattern). .
The gaming machine 10 uses the left half of the pattern 550 as the left portion 550L and the right half of the pattern 550 as the right portion 550L.
When 0R, the contour display of the left part 550L, which seems to move away, is thinned (
(non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the outline display of the right portion 550R, which seems to move in the approaching direction, is displayed thicker (highlighted display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 550L, which is seen farther than the right portion 550R, thinner than the contour display of the right portion 550R, and displays the contour display of the left portion 550R.
The contour display of the right portion 550R, which looks closer than 0L, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 550L.

Further, when the left half of the pattern 551 is the left part 551L and the right half of the pattern 551 is the right part 551R, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline display of the left part 551L and the outline display of the right part 551R to the standard thickness. (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L and the contour display of the right portion 551R, which appear at approximately the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the pattern 552 is the left portion 552L and the right half of the pattern 552 is the right portion 552R, the contour display of the left portion 552L that appears to move in the approaching direction is thickened (highlighted). ), and thinly (non-highlighted, vaguely displayed) the outline display of the right portion 552R that appears to move away. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has the left part 552L
The contour display of the right portion 552R, which is seen farther, is displayed thinner than the contour display of the left portion 552L,
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which looks closer than the right portion 552R, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. The left part or the right part of the pattern may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis is changed according to the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so. For example, when emphasizing the contour display of the right portion 550R of the pattern 550, the gaming machine 10 can thicken the contour display (increase the rate of change or the amount of change) at a position farther from the vertical axis (central axis). , when the contour display of the left part 550L of the pattern 550 is non-emphasized, the contour display can be made thinner (the rate of change or the amount of change is increased) as the position is farther from the vertical axis (central axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, outline display switching of decorative symbols during temporary stop display by rocking in the horizontal direction will be described with reference to FIG. 26 . FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of decorative symbols in a modification of the second embodiment.

Fig. 26(1) shows that "7" (design 537) of the decorative design B shown in Fig. 26(1) swings in the horizontal direction to display a temporary stop. A pattern 560 shows a state in which the "7" of the decorative pattern B has moved leftward from the normal position by a predetermined amount. A pattern 561 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is in the correct position. A pattern 562 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B has moved rightward from the normal position by a predetermined amount. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 560 to the symbol 561 to the symbol 562 and from the symbol 562 to the symbol 561 to the symbol 560 .

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis level) of the outline display, as shown in FIG. 26(2). The gaming machine 10 assumes that the left half of the pattern 560 is the left portion 560L and the right half of the pattern 560 is the right portion 560R. The outline display is displayed thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the outline display of the right portion 560R, which appears to move toward the center of the display position, is displayed thick (highlighted display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 560L, which appears farther from the display position center than the right portion 560R, to be thinner than the contour display of the right portion 560R, and displays the contour display of the right portion 560L, which appears closer to the display position center than the left portion 560L. The contour display of the portion 560R is displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 560L.

When the left half of the pattern 561 is the left part 561L and the right half of the pattern 561 is the right part 561R, the gaming machine 10 sets the contour display of the left part 561L and the contour display of the right part 561R to standard thickness. (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 561L and the contour display of the right portion 561R, which appear at approximately the same position from the center of the display position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Also, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 562 is the left portion 562L and the right half of the symbol 562 is the right portion 562R, the left portion 562 appears to move toward the center of the display position.
The contour display of L is displayed thick (highlighted), and the contour display of the right portion 562R, which seems to move away from the center of the display position, is displayed thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the right portion 562R, which appears farther from the display position center than the left portion 562L, to be thinner than the contour display of the left portion 562L, and displays the contour display of the left portion 562R, which appears closer to the display position center than the right portion 562R. The contour display of the portion 562L is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 562R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. The left part or the right part of the pattern may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis is changed according to the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so. For example, when emphasizing the contour display of the left part 560L of the pattern 560, the gaming machine 10 can make the contour display thicker as the position farther from the vertical axis (central axis) is displayed, and the contour display of the right part 560R of the pattern 560 can be made thicker. is de-highlighted, the outline display can be thinned as the position is farther from the vertical axis (central axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, outline display switching target portions of symbols will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of an outline display switching target portion during temporary stop display of decorative symbols according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the game machine 10 can divide the pattern into a left half and a right half along the vertical center line, and the two parts can be used as switching target outline display parts. for example,
A pattern 570 shown in FIG. 27(1) is divided into a left portion 570a and a right portion 570b, and the left portion 570a and the right portion 570b are used as outline display switching target portions, and outline display can be switched between emphasized display and non-emphasized display. can switch to

In the game machine 10, a portion on one side of the pattern (one side portion) and a portion on the other side (other side portion) are set as portions to be subjected to outline display switching of the pattern, and the remaining portions are subjected to outline display of the pattern. It may not be a switching target portion. For example, a design 571 shown in FIG. 27(2) has a one-side portion 571a and an other-side portion 571b. and non-highlighted.
Further, in the design 571 shown in FIG. 27(2), the remaining portions that are not set as the one side portion 571a and the other side portion 571b are not set as the outline display switching target portion.

It is desirable that the one side portion and the other side portion of the pattern have a symmetrical positional relationship with respect to the center of the pattern, but the positional relationship is not limited to this and may be any positional relationship. Further, the one side portion and the other side portion of the pattern are desirably set in relation to the swinging mode of the pattern when the pattern is temporarily stopped, but they are not limited to this and may be set in any positional relationship. may

Also, the gaming machine 10 may set only a part of the pattern as the outline display switching target portion of the symbol, and not set the remaining part as the outline display switching target portion of the symbol. For example, in FIG. 27 (3
), a part 572a is set, and the part 572a can be used as a contour display switching target part to switch the contour display between emphasized display and non-emphasized display. Further, in the pattern 572 shown in FIG. 27(3), the remaining portion which is not set as the portion 572a is not set as the contour display switching target portion.

Note that the outline display switching target portion of the pattern is not limited to one, and two or three or more may be set, and may be set in an arbitrary positional relationship that contributes to the perception of the temporary stop display. can be anything.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game) that variably displays symbols (for example, symbols 570, 571, 572) 41), a first state (for example, standard thickness) in which the contour display of the pattern is set to the first thickness when the pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a first portion of the pattern (for example, the left portion 570a,
a control means for causing the display means to display the one side portion 571a, the portion 572a) as a second thickness (for example, highlighted) that is thicker than the first thickness (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

(2) The control means of (1) controls the remaining second symbols (for example, symbols 570 and 571).
The part (for example, the right part 570b, the other side part 571b) is displayed on the display means as a second state (for example, non-highlighted display) having a third thickness thinner than the first thickness (FIGS. 25 to 2).
7).

[Third Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with the gaming board 30, but the gaming machine of the third embodiment has a gaming board 800 (see FIG. 28) different from the gaming board 30. It will be explained as a game machine provided. FIG. 28 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 800 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 800 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 820 having a display device (variable display device) 830 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 830 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 820 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 820 . That is, the center case 820 surrounds the display area of the display device 830 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 830 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 830 is composed of a device having a display screen capable of dot-matrix display using LEDs. Note that the display device 830 may be, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (
It may be composed of a device having a display screen such as a cathode ray tube. In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 830, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. Also, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed based on the progress of the game.

Further, a board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 820 for effecting a game by operating it. The board rendering device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 830 from the state shown in FIG.

On the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, the general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 820 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 95 described later. are placed. The game balls that have won these general winning openings 35 are
It is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, below the center case 820 in the game area 32, a starting winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like.
In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 ( A second starting prize opening, a starting prize winning area) are provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b at a position serving as an inflow portion. The movable member 37b is slid forward and backward by means of a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 29) to prevent game balls from flowing into the inflow portion, and retreats backward to prevent game balls from flowing into the inflow portion. can be changed to an allowable state that allows The movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the state is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the starting port 2 switch 37a (
29). In addition, it is possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 37
corresponds to ordinary electric accessories (Puden).

Also, on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is a special figure variation display game (
A special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 is provided that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the results of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. . The special variable winning device 38 has an opening and closing member (movable piece) 38c, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 38c closes the large winning opening (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variable winning device 38 has a large winning opening (large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening/closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device,
During the jackpot game state (special game state) as a result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the jackpot game state (special game state) due to winning a specific area 96 described later
In the middle, the closed state of the large winning opening is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, thereby providing a predetermined game value (prizing balls) to the player. ing. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. .

In addition, on the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) A special variable prize winning device (large prize winning port 2) 95 that can be converted to and is provided. The special variable winning device 95 has an opening and closing member (opening and closing door) 95c, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 95c closes the large winning opening (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 95c retracts from the closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variable winning device 95 includes a large winning opening (large winning opening 2) opened and closed by an opening and closing member 95c driven by a large winning opening 2 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device, and a special figure 1 variation During the small winning game state according to the results of the display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the large winning hole is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the big winning hole and play the game. A predetermined game value (a prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. .

Also, the special variable winning device 95 has a V flow path that guides a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening to a specific area 96 . The special variable winning device 95 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 29) for detecting game balls that have flowed into the specific area 96. FIG. Note that the specific area switch 38e
The detection of the game ball (winning to the specific area 96) is performed by the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 3
It is one of the conditions for generating a jackpot game state (special game state) in which the closed state of the 8 is changed to the opened state.

Also, the center case 820 does not have a warp flow path, but may have a warp flow path. For example, a warp port (warp inlet) is provided on the left side of the center case 820, and the game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port rolls on the stage in the center case 820, and part of it is used as the warp outlet. You may make it guide. In that case, the warp exit may be positioned directly above the start winning opening 36 so that the game ball guided to the warp exit can easily enter the starting winning opening 36.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the left area of the center case 820 in the game area 32 where the game balls flow down is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 820 is the right game area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hitting), aiming to win a prize in the starting prize opening 36 or the general prize winning opening 35 (located in the left game area). , and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, 95
, a general winning slot 35 (located in the right game area) and the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 800), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A general display device 5 that displays a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information
0 is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55, a normal map reservation display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a right-handed guidance display device 91c on the right side near the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38. FIG. The right-handed guide display device 91c lights up when guiding the player to hit right, and goes off in other states. The right-handed guide display device 91 c is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The gaming machine 10 is provided with a win opportunity guide display device 92 near and above a special variable prize winning device (big prize winning port 2) 95 . The winning chance guidance display device 92 guides the winning chance to the player in a lighting mode. For example, the winning chance guidance display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "Two more chances" when there are two winning chances, and turns off the rest. In addition, the winning chance guide display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "one more chance" when there is one winning chance, and turns off the rest. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "Blooming" during the next and subsequent winnings with the winning chance, and turns off the rest. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The gaming machine 10 has a special figure game variation display state display device 98 at the lower right of the center case 820 in the gaming area 32 . The special figure game variation display state display device 98 is a so-called fourth symbol display device and is composed of two LEDs. Special game variation display state display device 98
, displays the variable display state of the special figure 1 variable display game with the left LED, and displays the variable display state of the special figure 2 variable display game with the right LED. For example, the special figure game variation display state display device 98 notifies the symbol stop state of the special figure variation display game by lighting, and notifies the symbol variation state of the special figure variation display game by blinking. In addition, the special game variation display state display device 98
is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The game machine 10 includes a normal pattern fluctuation display device 93 and a normal pattern reservation display device 94 on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32 . The general pattern variation display device 93 is composed of two LEDs, and notifies the variation display state of the general pattern game by alternate blinking, and notifies the variation display result of the general pattern game by a combination of lighting or extinguishing. In addition, the general map holding display device 94 has two LE
D, and informs the number of normal figure reservations from 0 to 4 according to the combination mode of lights off, lighting, and flashing. The normal pattern fluctuation display device 93 and the normal pattern reservation display device 94 are included in the board decoration device 46 .

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. In the explanation of the game machine of the first embodiment, the game machine is provided with the game control device 100, but the third embodiment is provided with a game control device 100a (see FIG. 29) different from the game control device 100. It will be explained as a gaming machine. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of a game machine control system according to the third embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100a. The game control device 100a is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. and an input unit 120 having an input port
, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130, and the like.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, starting port 2 switch 37a in normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in normal starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, special variable winning device 38, 95 big winning port switch 38a, special variable winning device 95 specific area switch 38e, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V (an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and is connected to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning port 1). Large prize winning port 2 solenoid 9 for opening and closing the opening/closing member 95c of the winning port 2)
A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data of 5b, opening/closing data of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening/closing the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135. FIG.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100a will be explained using FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment. In the timer interrupt processing of the third embodiment, step S830 is performed between steps S83 and S84.
is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

The control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) that performs processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 game processing that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variation display game (step S
83), the second type game processing (step S830) for performing the processing regarding the so-called two types game is executed, and then the normal pattern game processing (step S84) for processing regarding the normal pattern variation display game is executed.

Next, the game performance of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be explained using FIG. Figure 3
1 is a diagram showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has so-called 1 type + 2 type game properties. The game property called type 1 enables the derivation of a big hit as a result of a random number lottery in a special game (variation display game), and the result of the random number lottery is produced by the variable display of symbols. The two types of game features make it possible to derive a big win by detecting winning in a specific area 96 at a predetermined timing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can execute a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game as special figure games. The special figure 1 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the start winning port 36, and can store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. special figure 1
The game has a jackpot probability of 1/199, a small win probability of 0/199, and a remainder of 198
/199 is a miss. In the special figure 1 game, 1/3 of the big hits are with general electric support, and 2/3 of the big hits are without general electric support.

The special figure 2 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the normal variable winning device 37, and can store up to one variable display execution right (maximum number of reservations). . In the special figure 2 game, the big hit probability is 1/199, the small hit probability is 198/199, and the loss is 0/199. Special figure 2 game is 1/3 of the big hits (probability with support at the time of big hits)
are assumed to have general electric support, and 2/3 of the big hits (probability of no support at the time of big hit) are assumed to have no general electric support. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 assumes that the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game have the same jackpot probability, they may be different.

Due to the nature of the game, the type 2 game does not set the maximum number of reservations, the probability of a big win, or the probability of a small win.
In the two-type game, 1/3 of the jackpots are supported by general electricity, and 2/3 of the jackpots are not supported by general electricity. In the gaming machine 10, the probability with support at the time of a big hit and the probability without support at the time of a big hit are the same for the special figure 1 game, the special figure 2 game, and the type 2 game, but they may be different for all games. and may be different in some games.

Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 having such game performance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a support state with general electric support and a support non-support state without general electric support. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled by fixing the lottery probability of the special figure game to a low probability. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a "no support / low probability" state in which there is no general electric support and the lottery probability of the special game is low, and there is general electric support and the lottery probability of the special game is low. It can be controlled by switching between a certain "with support/low probability" state.

The "no support/low probability" state includes "normal mode" and "chance mode". "Normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game is executed. "
The "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 game is executed. The "with support/low probability" state includes "normal mode". The "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game is executed.

In the gaming machine 10, the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is the initial state when the player starts the game. The gaming machine 10 transitions from the “normal mode” in the “no support/low probability” state to the “support/low probability” state when the transition condition “state transition A” is satisfied. The transition condition “state transition A” is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 1 game. The gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition B" is established from the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. Transition condition "state transition B
” is the end of the no-support jackpot derived in the special figure 1 game.

The gaming machine 10 remains in the “support/low probability” state when the transition condition “state transition C” is satisfied from the “normal mode” in the “support/low probability” state. Transition condition "state transition C"
is the end of the big hit with support derived in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state to the "without support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition D" is satisfied. The transition condition “state transition D” is the end of the general electricity support.

General electricity support is the end condition (condition 1) when one execution of the variable display in the special figure 2 game is completed
and Also, in addition to condition 1, the general electric support is a variable display N times in the special figure 1 game (
For example, the end condition (condition 2) is the end of execution (4 times greater than the end condition in the special figure 2 game). Furthermore, in addition to the conditions 1 and 2, the general electric support sets the termination condition (condition 3) that a small hit occurs once.
It should be noted that, when the no-support jackpot is derived in the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the end of the no-support jackpot is the transition condition "state transition D
” is established.

The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state to the "support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition E" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition E" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The game machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition F" is established from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. However, the "chance mode" becomes the "normal mode" when the transition condition "state transition F" is met. The transition condition “state transition F” is the end of the no-support jackpot derived in the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).

A game progress in such a gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 33 shows
FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; game machine 1
0 can expect winning to the starting winning port 36 in the "no support / low probability" state, and can not expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37, so guides the game progress by the left-handed game instead of the right-handed game. do. Therefore, the game machine 10 can expect the occurrence of special figure 1 suspension in the "no support / low probability" state, but cannot expect the occurrence of special figure 2 suspension. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
It is normal to be a "normal mode" that executes the variable display of the special figure 1 game in the "no support / low probability" state.

Sequence 1 indicates that the game state is "jackpot (with general electric support)" derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game. Game state "big hit (with normal electric support)"
is in the process of hitting the jackpot, with general electric support “none”, probability fluctuation “low probability”, special figure 1 pending number “
4”, the number of special figures 2 reserved is “0”. The game state "jackpot (with general electric support)" changes to "with general electric support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game, since the special variable winning device (big winning port 1) 38 can be expected to win a prize during the big win. In addition, the game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game, since winning to the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected in the "with support/low probability" state after the end of the big win.

Sequence 2 shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. The gaming machine 10
The special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 reservation number is still "0", the special figure 1 reservation number "4" is set to "3" and the special figure 1 game is executed. Run.

Sequence 3 indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 reserved number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1 game. It should be noted that the game machine 10, even if two or more winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs, the special figure 2
According to the maximum number of reservations, the upper limit is the number of special figures 2 reservations "1".

Sequence 4 indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol stop (loss)". Sequence 5 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the game machine 10 is a special figure 2 reservation number "1",
The special figure 2 reserved number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 6 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 reserved number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 2 game.

Sequence 7 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". gaming machine 10
, when the big hit is derived as a result of the variation display in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to the big hit operation (type 1 game big hit operation) as it is, and when the small hit is derived as a result of the variation display in the special figure 2 game, special The variable prize winning device (big prize winning port 2) 95 is opened, and a big winning operation (second type game big winning operation) is performed under the condition of winning a prize in the specific area 96 (second type game).

Sequence 8 indicates that the gaming state is "jackpot (no general electric support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). . The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" is during the jackpot operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reservation number "3", special figure 2 reservation number "1" is. The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" continues to become "no general electric support" after the end of the big win. The gaming machine 10 cannot expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low probability" state, but there is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (the number of special figure 2 reservations "1"), and the special figure 2 Since the occurrence of a big hit can be expected as a result of the game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 9 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 has a special figure 2 reservation number "
1", the special figure 2 pending number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 is prioritized over the special figure 1 game
run the game.

Sequence 10 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". game machine 1
0, when a big hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to a big win operation (type 1 game big win operation) as it is, and when a small hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game. The special variable prize winning device (big prize winning port 2) 95 is opened, and a transition to a jackpot action (second game jackpot action) is made under the condition of winning a prize in a specific area 96 (second game).

Sequence 11 indicates that the gaming state is "jackpot (no general electricity support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). . The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" is a jackpot operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reservation number "3", special figure 2 reservation number "0" is. The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" continues to become "no general electric support" after the end of the big win. The gaming machine 10 cannot expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low probability" state, there is no opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (the number of special figure 2 reservations "0"), and the special figure 2 Since the occurrence of a big hit cannot be expected as a result of the game (including the second type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the progress of the left-handed game is guided.

Sequence 12 shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. The gaming machine 10 executes the special figure 2 game with priority over the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 reservation number is "0", the special figure 1 reservation number "3" is set to "2". Figure 1 Run the game. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 performs the game progress by executing the special figure 1 game unless a big hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 1 game.

That is, the gaming machine 10 has a game characteristic of obtaining a second chance to generate a big hit when a big win (with general electric support) is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game. In addition, if the game machine 10 derives a further big win (with general electric support) among the next two opportunities to generate a big win, then the game machine 10 obtains two more opportunities to generate a big win after the big win.

Here, in the case of deriving a further big win (with normal electric support) in the next two opportunities for generating a big win, the game progresses assuming that the big win without normal electric support was with normal electric support in sequence 11. will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The sequence 11a is the gaming state "minor win/big win (with normal electric support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
indicates that The game state "small hit / big hit (with general electric support)" is in the big hit operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reserved number "3", special figure 2 reserved number is "0". The game state "jackpot (with general electric support)" changes to "with general electric support" after the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a special variable winning device (big winning port 1
) 38 can be expected, the game progress by the right-handed game is guided. In addition, the game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game, since winning to the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected in the "with support/low probability" state after the end of the big win.

The sequence 12a shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. gaming machine 10
will execute the special figure 2 game with priority over the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 reservation number is still "0", the special figure 1 reservation number "3" is set to "2" and the special figure 1 run the game.

The sequence 13a indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1 game.
”.

The sequence 14a indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol stop (loss)". sequence 15
a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the gaming machine 10 is the special figure 2 reserved number "1", the special figure 2 reserved number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

The sequence 16a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 2 game.
”.

The sequence 17a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to a big win operation (1st kind game big win operation) as it is, and when a small win is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game. , the special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and the specific area 96
Winning a prize in (2nd game) is a condition (2nd game), and the process shifts to a big win operation (2nd game big win operation).

The sequence 18a is the gaming state "minor win/big win (no electric power support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second type of game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
indicates that The game state "small hit / big hit (no general electric support)" is in the big hit operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reserved number "2", special figure 2 reserved number is "1". The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" continues to become "no general electric support" after the end of the big win. The gaming machine 10 cannot expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low probability" state, but there is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (the number of special figure 2 reservations "1
”), and as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second kind of game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the occurrence of a big hit can be expected, so the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

The sequence 19a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the gaming machine 10 is the special figure 2 reserved number "1", the special figure 2 reserved number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

The sequence 20a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to a big win operation (1st kind game big win operation) as it is, and when a small win is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game. , the special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and the specific area 96
Winning a prize in (2nd game) is a condition (2nd game), and the process shifts to a big win operation (2nd game big win operation).

The sequence 21a is the gaming state "minor win/big win (with normal electric support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
indicates that The game state "small hit / big hit (with general electric support)" is in the big hit operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reserved number "2", special figure 2 reserved number is "0". The game state "jackpot (with general electric support)" changes to "with general electric support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game because the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected in the "with support/low probability" state.

The sequence 22a shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. gaming machine 10
, Runs the special 2 game with priority over the special 1 game, but since the number of special figures 2 reserved is "0", the number of special figures 1 reserved "2" is set to "1" and the special figure 1 game to run. After that, the gaming machine 10
Unless a big hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game, the game progresses by executing the special figure 1 game.

The sequence 23a indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1 game.
”.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a game property capable of obtaining a large number of chances to generate a big win by repeatedly obtaining two chances to generate a big win. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number can be gradually reduced by repeatedly obtaining a big hit occurrence opportunity. However, the number of special figures 1 pending is the starting winning mouth 3
If there is a winning to 6, it can be increased, but since the game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game while the chance of generating a big win can be repeated, a winning opportunity to the start winning opening 36 is obtained like left-handed. can't wait.

As a result, the gaming machine 10, which has obtained a large number of chances to generate a big hit, as shown in sequence m,
It can converge to special figure 1 reservation number "0". Even in such a case, as shown in the sequence m+1, it is possible to continue to generate a large number of big hits while obtaining the opportunity to generate the special figure 2 pending number.

In addition, after the special figure 1 reserved number "0", as shown in the sequence n to n + 1, a large number of hits continue to occur while obtaining the opportunity to generate the special figure 2 reserved number without changing the special figure 1 pattern. can do.

Of the sequences shown in FIG. 33, sequence 12 corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in FIG. It corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "with/low probability" state, and sequences 9 and 10 correspond to the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in FIG.

Also, among the sequences shown in FIG. 34, sequences 12a to 17a, 22a, and 23
a, m, m+1, n to n+3 correspond to the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state shown in FIG. ”
It corresponds to "chance mode" in the state.

Next, the variation display pattern selection of the special figure 2 game will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 35
Is a diagram showing an example of the variation display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of the third embodiment.

The special figure 2 game prepares a variation display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10000 ms (variation time), a variation display pattern pt2 with a time value of 20000 ms, a variation display pattern pt3 with a time value of 30000 ms, and a variation display pattern pt4 with a time value of 50000 ms. i.e.
The fluctuation time increases in the order of the fluctuation display patterns pt1, pt2, pt3, and pt4.

The gaming machine 10 refers to the total value of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number in the selection of the variation display pattern of the special figure 2 game. If the total value of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is 2 or less,
The variable display pattern pt1 is selected with probability pr1, and the variable display pattern pt2 is selected with probability pr1.
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr3 smaller than the probability pr2, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr4 smaller than the probability pr3. Also, when the total value of the number of special figures 1 reserved and the number of special figures 2 reserved is 3 or more, the variation display pattern pt1 is selected with a probability pr5, and the variation display pattern pt2 has a probability p greater than the probability pr5
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr7 greater than the probability pr6, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr8 greater than the probability pr7.

In the gaming machine 10, as described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the number of reserved special figures 2 can only take a value of "0" or "1", and the number of reserved special figures 1 is a large number of jackpot occurrence opportunities. is obtained and gradually decreases and converges to "0". That is, the total value of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number has a high probability that the number of occurrences of the big hit is small as the value is large, and a probability that the number of occurrences of the big hit is large as the value is small.

Therefore, the game machine 10 makes it easy for the player to select a variable display pattern with a longer variable time in the period when the player does not cool down after the first time, and secures the time for executing the highly interesting performance. sex. On the other hand, the game machine 10 ensures rapid game progress by making it easier for the player to select a variation display pattern with a smaller variation time in the period when the player has repeatedly won the jackpot many times from the first win. and

In this way, the game machine 10 can appropriately distribute between the execution of highly interesting effects and the rapid progress of the game according to the timing. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can both suppress a decrease in the willingness to play when a large number of chances of generating a big win are obtained, and improve the interest by various presentations.

In addition, the game machine 10 has a different probability of selecting a variation display pattern depending on whether the total value of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is 2 or less and 3 or more, but the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number The larger the total value of the special figure 2 pending number, the larger the fluctuation time is likely to be selected, and the smaller the total value of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, the smaller the variable display pattern. It is not limited to this as long as it is easily selected.

The ease of selection of a variable display pattern with a short variable time or the ease of selection of a variable display pattern with a long variable time can be defined by comparing the expected value of the variable time.

In addition, the game machine 10 refers only to the special figure 1 reserved number in the selection of the variation display pattern of the special figure 1 game, and the larger the special figure 1 reserved number, the easier it is to select a variation display pattern with a smaller variation time. .

Note that the game machine 10 performs four temporary stop displays and one final stop display due to four pseudo fluctuations in the fluctuation display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10000 ms.
In the fluctuation display pattern pt2 of s, 14 temporary stop displays and one real stop display are performed by 14 pseudo fluctuations, and 2
Twenty-four temporary stop indications and one final stop indication due to four pseudo fluctuations were performed, and the time value was 50.
In the fluctuation display pattern pt4 of 000 ms, the temporary stop display is performed 34 times by the pseudo fluctuation and the main stop display is performed once. The gaming machine 10 creates a sense of anticipation in the final stop display by the number of appearances of a specific symbol (for example, symbol “3” and symbol “7”) in the temporary stop display in each variable display pattern. For example, in the temporary stop display in each variation display pattern, the gaming machine 10 increases the number of appearances of the symbols “3” and “7”, and the greater the number of times the symbols “3” and “7” appear, the greater the chance of a big hit with the combination of the symbols “3” and the combination of the symbols “7”. Produce a sense of expectation to derive a big hit. Also, the gaming machine 10
may change the expectation depending on the appearance position or display mode of a specific pattern (for example, missing display, etc., which will be described later).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 regards a big win with a combination of symbols “3” and a big win with a combination of “7” symbols as a big win (with normal/electrical support), and a big win with other combinations of symbols (with normal/electrical support). None) to create a sense of anticipation. Note that the gaming machine 10 includes a collective display device 50
As long as it is possible to distinguish between the big hit and the small hit in the special figure 2 pattern display section 54, the decorative pattern may express the big hit and the small hit with the same combination of symbols.

Next, an overview of the display device 830 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the display device according to the third embodiment. The display device 830 is mounted on the center case 820
and includes a pattern display area 700, a reserved display area 701, and decoration display areas 702 and 703.

The pattern display area 700 is located in the central portion of the display device 830 . The pattern display area 700 is
It is possible to display the design in the special figure game. The symbol display area 700 can notify the occurrence of a hit by a message, and has a message display area in addition to the symbol display area. In addition, the pattern display area 700 can display decorations such as cherry blossoms.
In addition to the side of the pattern display area, it has the side of the decoration display area. Details of the pattern display area 700 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The reserved display area 701 is adjacent to the symbol display area 700 and positioned below the symbol display area 700 . The pending display area 701 can display pending display in the special figure game. note that,
The reserved display area 701 can display a decorative display such as a cherry blossom storm, and has a side of a reserved display area as well as a decorative display area. Details of the pending display area 701 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The decorative display area 702 is adjacent to the reserved display area 701 and positioned below the reserved display area 701 . The decorative display area 702 can display a decorative display such as falling cherry blossoms. Decoration display area 703
is located above the symbol display area 700 adjacent to the symbol display area 700 . The decorative display area 703 can display a decorative display such as falling cherry blossoms. The decoration display areas 702 and 703 can perform decoration display in cooperation with the pattern display area 700 and the reserved display area 701 .

Next, an overview of the pattern display area 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the pattern display area according to the third embodiment. In the symbol display area 700, a left symbol display area 704, a middle symbol display area 705 and a right symbol display area 706 are arranged horizontally. The symbol display area 700 displays a symbol "7" in the left symbol display area 704 and a symbol "7" in the middle symbol display area 705.
7” is displayed, and the symbol “7” is displayed in the right symbol display area 706 .

In the left pattern display area 704, the middle pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706, segment display portions 707 and 708 each capable of independently controlling light emission are arranged in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. The segment display portions 707 and 708 are shaped like cherry blossom petals, and can be illuminated in cherry blossom color by light emission control of LEDs. The segment display portion 707 has a petal shape with its end directed to the lower left, and the segment display portion 708 has a petal shape with its end directed to the upper right. The left design area 704, the middle design display area 705, and the right design display area 706 are respectively
Segment display portions 707 and segment display portions 708 are alternately arranged in the row direction and the column direction.

Next, the special symbol game symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700 by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of symbols displayed in the symbol display area in the special symbol game of the third embodiment.

A symbol 711 indicates a special symbol game symbol “1” displayed in the symbol display area 700 .
A symbol 712 indicates a special symbol game symbol “2” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 713 indicates a special symbol game symbol “3” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 714 indicates a special symbol game symbol “4” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . Design 7
15 indicates the symbol “5” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . Design 71
6 indicates the symbol “6” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . Design 717
indicates the symbol “7” of the special figure game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 718 indicates a special symbol game symbol “8” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . The pattern 719 is
The symbol "9" of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 is shown. A symbol 720 indicates a special symbol game symbol “0” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 721 indicates a special symbol game symbol “cherry blossom” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 722 indicates a symbol “flower” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 723 indicates a special symbol game symbol “treasure” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 724 indicates the symbol “moon” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 725 indicates the symbol “light” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display 15 kinds of symbols of the special figure game in the symbol display area 700 . These 15 types of patterns are different in display mode so as to be distinguishable from other patterns even if the lighting mode of any one of the segment display portions 707 and 708 is different.

For example, when a pattern is displayed on a 7-segment display section having 7 segments from a segment to g segment, the pattern "8" is displayed by lighting all segments from a segment to g segment.
” can be represented, and the symbol “0” can be represented by lighting from the a segment to the f segment excluding the g segment (central horizontal), and from the a segment to the d segment, f segment excluding the e segment (lower left vertical) , g segment lighting can represent the symbol "9". On the other hand, if the e-segment is also used for decoration and is lit up or extinguished differently, the design will lose its identifiability. However, the 15 displayed in the symbol display area 700
The seed pattern has a configuration in which one of the segment display portions 707 and 708 serves also as a decoration and has a different lighting mode so as not to lose its distinguishability. The most similar patterns among the 15 types of patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700 are the pattern "8" and the pattern "0". ” and the pattern “
0” difference. Therefore, the 15 kinds of patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700 are configured such that the recognizability as a pattern is not easily lost just by changing the lighting mode of some of the segment display portions like the 7-segment display portion. there is

Of the fifteen patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700, the pattern "3" and the pattern "
7" is a specific pattern that is a big hit (with general/electrical support) in a combination of the same type of patterns. In addition, among the 15 kinds of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbols other than the symbol "3" and the symbol "7" are non-specific symbols that will result in a big hit (no normal/electrical support) in combination of the same kind of symbols. .

Next, an overview of the pending display area 701 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a reserved display area according to the third embodiment; The pending display area 701 includes a first pending display portion 731 capable of displaying the first pending display, a second pending display portion 732 capable of displaying the second pending display, and a third pending display portion 732 capable of displaying the third pending display. It includes a No. 4 reserved display portion 733, a No. 4 reserved display portion 734 capable of displaying the 4th reserved display, and decoration display portions 735, 736, and 737. FIG.

No. 1 reservation display portion 731, No. 2 reservation display portion 732, No. 3 reservation display portion 733, and No. 4 reservation display portion 734 respectively have one flower core-shaped segment display portion 731a and a segment display portion 731a. and five arranged petal-shaped segment display portions 731b. The segment display portion 731a and the segment display portion 731b can be illuminated in cherry blossom color by light emission control of the LED, and light emission control can be performed independently.

The pending display area 701 can perform the pending display of the special figure 1 game or the pending display of the special figure 2 game according to the gaming state. In addition, since the maximum number of reservations of the special figure 1 game is "4", the reservation display area 701 is the first reservation display unit 731, the second reservation display unit 732, and the third reservation display when performing the reservation display of the special figure 1 game. The holding display is performed using the part 733 and the No. 4 holding display part 734, but since the maximum holding number of the special figure 2 game is "1", when holding the special figure 2 game, only the No. 1 holding display part 731 is used to perform hold display.

The decorative display portions 735, 736, and 737 are shaped like cherry blossom petals, and are LEDs.
can be illuminated in cherry blossom color by light emission control. The decorative display portions 735, 736, and 737 each have a petal shape with the ends facing in random directions, and are responsible for the decorative display of the reserved display region 701, and cooperate with the pattern display region 700 and the decorative display regions 702 and 703. Decorative display can be performed.

Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 40, of the animation of the pending display that is performed when the pending memory is generated. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of an animation of occurrence of a hold display according to the third embodiment.

The No. 1 pending display portion 731, No. 2 pending display portion 732, No. 3 pending display portion 733, and No. 4 pending display portion 734 sequentially switch the display state of the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory using a predetermined time. Animate the pending display with .

The pending display unit corresponding to the occurrence of pending storage changes the display state 738 to the initial state and the display state 739 to the initial state.
is an intermediate state following the display state 738, and a display state 790 is a final state following the display state 739, and the display states are sequentially switched.

A display state 738 is a display state (initial display state) in which the segment display portions 731a and 731b are turned off. A display state 739 is a display state (intermediate display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned on and the segment display portion 731b is turned off. A display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portions 731a and 731b are lit.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the production of the pending display when the pending memory occurs. As a result, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the generation of the reserved memory to the player and enhances interest in the generation of the reserved memory.

Next, as one of the display effects using the symbols of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700, the missing symbol effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment. Figure 42
[FIG. 2] is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment.

The symbol missing effect is a display effect in which part of the symbol of the special game is displayed missing. As described above, the 15 kinds of symbols of the special game have different display modes so as to be distinguishable from the other symbols even if one of the segment display portions 707 and 708 has a different lighting mode. It should be noted that the 15 types of symbols of the special game can be distinguished from other symbols even if any two of the segment display portions 707 and 708 have different lighting modes. Even if different, it can be easily distinguished from other patterns.

The symbol missing effect can give the player a sense of surprise and can arouse attention to the symbols. In addition, compared with the case of separately displaying a decorative element such as a character, the display data to be prepared does not become excessive, and the burden of display control is light.

A symbol 713 shown in FIG. 41(1) is a display state in which part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is not missing. The symbol 713 is suitable as the symbol "3" by turning on all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be lit and turning off all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be turned off. have discernment.

A symbol 713a shown in FIG. 41(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. The pattern 713a is the segment display portion 707 at the position to be lit.
, 708 are turned on except for the segment display portion 741, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at the position to be turned off are turned off. The segment display unit 741 displays the symbol "
By extinguishing the part that should be lit as the symbol "3", the partly missing display as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713a is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3".

A symbol 713b shown in FIG. 41(3) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. The pattern 713b is the segment display portion 707 at the position where it should be lit.
, 708 are turned on except for the segment display portion 743, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at the position to be turned off are turned off. The segment display unit 743 displays the symbol "
By extinguishing the part that should be lit as the symbol "3", the partly missing display as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713b is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3".

As shown in the pattern 713a and the pattern 713b, the gaming machine 10 can produce a partial loss display with different partial loss positions. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game depending on which position the partially missing part is. For example, the game machine 10 is 1
In the matrix arrangement of 0 rows and 7 columns, the higher the missing position located in the upper left, the higher the expectation may be produced, and the lower the lower right, the lower the expectation may be produced. The anticipation of the game can produce a variety of anticipations regarding the game, for example, the anticipation of winning, the anticipation of the presence or absence of the general electric support, the anticipation of the reach production, and the like.

A symbol 713c shown in FIG. 41(4) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of the symbols "3" of the special symbol game are partially lost. In the pattern 713c, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be lit are lit except for the segment display portions 744 and 745, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be extinguished are extinguished. The segment display portions 744 and 745 produce a partially missing display as the symbol "3" by extinguishing the part that should be lit as the symbol "3". Although the pattern 713c is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3".

As shown in the symbol 713c, the gaming machine 10 can produce partial loss display with different numbers of partial losses. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game depending on the number of partial losses. For example, the gaming machine 10 may produce a higher sense of anticipation as the number of losses increases, and a lower expectation as the number of losses decreases, in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by combining not only the number of partial losses but also the position of the partial losses. For example, the gaming machine 10 is arranged in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns to produce a high expectation as the deficit is concentrated in a specific position, and to produce a low expectation as the deficit is distributed over the whole. can be

A pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is a display mode that is a modification of the third embodiment.
It is displayed when the segment display portions 744 and 745 are in one of the two states of the transparent state and the non-transparent state (cherry blossom color). The pattern 713d is a display mode that can be realized by using a transflective LCD display device or an LCD display device instead of the display device 830. FIG. The pattern 713d is arranged in front of the background display 746 so that the background display 746 can be visually recognized from those of the segment display portions 744 and 745 that are in a transparent state.

The symbol 713d is a display state in which part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is not missing. The pattern 713d is displayed on the segment display portions 707 and 70 located at the position to be in the opaque state (cherry blossom color).
8 become opaque (cherry color), and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 located at positions where they should be transparent become transparent. It has good discriminative power.

A symbol 713e shown in FIG. 41(6) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" (symbol 713d) of the special symbol game is missing. In the pattern 713e, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) except for the segment display portion 747 are in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), and the segment display at a position which should be in a transparent state. Part 707
, 708 become transparent. The segment display section 747 produces a partially deficient display as the pattern "3" by changing the part that should be in the non-transparent state (cherry color) as the pattern "3" into the transparent state. The pattern 713e is a pattern "3" although it is partially missing as a pattern "3".
have sufficient discriminating power as Also, the pattern 713e expands the visible range of the background display 746 through the partial loss of the pattern "3". The pattern 713e may also have different positions and numbers of partial defects to produce a sense of anticipation for the game. Also, the pattern 713e may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by the display mode of the background display 746 viewed from the partially missing position. In such a case, the background display 746 may have a fixed display mode, or may change.

The pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is displayed when the segment display portions 744 and 745 are in one of the three states of transparent state, non-transparent state (white), and non-transparent state (cherry blossom). may be A symbol 713f shown in FIG. 41(7) is a special symbol game symbol "3
' (symbol 713d) is a display state in which one part is missing. In the pattern 713f, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) except for the segment display portion 748 are in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), and the segment display at a position which should be in a transparent state. All of the portions 707 and 708 are in a transparent state. Segment display section 748
, where the pattern "3" should be in the opaque state (cherry color) becomes the opaque state (white), thereby producing a partially deficient display as the pattern "3". Although the pattern 713f is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". Also, design 713f
makes it easy to distinguish between the partially missing symbol “3” and the background display 746 . In addition, the design 713f
Also, the position and number of partial defects may be changed to produce a sense of anticipation for the game. again,
If there are two or more defects, the pattern 713f may be a combination of defects in the opaque state (white) and defects in the transparent state. In such a case, the pattern 713f may be arranged to produce a sense of anticipation for the game by differentiating a mixed state of missing in the opaque state (white) and missing in the transparent state.

A symbol 713g shown in FIG. 41(8) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. In the pattern 713g, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be lit in cherry blossom color except for the segment display portion 749 are lit in cherry blossom color, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be lit in cherry blossom color are turned off. . Segment display section 74
9 produces a partly missing display as the pattern "3" by flickering in the cherry color where the pattern "3" should be illuminated in cherry color. Although the pattern 713g is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". In addition, the segment display unit 749 displays the symbol "
Although it is assumed that the part that should be illuminated in cherry blossom color is flashed in cherry blossom color as the pattern "3", it may be possible to produce a partial loss as the pattern "3" by blinking or lighting in a color different from the cherry blossom color. In such a case, the pattern 713g may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by a blinking mode (blinking pattern, cycle, etc.) or lighting color. Also, the pattern 713g may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by a combination of the missing position and the number of missing pieces in addition to the flashing mode and lighting color.

A symbol 713h shown in FIG. 42(1) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. The pattern 713h is the segment display portion 707 at the position where it should be lit.
, 708 are turned on, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 located at positions to be turned off, except for the segment display portion 750, are turned off. The segment display unit 750 displays the symbol "
By lighting the part that should be turned off as "3", a partially missing display (blank missing display, base missing display) as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713h is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". From another point of view, the symbol 713h has sufficient recognizability as the symbol "3" although it is partially redundantly displayed as the symbol "3".

A symbol 713i shown in FIG. 42(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. In the pattern 713i, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 that should be lit in cherry blossom color are lit, and the segment display portion 707 that is to be turned off is lit in cherry blossom color.
, 708 except the segment display portion 751 are extinguished. Segment display section 75
1 produces a partially missing display (margin missing display, base missing display) as the pattern "3" by blinking in cherry blossom color where it should be turned off as the pattern "3". The symbol 713i is a symbol "3
, but it has sufficient recognizability as a pattern "3". From another point of view, the pattern 713i has sufficient recognizability as the pattern "3" although it is partially redundantly displayed as the pattern "3". The segment display unit 749 blinks in cherry blossom when the symbol "3" should be illuminated in cherry blossom.
” may be used to produce a partial loss.

A symbol 713j shown in FIG. 42(3) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of the symbols "3" of the special symbol game are partially deficient. In the pattern 713j, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be lit except the segment display portion 753 are lit, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be extinguished except the segment display portion 752 are lit. goes off. In the segment display portions 752 and 753, the parts that should be turned off as the symbol "3" are lit up, and the parts that should be lit up are turned off, so that the partly missing display as the symbol "3" (
lighting part missing display, extinguished part missing display). Although the pattern 713j is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". According to another point of view, the pattern 71
3j is a symbol "3", which is a mixture of the lit part missing display and the unlit part missing display as the pattern "3".
have sufficient discriminating power as

A symbol 713k shown in FIG. 42(4) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of the symbols "3" of the special symbol game are partially missing. In the pattern 713k, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 that should be lit in cherry blossom color except the segment display portion 755 are lit in cherry blossom color, and the segment display portions of the segment display portions 707 and 708 that are in the position to be turned off are lit in cherry blossom color. All except 754 are extinguished. The segment display portions 754 and 755 blink where they should be turned off as the pattern "3", and blink where they should be turned on, thereby partially missing display as the pattern "3" (lighted part missing display, lighted part missing display). directing. The symbol 713k is the symbol "3
, but it has sufficient recognizability as a pattern "3". From another point of view, the pattern 713k has a sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3", although the illuminated part missing display and the extinguished part missing display of the pattern "3" are mixed. Although the segment display portions 754 and 755 blink in cherry blossom color, they may be partially lost as the pattern "3" by blinking or lighting in a color different from the cherry blossom color.

A design 713m shown in FIG. 42(5) is a modification of the design 713j shown in FIG. 42(3). The pattern 713m can change the position of the segment display portion to be turned on at the position where it should be turned off. In the pattern 713m, the segment display portion 752 is the initial position of the segment display portion to be turned on at the position to be turned off.
708. As a result, the pattern 713m is produced such that the segment display portion that is lit at the position where it should be turned off is moved and displayed along the path 756. FIG. In the pattern 713m, by moving the segment display portion that lights up at the position that should be turned off to the segment display portion 753, the partial loss that lights up at the position that should be turned off and the partial loss that lights up at the position that should be turned off are offset. and design 713
(See FIG. 23 (1)). In this manner, the symbol 713m moves and displays the position of the non-lighting part display that is lit at the position where it should be lighted, or the position of the non-lighting part display that is lighted at the position that should be lighted. In such a case, the pattern 713m may produce a feeling of anticipation for the game by a movement path of the lighted part missing display or a movement path of the lighted part missing display.

A design 713n shown in FIG. 42(6) is a modification of the design 713m shown in FIG. 42(5). The symbol 713n is moved beyond the symbol display area to display the position of the non-lighting part display that is lit at the position where it should be lighted, or the position of the non-lighting part display that is lighted at the position that should be lighted. Design 7
13n moves and displays the segment display portion 752 that is to be turned off at the position to be turned off by a path 757 so as to move it out of the pattern display area, thereby correcting the lighting mode of the segment display portion 752 to turn off. Also, the pattern 713n is displayed by moving a segment display portion 753 which is turned off at a position to be lit and a segment display portion 758 which is turned on outside the pattern display area by a path 759 so as to move into the pattern display area. , the lighting state of the segment display portion 753 is corrected to lighting. In this manner, the symbol 713n moves and displays the position of the non-lighting part display that is lit at the position where it should be lighted, or the position of the non-lighting part display that is lighted at the position that should be lighted, moving beyond the pattern display area. In such a case, the pattern 713n may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by the moving route of the lighted portion missing display or the moving route of the lighted portion missing display.

The pattern 713p shown in FIG. 42(7) and the pattern 713q shown in FIG.
This is the temporary stop display mode shown in FIG. 23 (1). A pattern 713p shows a state in which the pattern 713 moves upward by one line within a pattern display area of a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns, and a pattern 713q
It shows how the pattern 713 moves downward by one row in the pattern display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. The gaming machine 10 switches and displays the symbols 713p, 713, 713q, 713, .

At this time, the segment display portion 762 in the uppermost row 760 of the pattern 713p is partially missing. In addition, the segment display portion 763 in the bottom row 761 of the pattern 713q is partially missing. That is, the game machine 10 switches between the symbol 713 without partial defects and the symbols 713p and 713q with partial defects in the temporary stop operation of symbol "3".
The design 713 secures the distinguishing power as the design "3". As a result, the gaming machine 10
Even if the symbols 713p and 713q are partially lost until the symbols 713p and 713q lose their discriminating power to some extent, the temporary stop motion having the discriminating power as the symbol "3" is realized. In addition, the game machine 10 can call the player's attention to the symbols during the temporary stop by performing the partial loss effect at the partial timing of the temporary stop operation. Although the game machine 10 performs a partial loss effect at a partial timing of the temporary stop operation, the present invention is not limited to this, and may perform a partial loss effect at a partial timing for symbols that are displayed in a moving display or a deformed display. may

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705, and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(1)
shows a ready-to-win display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop displaying the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol area 704 has a segment display portion 765 partially lost, and the symbol "7" displayed in the right symbol area 706 has a segment display portion 766 partially deleted. The segment display portion 765 and the segment display portion 766 have the same positional relationship in the pattern display area in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the missing symbol effect in a plurality of symbol areas, and can make the position and the number of the partial missing display corresponding to that case the same. Such a gaming machine 10 reduces the control processing load of the symbol loss effect.

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705 and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(2)
shows a ready-to-win display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop displaying the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704 is partially missing the segment display portion 765, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol area 706 is partially missing the segment display portions 766,767. The segment display portions 765 and 766 have the same positional relationship in the pattern display area of a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. They do not have the same positional relationship in the display area. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the position and the number of the corresponding partially-defective display when the symbol-defective effect is performed in a plurality of symbol areas. In such a gaming machine 10, the symbols displayed in different symbol display areas can complement each other's distinguishability. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by combining a plurality of symbol loss modes.

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705 and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(3)
5 shows a state in which the left pattern and the middle pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "7" and the right pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "3". The symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol area 704 is displayed in the segment display portion 768 with the lit portion missing, the segment display portion 768 is moved and displayed along the path 769, and the segment display portion 770 is displayed with the unlit portion missing. The symbol "7" displayed in the middle symbol area 705 is displayed in the segment display portion 771 with the lit portion missing, the segment display portion 773 is displayed with the missing portion moved along the path 772, and the segment display portion 773 is displayed in the off portion missing.

Since the segment display portion 770 is outside the area of the left pattern area 704, it can be used as the decoration display portions 735, 736, and 737 in the reserved display area 701 and the segment display portions included in the decoration display areas 702 and 703. can.

In this manner, the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 can move and display the missing display part within each display area, and can move and display the missing display part beyond each display area.

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705, and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(4)
5 shows a state in which the left pattern and the middle pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "7" and the right pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "3". The symbol "3" displayed in the right symbol display area 706 is displayed in the segment display portion 774 with the lighting portion missing, and the missing display portion is moved to the segment display portion 771 of the middle symbol display area 705 by a path 775 and displayed. As a result, the segment display portion 771 of the middle pattern display area 705
, the lighting part missing display is restored to a normal display mode.

In addition, the symbol "7" displayed in the middle symbol display area 705 restores the segment display part 773, which was displayed as missing in the extinguished part, to the normal display mode, and moves the missing display part to the left symbol area 70 by path 778.
4 segment display portion 768 is displayed. As a result, the segment display portion 773 of the middle symbol display area 705 is restored to the normal display mode of the extinguished part missing display, and the left symbol area 704 is restored.
segment display portion 768 restores the normal display mode of the extinguished portion missing display.

In this manner, the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 can move and display the missing display portion among the respective display areas. Also, the left design area 704 and the middle design display area 7
05 and the right symbol display area 706 are the same kind of symbols (for example, the left symbol "7" and the middle symbol "7").
) to move and display the missing display part, and to display different types of symbols (for example, the right symbol "3" and the middle symbol "
7”), the missing display portion can be moved and displayed.

Next, in the missing pattern effect of the modified example of the third embodiment, the segment display of the regular shape is lost by replacing the segment display, which is a part of the pattern, with a different shape display instead of the regular shape display. The missing symbol effect of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a missing symbol effect in a modified example of the third embodiment.

The display device 830a is, for example, an LCD display device, and displays the pattern in segments on the LCD. The left design area 704a, the middle design display area 705a, and the right design display area 706a each display a design by a set of segment displays having a petal shape as a regular shape.

Such a display device 830a changes the shape of the segment display parts 780 and 781 and loses a part of the pattern. For example, the segment display portion 780 is different in size and lacks one petal-shaped segment display of the normal size. Moreover, the segment display section 781 changes the shape to a single flower shape, and eliminates one segment display of the petal shape, which is the normal shape.

The display device 830a can perform a missing rendering of a pending display in the pending display area 701a in the same way as the left symbol area 704a, the middle symbol display area 705a, and the right symbol display area 706a.

Next, description will be given of the lack effect of the pending display. Since the pending display is also displayed as a set of a plurality of segment displays in the same manner as the symbols, it is possible to perform a loss effect in which a part of the segment display is lost. First, the lack effect when the pending display occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 45 . FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a loss effect when a hold display occurs according to the third embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 40, the gaming machine 10 performs a pending display generation animation when pending storage occurs. When the loss effect is not performed, the generated animation changes the display state 738 to the initial state, the display state 739 to the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 to the display state 739 for the reserved display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the reserved memory. The display state is switched sequentially as the following final state.

On the other hand, in the case of performing a loss effect, the occurrence animation is, for the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory, the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 as the display state. As the final state following 739, the display state is switched sequentially. Alternatively, the generation animation sequentially displays the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 as the final state following the display state 739 for the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory. switch state.

A display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portions 731a and 731b are turned on, and is a display state without defects. A display state 791 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned on and the segment display portion 731b is turned off, and is a display state with a partial defect. A display state 792 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned off and the segment display portion 731b is turned on. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the loss effect when the pending display occurs. In addition, since the game machine 10 can perform a loss effect in a different manner when the suspension display occurs, the expectation of the game may be produced according to the loss mode of the suspension display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has three final states (display state 79
0, 791, 792), it may be branched to three final states (display states 790, 791, 792) with intermediate states up to the display state 790. FIG. Also, the gaming machine 10
removes the intermediate states from the display state 738 which is the initial state, resulting in three final states (display state 79
0, 791, 792).

Here, loss effects in different developed forms will be described with reference to FIG. 46 . FIG. 46 shows the third
10 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a loss effect when a pending display occurs in the embodiment of FIG.
For example, in the missing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 46(1), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 is the final state following the display state 739. FIG. Such an advanced form (defective pattern 1) does not include the display state 790 in which there is no defective display in the intermediate state, so it is possible to produce a strong sense of surprise.

46(2), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739. Let 791 be the final state following display state 790 . In such an advanced form (loss pattern 2), the display state 790, which is the intermediate state, can be held for a predetermined time, and the loss display effect can be performed with a time lag. can.

For example, in the missing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 46(3), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 is the final state following the display state 739. FIG. Such an advanced form (defective pattern 3) does not include the display state 790 in which there is no defective display in the intermediate state, so it is possible to produce a strong sense of surprise.

46(4), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739. Let 792 be the final state following display state 790 . In such an advanced form (loss pattern 4), the display state 790, which is the intermediate state, can be held for a predetermined period of time, and the loss display effect can be performed with a time lag. can.

As described above, the game machine 10 can perform the loss performance in different development modes when the suspension display occurs, so that the expectation of the game is presented by the development mode up to the loss mode when the suspension display occurs. good too.

Next, the display mode of the hold display section will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a hold display section according to the third embodiment; FIG. 47(1) shows the pending display area 70
1 shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "0" (special figure 1 pending 0) when the special figure 1 game is being displayed on hold. At this time, the pending display area 701 includes a No. 1 pending display portion 731, a No. 2 pending display portion 732, a No. 3 pending display portion 733, and a No. 4 pending display portion 733.
34 and decoration display portions 735, 736, and 737 are displayed in the off state.

FIG. 47 (2) shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "3" while the holding display of the special figure 1 game is being performed in the holding display area 701, and the third pending display is missing. It shows how it is (special figure 1 pending 3 (3rd missing)). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 and the No. 2 pending display portion 732 in the display state 790, and the No. 3 pending display portion 7
33 is displayed in the display state 791, and the No. 4 reserved display portion 734 and decoration display portions 735, 736, 7
37 are displayed in the off state.

A hold display area 701 in FIG. 47(3) shows a hold shift due to the start of fluctuation from the state in FIG. 47(2). Therefore, in FIG. 47 (3), the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "2"
, and shows how the second pending display is missing (special figure 1 pending 2 (second missing)). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the first pending display portion 731 in the display state 790,
The second reserved display portion 732 is displayed in a display state 791, and the third reserved display portion 733, the fourth reserved display portion 734, and the decorative display portions 736 and 737 are displayed in the off state. Note that the decoration display section 735
lights up in a display manner indicating that the variable display is in progress. In the pending display area 701, the decoration display portion 735 also serves as the pending digestion display instead of providing the pending digestion display indicating that the pending digestion is in progress.

A hold display area 701 in FIG. 47(4) shows a state in which a hold has occurred from the state shown in FIG. 47(3). Therefore, FIG. 47(4) shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "3", the second pending display is missing, and the third pending display is displaying the occurrence animation. (Special figure 1 pending 3 (2nd loss, 3rd occurrence animation)). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 in the display state 790, and the No. 2 pending display portion 7
32 and the No. 3 reserved display portion 733 are displayed in the display state 791, and the No. 4 reserved display portion 734 and the decorative display portion 736 are displayed in the off state. The decorative display section 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress, and the decorative display section 737 lights up in a display mode that indicates the pending occurrence. Reserved display area 7
In 01, the decorative display section 737 indicates that the pending is occurring, thereby guiding that the third pending display section 733 in which the pending is occurring is not confirmed as a missing display.

A pending display area 701 in FIG. 47(5) shows a state in which the generation animation performed in the state of FIG. 47(4) has ended. Therefore, FIG. 47 (5) shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "3", and the second pending display is missing (special figure 1 pending 3 (second missing)) . At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 and the No. 3 pending display portion 733 in the display state 790, displays the No. 2 pending display portion 732 in the display state 791,
The No. 4 reservation display portion 734 and the decorative display portions 736 and 737 are displayed in the off state. Note that the decoration display portion 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed. The suspension display area 701 guides that the number 3 suspension display portion 733, which has been suspended due to the decoration display portion 737 being turned off, is not displayed in a missing state. Note that the No. 3 reservation display unit 733 may perform the missing display at different times such as during a shift.

FIG. 47(6) shows a state in which the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "1" when the reserved display of the special figure 2 game is performed in the reserved display area 701 (special figure 2 reservation 1). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 in the display state 790, the No. 2 pending display portion 732, the No. 3 pending display portion 733, the No. 4 pending display portion 734, and the decorative display portions 735 and 73.
7 are displayed in the off state. In addition, the decoration display unit 736 lights up in a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 game is displayed on hold. In the pending display area 701, a decoration display section 73 is provided instead of exclusively providing a distinguishing display for distinguishing the pending display of the special figure 1 game and the pending display of the special figure 2 game.
6 also serves as a distinguishing display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can execute other effects (special effects) together with the loss effects when performing the loss effects of symbols and reserved displays. For example, the special effects include the movement display effect of the missing display part performed together with the missing pattern effect, and the decorative display part 735 along with the missing display effect of the pending display.
, 736, and 737, and the like. In addition, the special effects include effects related to the reserved display during the lacking effect of the symbols, effects related to the symbols during the missing effect of the suspended display, and the like. In addition, the special effects are a pattern display area 700, a reserved display area 701, and a decoration display area 702.
, 703, a petal-like segment display section, petals scattered and piled up, and other effects. In addition to other display effects performed by the display device 830 and the like, special effects include sound output effects performed by the sound output devices 19a and 19b and the like, operation effects performed using the push buttons 25 and the like, the board decoration device 46 and the like. There are a light-emitting effect performed using the frame decoration device 18 and the like, and a movable effect performed using the board effect device 44 and the like.

Next, as a modified example of the third embodiment, description will be made with reference to FIG. 48 about the loss effect for the pattern in which the outline is emphasized and ambiguous (non-emphasized) in the first embodiment. Figure 48 shows
It is a figure which shows the highlighting display of the outline of the pattern during loss|loss effect|action of the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display.

Fig. 48(1) shows the pattern widths and contour lines of decorative patterns A and B during loss production, and the thickness of the contour lines of decorative patterns A and B during loss production and the thickness of the contour line of the missing part. Fig. 48 (2) for comparison
shown in

Each of the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B can carry out a loss effect of losing a part of the pattern. For the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B, when the partial loss of the pattern results in the loss of the contour line, the contour line of the missing part is displayed corresponding to the partial loss of the pattern.

The decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a number portion width of w2 (<w1), an outline width (thickness) of the number portion of w3 (<w2), and a missing portion outline thickness of w10. and The decorative pattern B is
Let w4 be the pattern width, w5 (<w4) be the width (thickness) of the contour line of the pattern, and w11 be the thickness of the missing portion contour line.

The game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A by making the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative pattern A thicker than the width w5 of the contour line of the pattern of the decorative pattern B. The player can be made to feel that the contour display of the pattern B is ambiguous.

Further, the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part is thinner than the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A, so that the thickness of the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A is assisted. be able to. In addition, since the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part is thinner than the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B, it is possible to assist the perception of the thickness of the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B. can.

Further, since the outline thickness w10 of the missing part is thicker than the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A, it is possible to assist the feeling of the missing part of the number part of the decorative pattern A. Further, since the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part is thicker than the width w5 of the outline of the decorative design B, it is possible to assist the feeling of the defect of the design of the decorative design B. - 特許庁

In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline thickness w10 of the missing part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative symbol B to be the same, so that the width of the outline of the numerical part of the decorative symbol A is It can be used as a reference for perceiving the width w3 or the width w5 of the outline of the decorative design B.

Also, in the gaming machine 10, the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative symbol B may be different. In this case, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing outline thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A to the symbol width w1, the numeral width w2, or the numeral outline width w3.
It may be determined according to the ratio or the difference between. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a decorative pattern B
The missing portion outline thickness w11 may be determined according to the ratio or difference between the symbol width w4 or the outline width w5 of the symbol.

In addition, the game machine 10 varies the size of the missing portion outline thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A, and guides the expectation of the game according to the size of the missing portion outline thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A. can be anything. In addition, the game machine 10 varies the size of the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B, and guides the expectation of the game according to the size of the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B. can be anything.

Further, the missing portion outline thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A and the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B may be always fixed, but may be switched according to the variable display state. can be anything. For example, emphasizing the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and de-emphasizing the outline display of the design of the decorative design B may be always fixed, but can be switched according to the variable display state. In that case, emphasizing the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A,
From the viewpoint of facilitating the perception of non-emphasis of the contour display of the decorative pattern B, the thickness w10 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern B are fixed. preferably

The non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and the emphasis of the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. From the viewpoint of facilitating the perception of emphasis on the contour display of the pattern, it is desirable that the thickness w10 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern B are fixed.

Next, a more detailed modification of the display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during temporary stop display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative symbol during loss effect in a modified example of the third embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof may be omitted.

FIG. 49(1) shows the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display while performing the loss effect. The temporary stop display modes of the pattern 527 are (a), (b), (
c) and (d) are repeated periodically.

The pattern 527 during the temporary stop display has the background portion 527d fixed, and the number portion 527n having the identifiability as the pattern 527 while being partly missing swings in the horizontal direction (first temporary stop operation). While doing so, it expands and contracts in the vertical direction (second temporary stop operation).

The numerical portion 527n expands and contracts in the vertical direction while rocking in the horizontal direction while fixing the relative position, the relative size, and the (relative) thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion. The numeric part 527n includes the absolute position, the absolute size, and the (absolute) thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion.
is fixed, and it expands and contracts vertically while swinging horizontally. Here, "relatively" refers to the relationship between the number portion 527n and the missing portion, and "absolutely" refers to the relationship between the display area of the display device 830 and the display position of the missing portion.

In addition, the numeric part 527n may change at least one of the position, the size, and the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion to perform the temporary stop display (third temporary stopping operation).
In addition, instead of expanding and contracting in the vertical direction while swinging in the horizontal direction, the number portion 527n
The temporary stop operation may be performed by varying at least one of the position and size of the missing portion and the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion.

FIGS. 49(2) and (3) show the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display while performing the loss effect. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 is (a)
, (b), (c), and (d) are repeated periodically. The pattern 537 during the temporary stop display swings in the vertical direction while part of the pattern 537 is lost.

In the pattern 537, at least one of the position and size of the missing portion and the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing portion may be changed to perform temporary stop display. In addition, the pattern 537 performs a temporary stop operation by varying at least one of the position, size, and outline thickness w11 of the missing portion instead of swinging in the vertical direction. There may be.

In addition, the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display while performing the loss effect shown in FIG. 49 (2) is
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing portion is fixed (not variable) with respect to the pattern 537, and a display mode in which the absolute position is variable (not fixed) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. FIG. In such a missing display, the pattern 537 and the missing portion can be displayed integrally, and by swinging the pattern 537, the display range on the rear side facing the missing portion can be enlarged.

In addition, the decorative pattern B in which the temporary stop display is being performed while performing the loss effect shown in FIG. 49 (3),
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing part with respect to the pattern 537 is variable (not fixed), and a display mode in which the absolute position is fixed (not variable) with respect to the display area of the display device 830 . Such a missing display can be displayed without a sense of unity between the pattern 537 and the missing part, and can fix the display range on the rear side facing the missing part even if the pattern 537 swings.

Next, as a modified example of the third embodiment, application of loss effect to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment in which the thickness of the outline display can be changed for each part of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols during the missing effect in the modified example of the third embodiment.

FIG. 50(1) shows a partly missing "7" (symbol 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. A pattern 550 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated counterclockwise on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. A pattern 551 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is viewed from the front. A pattern 552 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated rightward on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. for example,
The game machine 10 can perform temporary stop display by switching from the pattern 550 to the pattern 551 to the pattern 552 and from the pattern 552 to the pattern 551 to the pattern 550 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 50(2), the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the contour display for each switching target contour display portion (left half of the pattern, right half of the pattern). .
Also, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis level) of the missing portion outline display, as shown in FIG. 50(2).

The gaming machine 10 uses the left half of the pattern 550 as the left portion 550L, and the right half of the pattern 550 as the right portion 550L.
50R, the contour display of the left part 550L that seems to move away is displayed thinly (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the contour display of the right part 550R that seems to move in the approaching direction and the missing part contour are displayed. Display the display in bold (highlighted). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 550L, which appears farther than the right portion 550R, thinner than the contour display of the right portion 550R and the outline display of the missing portion, and displays the contour display of the right portion 550R, which appears closer than the left portion 550L. The contour display and the missing portion contour display are displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 550L.

Further, when the left half of the pattern 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the pattern 551 is the right portion 551R, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left portion 551L, the outline of the right portion 551R, and the outline of the missing portion. is the standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L, the contour display of the right portion 551R, and the missing portion contour display, which appear at approximately the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the pattern 552 is the left portion 552L and the right half of the pattern 552 is the right portion 552R, the contour display of the left portion 552L that appears to move in the approaching direction is thickened (highlighted). ), and the contour display of the right portion 552R that seems to move away and the contour display of the missing portion are thinly displayed (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display). In other words, the gaming machine 10
shows the contour display of the right portion 552R, which is farther than the left portion 552L, and the contour display of the missing portion.
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which appears to be closer than the right portion 552R and the defect portion contour display, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols and the lack effect. The left part or the right part of the pattern may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis is changed according to the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so.

In addition, in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols, the gaming machine 10 may divide one defect display into two regions and control the thickness of the defect outline display in each region.
More than one defect display may be performed, and the thickness of the defect outline display may be controlled by each defect display. For example, the gaming machine 10 thins the missing part outline display (non-highlighted display, Ambiguous display) is displayed, and the outline of the defect is displayed thickly (emphasized) for the right defect (the right region when one defect is divided into two, or the right defect of two defects). In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing part contour display to the standard thickness for the left missing part and the right missing part of the pattern 551 (standard display). Also, game machine 1
At 0, the missing part outline display of the left missing part of the pattern 552 is displayed thick (highlighted), and the missing part outline of the right missing part is thinned (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display).

Further, the gaming machine 10 may display the outline of the missing portion without displaying the outline in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the outline of the missing portion with thickness in the depth direction in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. The thickness of the outline display of the missing portion may be controlled. For example, the game machine 10 displays the missing part outline display thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display) for the front side of the deep missing part of the pattern 550, and displays the thick (highlighted) missing part outline display behind the deep missing part. do. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing part contour display to the standard thickness (standard display) for the front side of the deep missing part and the back side of the deep missing part of the pattern 551 . In addition, the game machine 10 displays the missing part outline display thicker (highlighted display) in front of the deep missing part of the pattern 552, and thins the missing part outline display behind the deep missing part (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display). .

Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform a loss effect for the message effect in the variable display game described with reference to FIG. can do. At this time, game machine 1
0 can control the position, number, size, and outline thickness of missing parts for message display.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. In addition, there is a tendency for the display contents to diversify, such as by displaying characters in addition to patterns on conventional game machines. have Gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including modifications)
has the effect of countering the inflation of display effects and increasing interest in the display elements of the game.

(1) The gaming machine 10 displays display elements (for example, special symbols, pending display) related to the game (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) to produce the game. First effect means (for example, A game control device 100a that performs a loss effect, a performance control device 300, and a display device 83
0) and a second effect means capable of directing the game in a different effect mode from the first effect means (for example, the game control device 100a that performs a special effect, the effect control device 300
, display device 830), and the first rendering means, when displaying the display elements, displays all of the display elements (for example, the pattern 713, the display state 790 of the pending display), and the display elements can be displayed in a second state (for example, a pattern 713a, a display state 791 of a pending display) in which a part of is missing (see FIGS. 41 and 47).

(2) The gaming machine 10 displays display elements (for example, special symbols, pending display) related to the game (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) to produce the game. First effect means (for example, A game control device 100a that performs a loss effect, a performance control device 300, and a display device 83
0) and a second effect means capable of directing the game in a different effect mode from the first effect means (for example, the game control device 100a that performs a special effect, the effect control device 300
, display device 830), and the first rendering means, when displaying a display element as an assembly of two or more display components (for example, segment display units 707 and 708 that are lit), display configuration A first state that displays the display element by all of the elements (eg, the symbol 71
3, a display state of pending display 790) and a second state in which display elements are displayed with a part of the display component missing (for example, a pattern 713a, a display state of pending display 791) (
41 and 47).

(3) The display element (1) or (2) is a pattern that is variably displayed in the game (
41 to 43).
(4) The display element (1) or (2) is a pending display that displays the right to execute the game in the game (see FIGS. 45 to 47).

(5) The gaming machine 10 exclusively executes the first game (for example, special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, special figure 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (for example, variable display time) An executable control unit (for example, game control device 100a, effect control device 300) is provided. The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the sum of the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game (see FIG. 35).

(6) The control unit in (5) increases the execution time of the first game as the total value of the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game increases. (See FIG. 35).

(7) The control unit in (5) sets the expected execution time of the first game as the sum of the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game increases. Decide so that the value is large (see FIG. 35).

(8) The gaming machine 10 exclusively executes the first game (for example, special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, special figure 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (for example, variable display time) An executable control unit (for example, game control device 100a, effect control device 300) is provided. The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game, and sets the execution time of the second game to: The decision is made based only on the number of stored rights to execute the second game, regardless of the number of rights to execute the first game stored (see FIG. 35).

(9) The maximum number of stored rights to execute the second game in (5) to (8) is smaller than the maximum number of stored rights to execute the first game (see FIG. 31).
(10) The maximum number of stored execution rights for the second game in (9) is 1 (see FIG. 31).
.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. In addition, the conventional game machine statically displays special symbols after variably displaying them, and the statically displayed special symbols are predetermined specific symbols, for example, three-digit identical symbols such as "777", and the special electric accessory is displayed as the second symbol. When a game ball enters a specific winning hole and passes through a V passing hole as it rotates, the special electric accessory is brought into a second big winning state, and the process of generating the first big winning state and the first big winning state. 2 is independent of the process of generating the big hit state, the game becomes a mere collection of game elements, and the player's consciousness is scattered, which is not enough to improve the amusement. The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes first winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a, effect control device 300, display device 830) and second winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a
, production control device 300, display device 830), first distribution control means (for example, game control device 100a), and second distribution control means (for example, game control device 100a). The first winning derivation means assigns a first execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 1 game) that can be acquired based on the winning to the first start prize area (for example, start prize opening 36, start opening 1). A specific area (for example, specific area 96) from the result (for example, big hit of special figure 1 game) of the first variation display game (for example, special figure 1 game) that can be stored with the number of 1 (for example, 4) as the upper limit
Winning (for example, detection of game ball by specific area switch 38e) is not a condition, and the first hit (for example, special game state, opening of special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1)) can be derived. The second winning derivation means is a second starting winning area different from the first starting winning area (for example,
The second execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 2 game) that can be acquired based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37, the start gate 2) is set to a second number smaller than the first number (for example, one ) is the upper limit and the result of a second variable display game (for example, a special figure 2 game) that can be stored (for example, a small hit in a special figure 2 game, opening of a special variation winning device 95 (large winning opening 2)) to a specific area 2nd hit (for example, special game state, special variable winning device 38 (large winning mouth 1
) can be derived. The first distribution control means distributes the game state after the first win to a first game state (for example, with electric power support) that is advantageous to the player at a first distribution rate (for example, 1/3). , to a second game state disadvantageous to the player (for example, no electric power support) at a second distribution rate (for example, 2/3). The second distribution control means distributes the game state after the second win to the first game state with a third distribution rate (eg, 1/3), and a fourth distribution rate (eg,
2/3) to distribute to the second game state (see FIGS. 28 to 35).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. It should be noted that conventional gaming machines have a problem that their appeal to players is not necessarily sufficient in the current situation where game features are diversified. The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes first winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a, effect control device 300, display device 830) and second winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a
, production control device 300, display device 830) and control means (for example, game control device 100
a) and The first winning derivation means includes a first starting winning area (for example, starting winning opening 36,
A first variable display game that can be stored with a first number (for example, 4) as the upper limit of the first execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 1 game) that can be acquired based on the winning in the start gate 1) (For example, special figure 1 game) result (for example, special figure 1 game jackpot) to a specific area (for example, specific area 96) (for example, game ball detection by specific area switch 38e)
The first hit (for example, special game state, special variable winning device 38 (large winning mouth 1)
) can be derived. The second winning derivation means is a second execution right (for example, a special figure 2 game starting memory) can be stored up to a second number (for example, one) smaller than the first number, and the result of the second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 game) that can be stored (for example, special figure 2 Small hit in the game, opening of the special variable prize winning device 95 (big prize winning port 2))
It is possible to derive a second win (for example, special game state, opening of special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1)) on condition of winning to a specific area from. After the end of the first win, the control means controls the second
A second start-up non-easy state in which it is not easy to win a prize in the start-up prize area is changed to a second start-up easy-to-win state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second start-up prize area.
Two or more execution rights of the variable display game can be acquired, a second winning is derived based on one execution right of the two or more execution rights of the second variable display game, and derived in the second start easy winning state. After the end of the second win, in the second starting easy-to-win state transitioned from the second-start easy-to-win state, based on the other execution right among the two or more execution rights of the second variable display game. Make the win derivable (see FIG. 32).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes first winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a, effect control device 300, display device 830) and second winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a
, production control device 300, display device 830) and control means (for example, game control device 100
a) and The first winning derivation means includes a first starting winning area (for example, starting winning opening 36,
A first variable display game that can be stored with a first number (for example, 4) as the upper limit of the first execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 1 game) that can be acquired based on the winning in the start gate 1) (For example, special figure 1 game) result (for example, special figure 1 game jackpot) to a specific area (for example, specific area 96) (for example, game ball detection by specific area switch 38e)
The first hit (for example, special game state, special variable winning device 38 (large winning mouth 1)
) can be derived. The second winning derivation means is a second execution right (for example, a special figure 2 game starting memory) can be stored up to a second number (for example, one) smaller than the first number, and the result of the second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 game) that can be stored (for example, special figure 2 Small hit in the game, opening of the special variable prize winning device 95 (big prize winning port 2))
It is possible to derive a second win (for example, special game state, opening of special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1)) on condition of winning to a specific area from. After the end of the first win, the control means controls the second
A second start-up non-easy state in which it is not easy to win a prize in the start-up prize area is changed to a second start-up easy-to-win state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second start-up prize area.
Two or more execution rights of a variable display game can be acquired, a second winning is derived based on one execution right of the two or more execution rights of a second variation display game, and after the second winning is completed. A second win can be derived based on other execution rights among the two or more execution rights of the second variation display game (see FIG. 32).

[Fourth embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine having the game board 30 was described, and in the description of the gaming machine of the third embodiment, the gaming machine was described as having the game board 800 . The fourth embodiment will be described as a game machine provided with a game board 801 (see FIG. 51) different from the game boards 30 and 800. FIG. FIG. 51 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 801 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 801 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 820 having a display device (variable display device) 830 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 830 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 820 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 820 . That is, the center case 820 surrounds the display area of the display device 830 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 830 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 830 is composed of a device having a display screen capable of dot-matrix display using LEDs. Note that the display device 830 may be, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (
It may be composed of a device having a display screen such as a cathode ray tube. In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 830, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. Also, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed based on the progress of the game.

Further, a board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 820 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 830 from the state shown in FIG.

At the upper right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 52).

In addition, the general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 is arranged on the upper right side of the center case 820 and the lower right side of the normal figure starting gate 34. , and below the right side of the center case 820 and below the right side of the special variable prize winning device 95, which will be described later, the general prize winning port 35 is arranged. These general prize gates 3
A game ball that has won 5 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 52).

In addition, below the center case 820 in the game area 32, a starting winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 361 (see FIG. 52).

Also, on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is a special figure variation display game (
A special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 is provided that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the results of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. . The special variable winning device 38 has an opening and closing member (movable piece) 38c, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 38c closes the large winning opening (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variable winning device 38 has a large winning opening (large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening/closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 52) as a driving device,
During the jackpot game state (special game state) as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the game ball is thrown into the big prize opening by changing the state from the closed state to the open state. to facilitate the inflow of the game, and to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 52) is arranged as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. .

In addition, at the position below the normal figure start gate 34 and on the lower right side than the center case 820, the normal variation prize that gives the start condition of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) A device 37 (first starting winning port, starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 3) is provided with a movable member 37b at a position serving as an inflow portion. The movable member 37b is slid forward and backward by means of a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 29) to prevent game balls from flowing into the inflow portion, and retreats backward to prevent game balls from flowing into the inflow portion. can be changed to an allowable state that allows The movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the state is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 362 (see FIG. 52). In addition, it is possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric).

In addition, at the lower left side of the normal variable winning device 37 and the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, special figure variation display games (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) ), a special variable prize winning device (large prize winning port 2) 95 is provided which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls. Special variable winning device 95
Has an opening and closing member (opening and closing door) 95c, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 95c closes the big winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 95c is retracted and converted into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the game area 32. - 特許庁That is, the special variable winning device 95 has an opening/closing member 95c driven by a large winning opening 2 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 52) as a driving device.
Equipped with a large winning opening (large winning opening 2) that is opened and closed by, and during the small winning game state due to the results of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the big winning opening is opened from the closed state , the game balls can easily flow into the big winning hole, and a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 52) is arranged as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. .

In addition, at a lower position than the center case 820 and at the bottom of the special variable winning device 95, there is a second start winning opening (starting A starting winning opening 370 (starting opening 2) forming a winning area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 370 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 371 (see FIG. 52).
It should be noted that the starting prize winning port 370 is more limited in winning opportunities when the special variable prize winning device 95 is open than when the special variable prize winning device 95 is closed.

In addition, at the bottom of the game area 32 (located below the start winning opening 36), an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win such as a winning opening is provided, and the rightmost side of the game area 32 (special variation The position below the winning device 38 and above the normal variable winning device 37) is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a winning port.

Also, the center case 820 does not have a warp flow path, but may have a warp flow path. For example, a warp port (warp inlet) is provided on the left side of the center case 820, and the game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port rolls on the stage in the center case 820, and part of it is used as the warp outlet. You may make it guide. In that case, the warp exit may be positioned directly above the start winning opening 36 so that the game ball guided to the warp exit can easily enter the starting winning opening 36.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the left area of the center case 820 in the game area 32 where the game balls flow down is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 820 is the right game area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hitting), aiming to win a prize in the starting prize opening 36 or the general prize winning opening 35 (located in the left game area). , and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, 95
, the starting prize winning port 370, the general prize winning port 35 (located in the right game area), and the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 801), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A general display device 5 that displays a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information
0 is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55, a normal map reservation display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5).

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a right-handed guidance display device 91c on the right side near the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38. FIG. The right-handed guide display device 91c lights up when guiding the player to hit right, and goes off in other states. The right-handed guide display device 91 c is included in the board decoration device 46 .

Note that the right-handed guidance display device 91c may notify the value of the game state targeted for the right-handed guidance and more detailed operation timings in a light emission mode. For example, the right-handed guidance display device 91c normally lights up in white, but may light up in cherry color at a predetermined frequency when the probability of winning is changed. Further, the right-handed guidance display device 91c, which is normally illuminated during guidance, may be made to blink at a predetermined frequency when the probability of winning is changed. In addition, the right-handed guidance display device 91c, for example, blue, yellow, red,
It is possible to suggest stochastic fluctuations with different degrees of reliability by setting changes in emission colors in multiple stages, such as cherry blossoms and rainbow colors. Also, the right-handed guidance display device 91c, for example, 512ms, 256
The flickering period may be set in multiple steps such as ms, 128 ms, and 64 ms to suggest stochastic fluctuations with different degrees of reliability. Note that the gaming machine 10 uses other displays instead of the right-handed guidance display device 91c or in addition to the right-handed guidance display device 91c to display the value of the game state targeted for the right-handed guidance and more detailed information. It is also possible to guide the appropriate operation timing.
For example, the gaming machine 10 may use a winning opportunity guidance display device 92, which will be described later, to guide the value of the game state targeted for right-handed guidance and more detailed operation timing.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a win opportunity guide display device 92 above and near the normal variable winning device 37 . The winning chance guidance display device 92 guides the winning chance to the player in a lighting mode. For example, the winning chance guidance display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "Two more chances" when there are two winning chances, and turns off the rest. In addition, the winning chance guide display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "one more chance" when there is one winning chance, and turns off the rest. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "Blooming" during the next and subsequent winnings with the winning chance, and turns off the rest. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The gaming machine 10 has a special figure game variation display state display device 98 at the lower right of the center case 820 in the gaming area 32 . The special figure game variation display state display device 98 is a so-called fourth symbol display device and is composed of two LEDs. Special game variation display state display device 98
, displays the variable display state of the special figure 1 variable display game with the left LED, and displays the variable display state of the special figure 2 variable display game with the right LED. For example, the special figure game variation display state display device 98 notifies the symbol stop state of the special figure variation display game by lighting, and notifies the symbol variation state of the special figure variation display game by blinking. In addition, the special game variation display state display device 98
is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The game machine 10 includes a normal pattern fluctuation display device 93 and a normal pattern reservation display device 94 on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32 . The general pattern variation display device 93 is composed of two LEDs, and notifies the variation display state of the general pattern game by alternate blinking, and notifies the variation display result of the general pattern game by a combination of lighting or extinguishing. In addition, the general map holding display device 94 has two LE
D, and informs the number of normal figure reservations from 0 to 4 according to the combination mode of lights off, lighting, and flashing. The normal pattern fluctuation display device 93 and the normal pattern reservation display device 94 are included in the board decoration device 46 .

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. In the explanation of the game machine of the first embodiment, the game machine is provided with the game control device 100, and in the explanation of the game machine of the third embodiment, the game machine is provided with the game control device 100a. ,
The fourth embodiment is a game control device 100b (FIG. 52) different from the game control devices 100, 100a.
) will be described as a gaming machine. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an example of a game machine control system according to the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100b. The game control device 100b is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. and an input unit 120 having an input port
, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130, and the like.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
1, starting port 1 switch 362 in normal variable winning device 37, starting port 2 in starting winning port 370
Switch 371, gate switch 34a in normal figure starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a
, the special variable winning device 38, 95 big winning mouth switch 38a, the special variable winning device 95 specific area switch 38e, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V, the low level is negative logic such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a signal and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and is connected to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning port 1). Large prize winning port 2 solenoid 9 for opening and closing the opening/closing member 95c of the winning port 2)
A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data of 5b, opening/closing data of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening/closing the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135. FIG.

Note that the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100b is the same as the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment, unlike the timer interrupt processing of the third embodiment.
Next, the game performance of the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be explained using FIG. Figure 5
3 is a diagram showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a so-called 1 type + 1 type game feature. The game property called 1 type + 1 type is a game property in which two special feature games can be executed. The game property called type 1 enables the derivation of a big hit as a result of a random number lottery in a special game (variation display game), and the result of the random number lottery is produced by the variable display of symbols. The gaming machine 10 can execute a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game as two special figure games, and the two special figure fluctuation display games are executed in parallel except when a win (big win, small win) is executed. is executable. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can perform variable display for the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game at the same time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the other one when one side derives a win in the simultaneous fluctuation display, thereby eliminating duplicate execution of the win.

The special figure 1 game is one winning to the starting winning port 36, or one to the normal variable winning device 37
It is possible to execute one variable display triggered by one win, and it is possible to store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. Special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/30 at low probability
0, the small hit probability is 150/300, and the remaining 149/300 is lost. Also, the special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/100 at the time of high probability. In the special figure 1 game, regarding the control state after the big win, 5/10 of the big wins are without low-probability electric support, and 5/10 of the big wins are without high-probability electric support.

The special figure 2 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the start winning hole 370, and can store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. special figure 2
In the game, when the probability is low, the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the probability of a small hit is 297/300,
The remaining 2/300 is discarded. In addition, the special figure 2 game has a jackpot probability of 1 at high probability.
/100. In the special figure 2 game, the control state after the big hit is 4/1 of the big hit
0 is assumed to be without high-probability electric support, and 6/10 of the jackpots are assumed to have high-probability electric support. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 assumes that the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game have the same jackpot probability, they may be different.

Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 having such game performance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.
The game machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a normal game state without low-probability general electric support, a special game state A without high-probability general-purpose electric support, and a special game state B with high-probability general electric support. The game machine 10 guides the left-handed game in the normal game state, and guides the right-handed game in the jackpot state, the special game state A, and the special game state B.例文帳に追加

The normal game state includes "normal mode" and "chance mode". "Normal mode"
It is a game state in which the special figure 1 game is mainly executed. The "chance mode" is a game state in which the special game 1 is mainly executed, but the special game 2 can be executed based on the execution right (reserved memory) acquired in the special game state B before transition to the normal game state.

"Chance mode" is a predetermined period (for example, 15 times of variable display including special figure 1 game and special figure 2 game) when the possibility of executing special figure game 2 disappears (for example, after normal game state transition) The progress is used as a transition condition (transition condition H) to transition to the “normal mode”.

The gaming machine 10 transitions to a special game state A or a normal game state in the "normal mode" or the "chance mode" triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 1 game, and the special game state in the wake of the jackpot of the special figure 2 game. It can transition to A or special game state B. The transition condition (transition condition A) from the normal game state to the special game state A is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot as no high probability general electric support. The transition condition from the normal game state to the normal game state (transition condition B) is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no low-probability general electric support. The transition condition (transition condition C) from the normal game state to the special game state B is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being high probability general electric support. However, the game machine 10, in the normal game state, "
In normal mode", by increasing the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 minutes) compared to the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes), the hit derived by the special figure 2 game suppressing opportunities. In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes) to the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes) in the "chance mode" of the normal game state. ), it does not suppress the chance to derive a hit by the special figure 2 game.

The special game state A includes "special mode A". "Special mode A" is a gaming state in which a special figure 2 game is mainly executed. It should be noted that the game machine 10, special figure 1 in the "special mode A"
Since the starting memory of the game can occur, it is special by increasing the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 10 minutes) compared to the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes). FIG. 1 suppresses the chance of deriving a hit from the game. In the special game state A, there is no general electric support, but since small hits in the special figure 2 game occur frequently, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of balls possessed by the player. In addition, the advantageous game progress for the player in the special game state A is the probability fluctuation (high probability) of the special figure 2 game and the normal game state ("chance mode")
Shortening the variation time of the special figure 2 game compared to , extending the variation time of the special figure 1 game compared to the normal game state ("chance mode"), and the small hit probability of the special figure 2 game compared to the special figure 1 game can be attributed to the height of That is, the special game state A is a game state in which the game progresses in an advantageous manner for the player without accompanying the electric power support.

The gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the special game state B in the special game state A triggered by the big hit of the special figure 2 game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can derive a big hit by the special figure 1 game, although the chance of winning is suppressed. The game machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the normal game state in the special game state A triggered by a big win in the special figure 1 game. is doing. The transition condition (transition condition D) from the special game state A to the special game state A is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no high-probability general electric support. From special game state A to special game state B
A transition condition to (transition condition E) is the end of the jackpot, in which the control state after the jackpot is with high-probability general electric support. However, in the special game state A, the gaming machine 10 compares the variation time of the special figure 1 game (eg, 10
Minutes) is to suppress the chance of winning by special figure 1 game.

Special game state B includes "special mode B". "Special mode B" is a gaming state in which a special figure 1 game is mainly executed. It should be noted that the game machine 10, special figure 1 in the "special mode B"
Since the starting memory of the game can occur, it is special by increasing the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 minutes) compared to the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 2 seconds to 2 minutes). FIG. 2 suppresses the chance of winning by the game. In the special game state B, there is a general electric support, and although the frequency is lower than the special figure 2 game, the small hit of the special figure 1 game occurs frequently, so the game can be progressed without reducing the number of balls held by the player. I have to. The advantageous game progress for the player in the special game state B is the probability fluctuation (high probability) of the special figure 1 game and the reduction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 game compared to the normal game state ("chance mode"). , Normal game state ("chance mode") compared to the fluctuation time extension of the special figure 2 game, and general electric support can be cited as reasons. That is, the special game state B is a game state in which the game progresses in an advantageous manner for the player while being accompanied by the electric power support.

The gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the normal game state in the special game state B triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 1 game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can derive a big hit by the special figure 2 game although the chance of winning is suppressed. The game machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the special game state B in the special game state B triggered by the special figure 2 game jackpot. omitted. The transition condition (transition condition F) from the special game state B to the special game state A is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no high probability general electric support. The transition condition (transition condition G) from the special game state B to the normal game state is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being low probability general electric support. However, in the special game state B, the gaming machine 10 increases the variation time of the special figure 2 game (eg, 10 minutes) compared to the variation time of the special figure 1 game (eg, 2 seconds to 2 minutes). This suppresses the chance to derive a hit from the special figure 2 game.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 realizes a game property in which two more big wins are guaranteed, that is, a probability variable two-time loop, when a big win with probability variation is derived in the normal game state. In addition, the game machine 10 realizes a game property in which two more big wins are guaranteed by the occurrence of a big win without the high-probability general electric support during the variable probability two-time loop. The game machine 10 improves the interest in the game by such game characteristics while suppressing excessive gambling characteristics in accordance with the game rules.

Next, the game progress in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. FIG. First, the one-shot jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 can expect winning to the starting winning port 36 in the normal game state, but cannot expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37. - 特許庁In addition, although the game machine 10 can be expected to win a prize to the starting prize winning port 370 in the normal game state, the chance of winning the special figure 2 game is suppressed by extending the variable time (for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 guides the progress of the game by the left-handed game in which the player aims to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 by hitting left-handed in the normal game state. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can expect the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension in the normal game state, but cannot expect the occurrence of the special figure 2 suspension. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10, when the player starts the game, "
"Normal mode" is normal.

Sequence 1 is the time when the player starts playing the game, and is in the game state "normal game state (normal mode)". The game state "normal game state (normal mode)" is probability fluctuation "low probability (low probability)", general electric support "none", special figure 1 reservation "none", special figure 2 reservation "none".

Sequence 2 is after the player starts the game, and is in the game state "normal game state (normal mode)". In the game state "normal game state (normal mode)", the special figure 1 reservation "no" becomes the special figure 1 reservation "with" due to the progress of the special figure 1 game by the left-handed game. In the left-handed game, accumulation of special figure 1 reservation can be expected, but accumulation of special figure 2 reservation cannot be expected.

In sequence 3, a big hit occurs in the game state "normal game state (normal mode)",
The game state is "special figure 1 jackpot (no low-accuracy support)". The game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no low-probability support)" is during jackpot operation. The game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no low probability support)" is probability fluctuation "-", general electric support "-", for example, special figure 1 reservation "Yes", special figure 2 reservation "Yes". The game in the game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no low-probability support)" is a right-handed game. In the right hitting game during the big hit, the accumulation of the special figure 1 reservation cannot be expected, but the accumulation of the special figure 2 reservation can be expected.

In sequence 4, the special figure 1 jackpot (no low-probability support) ends, and the game state "normal game state (
chance mode)”. The game state "normal game state (chance mode)" is probability fluctuation "low probability", general electric support "none", and in many cases the game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no low probability support)" Accumulate special figure 1 reservation "Yes (for example, 4)", special figure 2 reservation "Yes (for example, 4)". The game state "Normal game state (chance mode)" is a game progressing by hitting left. In the game state "normal game state (chance mode)", while the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are digested, the special figure 1 reservation becomes "with" and the special figure 2 reservation "no" (
Sequence 5). The game state "normal game state (chance mode)" is changed to the game state "normal game state (normal mode)" after a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 fluctuations in combination of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game). transition to In addition, the game in the normal game state is a left-handed game.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 transitions the game state from sequence 1 to sequence 6 to generate a typical one-shot jackpot.
Next, in the case of deriving a big win accompanied by probability fluctuation in the normal game state, a game feature in which two more big wins are guaranteed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

Sequences 1 and 2 are the same as those in FIG. 56, so description thereof is omitted. sequence 7
, a big hit occurs in the game state "normal game state (normal mode)", and the game state is "special figure 1 big hit (no high-accuracy support)". The game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no high-accuracy support)" is during jackpot operation. The game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no high accuracy support)" is probability fluctuation "-", general electric support "-", for example, special figure 1 reservation "Yes", special figure 2 reservation "Yes". The game state "special figure 1 jackpot (no high-accuracy support)" is a right-handed hitting game. In the right hitting game during the big hit, the accumulation of the special figure 1 reservation cannot be expected, but the accumulation of the special figure 2 reservation can be expected.

Sequence 8 is the game state "special game state A". The game state "special game state A" is probability fluctuation "high probability (high probability)", general electric support "none", for example, special figure 1 hold "
None”, special figure 2 reservation “yes”. The game in the game state "special game state A" is a right-handed game. In the game state "special game state A", there is no general electric support, but small wins occur frequently (small win rush), and the number of owned balls is maintained or gradually decreased, and the game progresses favorably for the player. to support. In the right-handed game in the game state "special game state A", accumulation of special figure 1 reservation cannot be expected, but accumulation of special figure 2 reservation can be expected.

In sequence 9, a big hit occurs in the game state "special game state A", and the game state is "special figure 2 big win (with high accuracy support)". The game state "Special figure 2 jackpot (with high accuracy support)"
The jackpot is in operation. The game state "Special figure 2 jackpot (with high accuracy support)" has probability fluctuation "-",
It is a general electricity support "-", for example, special figure 1 hold "no", special figure 2 hold "yes".
The game state "special figure 2 jackpot (with high accuracy support)" is a winning game by hitting to the right. In the right hitting game during the big hit, the accumulation of the special figure 1 reservation cannot be expected, but the accumulation of the special figure 2 reservation can be expected.

Sequence 10 is the game state "special game state B". Game state "Special game state B"
Is probability fluctuation "high probability (high probability)", general electricity support "Yes", for example, special figure 1 hold "Yes", special figure 2 hold "Yes". The game in the game state "special game state B" is a right-handed game. In the game state "special game state B", there is a general electric support, a small win is generated appropriately (a small win rush (weak)), and the number of possession balls is maintained or gradually reduced, and the game is advantageous to the player. Support progress. In the right-handed game in the game state "special game state B", accumulation of special figure 1 reservation and special figure 2 reservation can be expected. When a special figure 1 jackpot (no low-probability support) occurs in the game state "special game state B", the sequence is the same as sequence 3 described with reference to FIG. After that, the process proceeds like sequences 4, 5 and 6 described with reference to FIG.

The game machine 10 thus transitions the game state and realizes a game property such that three big wins including two big wins are set as one set from the derivation of the big win accompanied by the probability variation.
Next, the game property of additionally generating two big wins from the game state B in the variable probability double loop will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

Sequences 1, 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10 are as described with reference to FIG. In the game property shown in FIG. 56, a special figure 1 big hit (no low probability support) occurred in the game state "special game state B" and the variable probability twice loop ended, but a special figure 1 big hit (low If a special figure 1 jackpot (no high-accuracy support) occurs instead of none), three jackpots are guaranteed, including the jackpot.

Therefore, sequence 7 follows sequence 10, and proceeds like sequences 7, 8, 9, 10, 3, 4, 5, and 6 described with reference to FIG. Similarly, if the special figure 1 jackpot (no high-accuracy support) is repeated in the game state "special game state B" (sequence 10), the variable-probability double loop jackpot will continue to be updated.

Next, the game property of additionally generating two big wins from the game state A in the variable probability double loop will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of the game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

Sequences 1, 2, 7 and 8 are as described with reference to FIG. In the game characteristics shown in FIG. 56, in the game state "special game state A", the special figure 2 big hit (with high accuracy support) occurs and the next big hit is guaranteed, but the special figure If a special figure 1 big hit (without high-accuracy support) occurs instead of 2 big wins (with low-accuracy support), 3-time big wins including the big hit are guaranteed.

Therefore, sequence 8 is followed by sequence 11 . In sequence 11, a big hit occurs in the game state "special game state A", and the game state is "special figure 2 big win (no high-accuracy support)". The game state "special figure 2 jackpot (no high-accuracy support)" is during jackpot operation. The game state "special figure 2 jackpot (no high accuracy support)" is probability fluctuation "-", general electric support "-", for example, special figure 1 reservation "Yes", special figure 2 reservation "Yes". Game state "Special figure 2 jackpot (
No high-accuracy support)” is a hit game by right-handed hitting. In the right hitting game during the big hit, the accumulation of the special figure 1 reservation cannot be expected, but the accumulation of the special figure 2 reservation can be expected.

After sequence 11, sequences 8, 9, 10, 3, 4, and 5 described with reference to FIG.
, 6 and so on. Similarly, the game state "special game state A" (sequence 8
), the special figure 2 jackpot (no high-accuracy support) occurs, and the special figure 1 jackpot (no high-accuracy support) occurs in the game state "special game state B" (sequence 10). The jackpot will continue to be updated.

Next, FIG. 5 for the game property of additionally generating a big hit from the normal game state (chance mode)
9 will be used for explanation. FIG. 59 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of the game sequence of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

Sequences 1, 2, 7, 8, 9, 10, 3 and 4 are as described with reference to FIG. In the game property shown in FIG. 56, the game state "normal game state (chance mode)"
After the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the game state transitioned to "normal game state (normal mode)",
Here, a big hit is generated in the game state "normal game state (chance mode)".

Sequence 4 has probability fluctuation “low probability” and general electric support “none”, but there is a pending memory accumulated in sequence 3, and a maximum of 8 pending memories including special 1 pending and special 2 pending There is Since the special figure 2 game has a higher expectation than the special figure 1 game that the probability fluctuation will be "high probability" if a big hit occurs, the game progresses more advantageous than the game state "normal game state (normal mode)". to enable.

If a jackpot occurs in sequence 4, sequences 3, 7,
It transitions to either 9 or 11, and two or more big hits can be expected except for sequence 3. Also, if it is limited to sequences 7 and 11, three or more big hits can be expected.

Next, the variable display time setting as a mechanism for preventing the player from playing games that impair the game property will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of variable display time (expected value) for each game state in the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 sets the fluctuation display time (expected value) of the special figure 1 game to ta1 in the normal game state (normal mode), and sets the fluctuation display time (expected value) of the special figure 2 game to tb1. At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the game progress of the special figure game in the normal game state (normal mode) mainly the special figure 1 game by increasing tb1 compared to ta1.

The gaming machine 10 sets the fluctuation display time (expected value) of the special figure 1 game to ta2 in the normal game state (chance mode), and sets the fluctuation display time (expected value) of the special figure 2 game to tb2. At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the game progress of the special game in the normal game state (chance mode) parallel to the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game by making tb2 comparable to ta2.

The gaming machine 10 sets the variable display time (expected value) of the special figure 1 game in the special game state A to ta
3, and the variable display time (expected value) of the special figure 2 game is tb3. At this time, the gaming machine 10
By making tb3 smaller than ta3, the game progress of the special figure game in the special game state A is made the special figure 2 game main.

The gaming machine 10 sets the fluctuation display time (expected value) of the special figure 1 game in the special game state B to ta
4, and the variable display time (expected value) of the special figure 2 game is tb4. At this time, the gaming machine 10
By increasing tb4 compared to ta4, the game progress of the special figure game in the special game state B is made the special figure 1 game main.

Also, the variable display time (expected value) of the hatched display shown in FIG. 60 is set to a value (for example, 10 minutes) that is significantly larger than the variable display time (expected value) to be compared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being the main subject of the special figure game, which has an extremely large value, and to prevent the player from playing a game that impairs the game characteristics.

Also, as a mechanism for preventing the player from playing a game that impairs the game property, the big win distribution control for changing the distribution of the big win according to the control state at the time of winning will be described with reference to FIG. 61 . FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of big hit distribution control for each game state of the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10, when the special figure 1 game derives a big hit in the game property matching control state,
Regarding the control state after the jackpot, 5/10 of the jackpots are assumed to have no low-probability electric support,
5/10 of the jackpots are assumed to be without high-probability electric support. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game derives a jackpot in the game property non-conforming control state, the gaming machine 10 sets 5/10 of the jackpots in the control state after the jackpot to no low-probability general electric support, thereby winning a jackpot. 5/ of
10 is assumed to have high-probability general electric support.

In addition, when the special figure 2 game derives a big hit in the game-property-adapted control state, the gaming machine 10 sets 4/10 of the big wins without high-probability electric support in the control state after the big win. 6/10 is assumed to have high-probability electricity support. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10
When the special figure 2 game derives a jackpot in the game property non-conforming control state, 10/10 of the jackpots are assumed to have high probability general electric support in the control state after the jackpot.

In addition, the game property adaptive control state in the special figure 1 game is a game state in which the derivation of the big hit by the special figure 1 game exhibits a predetermined game property, for example, the normal game state (normal mode and chance mode) , special game state B. In addition, the non-matching control state of game characteristics in the special figure 1 game is a game condition in which the derivation of a big hit by the special figure 1 game impairs the predetermined game characteristics, for example, the special game condition A.

In addition, the game property adaptive control state in the special figure 2 game is a game state in which the derivation of the big hit by the special figure 2 game exhibits a predetermined game property, for example, a normal game state (chance mode), a special game It is in state A. Also, the non-matching game control state in the special figure 2 game is a game state in which the derivation of the big hit by the special figure 2 game impairs the predetermined game characteristics, for example, the special game state B.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 changes the allocation of the big win according to the control state at the time of winning. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can avoid the progress of the game that impairs the predetermined playability, and achieve the progress of the game that exhibits the predetermined playability.

In addition, although the game machine 10 performs the big hit distribution control according to the game state for the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, only one of them may be performed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs the setting of the variable display time (expected value) (see FIG. 60) and the jackpot distribution control as a mechanism to prevent the player from playing games that impair the game characteristics. Only one of them may be performed. In addition, the game machine 10 has a variable display time (expected value)
The setting (see FIG. 60) and whether to perform both the big hit distribution control or either one may be the same as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, or may be different. .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. It should be noted that conventional gaming machines have a problem that their appeal to players is not necessarily sufficient in the current situation where game features are diversified. The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes first winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100b, effect control device 300, display device 830) and second winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100b
, effect control device 300, display device 830), first start winning conversion control means (for example, game control device 100b), and first winning derivation conversion control means (for example, game control device 100b
), a second winning derivation conversion control means (for example, the game control device 100b), and a control means (for example, the game control device 100b). The first winning derivation means is the first start winning area (
For example, the result of the first variable display game (for example, special figure 1 game) that can be executed based on the winning of the start winning port 36 (starting port 1), normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 3) (for example, It is possible to derive the first hit (for example, the opening of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1)) from the special figure 1 game jackpot). The second winning derivation means provides a second variable display game (for example, special It is possible to derive the second win (for example, the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 (big prize winning opening 1)) from the result of the FIG. The first start winning conversion control means has a first start winning easy state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) in which winning in the first starting winning region is easy and a first start winning non-easy state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) , closed state of the normal variable winning device 37). The first winning derivation conversion control means is a first winning easy state (for example, special figure 1 game high probability) in which the first winning is easy to derive and a first winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability) ) can be converted to The second winning derivation conversion control means is a second winning easy state (for example, special figure 2 game high probability) in which the second winning is easy to derive and a second winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 2 game low probability) that is not easy ) can be converted to The control means includes a first start winning non-easy state (for example, normal variable winning device 37 closed state), a first winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability) and a second winning non-easy state (for example, After the end of the first hit derived in the special figure 2 game low probability), the first start winning non-easy state and the first easy winning state (for example, special figure 1 game high probability) and the second easy winning state (for example, special 2 game high probability), and after the second win derived in the first start non-easy winning state, first easy winning state and second easy winning state, the first start easy winning state (for example, normal variable winning device 37 open state) and the first easy-hit state and the second easy-hit state make it easier to derive the first hit than the second hit (FIGS. 53 and 5).
4).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes first winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100b, effect control device 300, display device 830) and second winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100b
, effect control device 300, display device 830), first start winning conversion control means (for example, game control device 100b), and first winning derivation conversion control means (for example, game control device 100b
), a second winning derivation conversion control means (for example, the game control device 100b), and a control means (for example, the game control device 100b). The first winning derivation means is the first start winning area (
For example, the result of the first variable display game (for example, special figure 1 game) that can be executed based on the winning of the start winning port 36 (starting port 1), normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 3) (for example, It is possible to derive the first hit (for example, the opening of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1)) from the special figure 1 game jackpot). The second winning derivation means provides a second variable display game (for example, special It is possible to derive the second win (for example, the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 (big prize winning opening 1)) from the result of the FIG. The first start winning conversion control means has a first start winning easy state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) in which winning in the first starting winning region is easy and a first start winning non-easy state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) , closed state of the normal variable winning device 37). The first winning derivation conversion control means is a first winning easy state (for example, special figure 1 game high probability) in which the first winning is easy to derive and a first winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability) ) can be converted to The second winning derivation conversion control means is a second winning easy state (for example, special figure 2 game high probability) in which the second winning is easy to derive and a second winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 2 game low probability) that is not easy ) can be converted to The control means includes a first start winning non-easy state (for example, normal variable winning device 37 closed state), a first winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability) and a second winning non-easy state (for example, In the first game state (for example, normal game state), which is a special figure 2 game low probability), the derivation of the first hit is easier than the second win, and the transition is made after the first game state. In a second game state (for example, special game state A) that is a state and a first winning easy state (for example, a special figure 1 game high probability) and a second winning easy state (for example, a special figure 2 game high probability) A first start-up easy winning state (for example, an open state of a normal variable winning device 37), a first easy winning state and a second easy winning state, which facilitates the derivation of the second winning rather than the winning and transitions after the second game state. In the third game state (for example, special game state B), it is easier to derive the first win than the second win (Figs. 53 and 54).

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of the fifth embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment notifies the execution of a predetermined effect (notice effect) related to the game by the success/failure effect (announces that there is a possibility of executing the notice effect (developing to the notice effect)),
A suggestive effect is performed to suggest the execution of the advance notice effect (development to the advance notice effect) according to the success of the success/failure effect. The advance notice effect is, for example, a effect for notifying the degree of reliability, the degree of expectation, etc. regarding the game.

First, the suggestive effect executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestive effect of the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 62 shows an example of effect contents and suggestive contents of a suggestive effect (a suggestive effect that foretells the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) in which the announcement content is a pseudo-continuous effect (announcement effect). The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect that allows the player to perceive one variation (one variation display game) as if it were a plurality of variation display games by causing the temporarily stopped symbols to fluctuate again. As a suggestion that the content of the notice is a pseudo-continuous production,
There are a suggestion production 1 and a suggestion production 2.

The performance content of the suggestive performance 1 is a pseudo-continuous stimulus performance. Pseudo-Ren Instigation production is whether or not the Pseudo-Ren pattern (special pattern) used to suggest the execution of Pseudo-Ren is temporarily stopped (success or failure of temporary stop of Pseudo-Ren pattern)
is displayed to foretell the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern (success of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) suggests execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Suggestion contents of suggestion production 1 include three of success, failure 1 (SP reach (reach production with high expectation)), and failure 2 (no development). Suggestion content (success) is suggestion content suggested by success of success/failure effect (success of temporary stop of pseudo-continuous symbol). Suggestions (failure 1, failure 2)
is a suggested content suggested by the failure of the success/failure effect (failure of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

Suggestive production 1 derives a result mode that suggests success (suggesting development to pseudo-continuous production) at a rate of 50% (probability), and suggests failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50% ( A result mode that suggests that it does not develop into a pseudo-continuous performance is derived.

More specifically, the suggestion production 1 derives a result mode (success) that suggests that it will develop into a pseudo-continuous production at a rate of 50%, and a result that suggests that it will develop into an SP reach at a rate of 25%. A mode (failure 1) is derived, and a result mode (failure 2) is derived that suggests that the performance does not develop at a rate of 25% (returning to the state before the suggestive performance was started).

In this way, in the suggestive effect 1, the gaming machine 10 provides three suggested contents (success,
Derive a result mode that suggests either failure 1 or failure 2).
The SP reach is an example of an effect (specific effect) that can be suggested when both the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 fail, and is an effect that directs the derivation process of the game result.

The effect content of the suggestive effect 2 is a roulette effect. The roulette effect foretells the execution of the pseudo-run effect by displaying whether or not an option suggesting a pseudo-run (pseudo-run option) is selected from a plurality of options (success or failure of selection of the pseudo-run option). , choosing a pseudo-continuous choice (
Suggests to execute a pseudo-continuous performance on success in selecting a pseudo-continuous option).

Suggestion contents of suggestion production 2 include success, failure 1 (SP reach), failure 2 (no development),
There are four failures, 3 (full rotation (effect of spinning with a winning combination of symbols)).
Suggestion content (success) is suggestion content suggested by the success of success/failure presentation (success in selection of pseudo-continuous option). Suggestion contents (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) are suggestion contents suggested by failure of success/failure presentation (failure to select pseudo-continuous option).

Suggestion production 2 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 30% and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) at a rate of 70%.
More specifically, the suggestion production 2 derives the suggestion that it will develop into a pseudo-continuous production at a rate of 30%, derives the suggestion that it will develop into an SP reach at a rate of 30%, and derives the suggestion that it will develop into a SP reach at a rate of 30%. A suggestion that the performance does not develop at 10% is derived, and a suggestion that it develops to full rotation at a rate of 10% is derived.

In this way, in the suggestion effect 2, the gaming machine 10 provides four suggestions (success,
Suggest one of failure 1, failure 2, failure 3).
Note that the full rotation is an example of an effect that can be suggested only when the suggestion effect 2 fails. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can further differentiate each suggestive effect by providing an effect (full rotation) that can be shifted (developed) only in one of the suggestive effects. As a result, the gaming machine 10
It is possible to enhance the performance effect of each suggestive performance and effectively improve the interest.

It should be noted that the content of presentation, the content of suggestion, and the ratio of derivation described above are merely examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, the game machine 10 can include development to an effect that is not suggested in the suggestive effect 2 in the suggestive content when the suggestive effect 1 fails.

Next, the derivation ratio of each suggestive content will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. Figure 63 shows
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a derivation ratio of each suggested content according to the fifth embodiment; FIG.
In the suggestion effect 1, the gaming machine 10 derives the suggestion of success (development to advance notice effect) at a rate of 50%, and derives the suggestion of failure at a rate of 50%. In addition, in the suggestion effect 1, the gaming machine 10 derives a suggestion (failure 1) of developing to SP reach at a rate of 50% (under the conditions for deriving failure) in the case of deriving failure, and 50 Derive a suggestion (failure 2) that it will not develop at a rate of %.

On the other hand, in the suggestion effect 2, the gaming machine 10 derives the suggestion of success (development to the advance notice effect) at a rate of 30%, and derives the suggestion of failure at a rate of 70%. Also, in the suggestion production 2, the gaming machine 10
of the cases leading to failure, SP
Derive a suggestion of developing to reach (failure 1), 30 × 100/70% (approximately 42.85
7%) and derived a suggestion of no development (failure 2) at a rate of 10 × 100/70% (approximately 1
4.286%) to derive the suggestion (failure 3) to evolve to full rotation.

In other words, in the suggested effects 1 and 2, the suggested effect 2 has a higher percentage of recovery at the time of failure (percentage other than failure 2).
Further, in the suggestive effects 1 and 2, the derivation ratio of deriving the suggestion of success is 50% in the suggestive effect 1 and 30% in the suggestive effect 2 (configured to have different ratios).
In this way, by differentiating the derivation ratio of the suggestion of success in a plurality of suggestion performances suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance (notice performance) depending on the success of the success/failure performance, the gaming machine 10 further differentiates each of the suggestion performances. (It is possible to differentiate not only the performance content but also the sense of expectation), and the interest can be effectively improved.

Further, in the suggestive effects 1 and 2, the derivation ratio of deriving the suggestion (failure 1) to develop into a specific effect is 25% in the suggestive effect 1 and 30% in the suggestive effect 2 (different ratios configured as follows). Further, in the suggestive effects 1 and 2, the derivation ratio of deriving the suggestion of developing to a specific effect under the conditions leading to failure is 50% in the suggestive effect 1 and about 42.857% in the suggestive effect 2. (configured to be in different proportions).

In other words, at the start of the suggestive effect (when the success or failure is unknown), the expectation of developing to the specific effect is higher in the suggestive effect 2, and after the failure of the suggestive effect (after the success or failure is known), the specific effect is expected. The expectation of development is higher in the specific production 1. In this way, the gaming machine 10
can increase the effect of each suggestive performance and effectively improve the interest by changing the suggestive performance with a high expectation to develop into a specific performance as the performance progresses.

Next, the specific effects (display screen examples) of each suggestive effect (suggestive effects 1 and 2) are shown in FIG.
68 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment (part 3);
is. FIG. 67 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment.

Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen consisting of one or more images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle different codes are used for different display contents. is attached. First of all, the flow of the suggestive effect 1 (pseudo-inciting effect) will be described.

A display screen 840 shown in FIG. 64(1) is a display screen in which symbols are stopped. It is used for period stop display. The display screen 840 includes a large pattern group 841, a small pattern group 842, a special figure 1 reserved number display 843, a special figure 2 reserved number display 844, and a reserved display 845
, and a pending digestion display 846 are displayed.

The large pattern group 841 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large pattern group 8
41 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 841 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols.

In the display screen 840, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol indicates that
It shows that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 840 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 842 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 842 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 841 . The small pattern group 842 is
It includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. On the display screen 840, the left, medium and right symbols that constitute the small symbol group 842 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 841 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 842, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 842 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 841, and has a low degree of freedom of display position (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 843 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 840, the special figure 1 reserved number display 843 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4".
The special figure 2 reserved number display 844 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 840, the special figure 2 reserved number display 844 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "0".

Suspension display 845 shows how the number of suspension icons 847 (suspension storage display) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 game corresponding to the current gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) is displayed. The suspension icon 847 is, for example, spherical, and the suspension icon 847 can also be animated (eg, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.) to produce a display with movement. In addition, the pending digestion display 846 is the pending digestion icon 84 corresponding to the pending digestion of the special game.
8 (see display screen 850) is displayed. The pending digestion icon 848 is, for example, spherical, and the pending digestion icon 848 can also be displayed with movement by animation (eg, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, as shown in the display screen 840, when the special figure 1 pending number display 843 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 844 displays "0", the pending display 845 shows four pending icons 847 indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4". It should be noted that the number of reservations or the number of reservations means the number of starting memories in which the special figure variation display game has not been executed.

The pending display 845 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure variation display game by its display mode (holding icon 847 displayed on the holding display 845), and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory.

The pending digestion display 846 can indicate whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state by its display mode, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result. On the display screen 840, the pending digestion display 846 has a blank (blank) inside the frame (hiding the pending digestion icon 848) to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

In addition, the pending display 845 displays the total pending number of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game according to the gaming state by the pending icon 847, but the number of reservations of the special figure 1 game and the special Any one of the number of reservations of the game in FIG. 2 may be displayed by the reservation icon 847 .

In addition, it may include effect display elements such as background display, character display, and character display (not shown), and the effect display elements may also be capable of producing display accompanied by movement by animation or the like.

A display screen 850 shown in FIG. 64(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. A display screen 850 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 840 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). On the display screen 850, the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol of the large symbol group 841 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 850, the left pattern, the medium pattern, and the right pattern of the small pattern group 842 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 850, the special figure 1 reserved number display 843 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "3".
, the special figure 2 reserved number display 844 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the reserved display 845 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 1 game , and the reservation icon 84 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "3"
Indicated by the number seven. Also, on the display screen 850, the pending digestion display 846 displays a pending digestion icon 848 (holding memory display) being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is being displayed in variation.

A display screen 851 shown in FIG. 65(1) is a display screen after the display screen 850, and shows a state in which the suggestive effect 1 (pseudo-reaction effect) is being executed.
The display screen 851 includes a pseudo-continuous effect display 852 in its display contents. The pseudo-continuation-inciting effect display 852 displays a pseudo-consecutive-inciting effect. On the display screen 851, a pseudo-continuous effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the words "Stop!" This indicates a state in which the player is inciting the player, that is, a state in which the possibility of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is being foretold.

On the display screen 851, the large symbol group 841 indicates that the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped as the left symbol and the symbol "5" is temporarily stopped as the right symbol. Also, on the display screen 851, the large pattern group 8
41 causes the pseudo-continuous symbols in the medium symbols to operate in a manner (for example, low-speed variation) that is different from the changing state (the aspect of the display screen 850) and the temporary stop state, and asks the player whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols will be temporarily stopped. It shows a state of inciting against.

The display screen 853 shown in FIG. 65(2) is a display screen after the display screen 851, and is in a state suggesting the success of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-trigger effect). state).

On the display screen 853, a pseudo-reaction hype effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "Success!!" It suggests what he did (developing into a pseudo-representation).

In addition, on the display screen 853, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops the symbol "3" in the left symbol, temporarily suspends the symbol "5" in the right symbol, temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol, and temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol. It suggests that the inciting production led to success. After that, the gaming machine 10 terminates the first suggestion effect.

A display screen 854 shown in FIG. 65(3) is a display screen after the display screen 851, and is in a state suggesting failure of the suggestion effect 1 (pseudo-reaction effect) (not to execute the pseudo-reaction effect). state).

On the display screen 854, a pseudo-revolutionary effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "failure...", and the pseudo-reaming effect (success or failure effect of temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern) fails (failure 1 , failure 2).

On the display screen 854, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops symbol "3" as the left symbol, temporarily suspends symbol "5" as the right symbol, and displays the symbols in the middle symbol in a fluctuating state, thereby displaying a pseudo-continuous pattern. The teasing performance failed (
This suggests that failure 1 and failure 2) were derived. After that, the gaming machine 10 suggests that the game will develop into an SP reach or that the performance will not develop (suggests failure 1 or failure 2), and ends the suggestion performance 1. - 特許庁

The above is an example of the display screen of the suggestive effect 1 (pseudo-continuous stimulating effect). Next, an example of the display screen of the suggestive effect 2 (roulette effect) will be described.
A display screen 855 shown in FIG. 66(1) is a display screen after the display screen 850, and shows a state in which the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is being executed.

The display screen 855 includes a roulette effect display 856 in its display contents. The roulette effect display 856 displays a roulette effect. On the display screen 855, the roulette effect display 856 includes option displays 856a to 856d corresponding to each suggested content, and an operation display 85
6e.

Option displays 856a to 856d display options that can be selected in the roulette presentation. On the display screen 855, the option display 856a is an option used to suggest the success of the roulette effect (success or failure effect), and the option displays 856b to 856d are options used to suggest failure of the roulette effect (failure of the success/failure effect). is. The option display 856a displays the character "pseudo", suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect develops when selected (suggesting success of the roulette effect).

The option displays 856b to 856d display the character "miss", suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will not develop when selected (suggesting failure of the roulette effect). In particular,
For example, option display 856b is an option corresponding to failure 2 (no development), option display 856c is an option corresponding to failure 1 (SP reach), and option display 856d is an option corresponding to failure 3 (full rotation). Corresponding options.

The operation display 856e guides the operation in the roulette effect. The operation display 856e is
An image showing that the push button is being pressed by hand and the characters "Push the button to decide the destination!!" are displayed to inform the player that the roulette performance is accompanied by the push button operation. I am guiding you.

On the display screen 855, the large pattern group 841 temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the left pattern, temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the right pattern, and displays the middle pattern in a fluctuating state. This indicates that the Also, on the display screen 855, the large symbol group 841 is displayed in a reduced size (reduced display at the lower left) compared to the state of the display screen 850, so that the gaming machine 10 secures a display range for the roulette effect.

A display screen 857 shown in FIG. 66(2) is a display screen after the display screen 855, and shows a state in which the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) is being executed.
On the display screen 857, a roulette effect display 856 indicates whether or not a pseudo-run option is selected from a plurality of options (success or failure of selection of a pseudo-run option), that is, a pseudo-run effect is executed. Indicates a state that foretells that there is a possibility that In particular,
The roulette effect display 856 sequentially moves the selection cursor between the option displays, and displays the option display on which the selection cursor is positioned in a manner distinguishable from other option displays (a mode that suggests that the selection is temporarily made). ).

On the display screen 857, the roulette effect display 856 displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856c, displays the option display 856c in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and the option display 856c is temporarily displayed. indicates that it is selected for

A display screen 858 shown in FIG. 66(3) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state suggesting the success of the suggestive effect 2 (roulette effect) (implementing execution of a pseudo-continuous effect). state).

On the display screen 858, the roulette effect display 856 stops and displays the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856a, and also distinguishes the option display 856a from other option displays (a mode that suggests selection). , suggesting that the option display 856a has been selected, that is, the roulette effect has been successful (success in selecting a pseudo-continuous option) (development into a pseudo-continuous effect).

In addition, on the display screen 858, the large pattern group 841 temporarily stops the pattern "3" with the left pattern, temporarily stops the pattern "3" with the right pattern, temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous pattern with the middle pattern, and produces a roulette effect. has been successful. After that, the game machine 10 terminates the suggestion effect 2. - 特許庁

A display screen 859 shown in FIG. 67(1) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state suggesting failure of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). state).

On the display screen 859, the roulette effect display 856 stops displaying the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856b, displays the option display 856b in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and selects the option display 856b. That is, it suggests that the roulette performance led to a failure (failure in selecting a pseudo-continuous option) (not developing into a pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, on the display screen 859, the large pattern group 841 temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the left pattern, temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the right pattern, displays the middle pattern in a variable state, and produces a roulette effect. This suggests that the

Display screen 860 shown in FIG. 67(2) is a display screen after display screen 859, and indicates a state in which the failure suggested by display screen 859 is failure 2 ("no progress"). show.

On the display screen 860, the roulette effect display 856 changes the display contents of the option display 856b selected by the roulette effect from the "missing" displayed on the display screen 859 to the "disappointing".
, suggesting that the failure derived from the roulette performance is failure 2 (“no development”) (the performance does not develop). After that, the game machine 10 terminates the suggestion effect 2. - 特許庁

A display screen 861 shown in FIG. 67(3) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state of suggesting failure of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). state).

On the display screen 861, the roulette effect display 856 stops displaying the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856c, displays the option display 856c in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and selects the option display 856c. That is, it suggests that the roulette performance led to a failure (failure in selecting a pseudo-continuous option) (not developing into a pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, on the display screen 861, the large pattern group 841 temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the left pattern, temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the right pattern, and displays the middle pattern in a fluctuating state to produce a roulette effect. This suggests that the

A display screen 862 shown in FIG. 68(1) is a display screen after the display screen 861, and indicates a state in which the failure suggested on the display screen 861 is failure 1 ("SP reach"). show.

On the display screen 862, the roulette effect display 856 changes the display contents of the option display 856c selected by the roulette effect from "loss" displayed on the display screen 861 to "battle" (display showing SP reach), The failure derived from the roulette performance is failure 1 (“S
P reach”) (developing to SP reach). After that, the game machine 10 terminates the suggestion effect 2. - 特許庁

A display screen 863 shown in FIG. 68(2) is a display screen after the display screen 857, and is in a state of suggesting failure of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). state).

On the display screen 863, the roulette effect display 856 stops displaying the selection cursor at a position corresponding to the option display 856d, displays the option display 856d in a manner distinguishable from other option displays, and selects the option display 856d. That is, it suggests that the roulette performance led to a failure (failure in selecting a pseudo-continuous option) (not developing into a pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, on the display screen 863, the large pattern group 841 temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the left pattern, temporarily stops the pattern "3" in the right pattern, displays the middle pattern in a variable state, and produces a roulette effect. This suggests that the

A display screen 864 shown in FIG. 68(3) is a display screen after the display screen 863, and indicates a state in which the failure suggested in the display screen 863 is failure 3 (“full rotation”). show.

On the display screen 864, the roulette effect display 856 changes the display content of the option display 856d selected by the roulette effect from "loss" displayed on the display screen 863 to "full rotation", and the failure derived by the roulette effect is displayed. is failure 3 (“full rotation”) (developing to full rotation). After that, the game machine 10 terminates the suggestion effect 2. - 特許庁

The above is an example of the display screen of the suggestion effect 2 (roulette effect). In the display screen example described above, the roulette effect is performed in a mode in which one option display corresponding to each suggested content is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 provides a roulette performance in a mode in which an option display suggesting one success (options corresponding to success) and an option display suggesting one failure (options corresponding to failures 1, 2, and 3) are provided. Alternatively, display of options suggesting two successes (options corresponding to success) and display of options suggesting one failure (failure 1, 2
, 3) may be provided in the roulette presentation.

In addition, regarding the option display that suggests failure, "miss" is commonly displayed, and after selection, "
Disappointment", "Battle", and "Full rotation" are displayed (multi-level display of suggested content), but not limited to this, options display of "Disappointment", option display of "Battle" from the beginning, It may be configured to display an option display of "full rotation". It is also possible to display "hit" for the option display suggesting success, and display "pseudo" after the selection (multi-step display of suggested content).

By the way, the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily execute the pseudo-continuous effect even when the suggestive effect suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (notice effect). For example, the gaming machine 10 does not have to execute the pseudo-continuous effect at a constant rate. That is, the gaming machine 10 can include falsehoods in the success of the suggestive effect.

Here, an example of the execution ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect after the success of each suggestive effect in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of the fifth embodiment.

Suggestive production 1 includes 5% falsehoods in success (implementation expectation is 95%). That is, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect) at a rate of 95% after the success of the suggestive effect 1, and does not actually execute the notice effect at a rate of 5%. In other words, the suggestive effect 1 is a effect that suggests the execution expectation degree of the pseudo-continuous effect of 95% by the success of the success/failure effect.

Suggestive production 2 includes 20% falsehoods in success (assuming execution expectation is 80%). i.e.
The game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect at a rate of 80% after the success of the suggestion effect 2, and 20%.
The advance notice effect is not actually executed at a rate of . In other words, the suggestive effect 2 is a effect that suggests the execution expectation degree of 80% of the pseudo-continuous effect by the success of the success/failure effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can differentiate the respective suggestive effects more by differentiating the ratio of the guesses (contradictory patterns) to be included in the success for each suggestive effect, thereby effectively increasing the interest. can be improved.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may include a trick only in the success of one of the suggestive effects, or may set the rate of the false to be included in the success of any of the suggestive effects to be the same.
For example, even if the execution ratio of the actual advance notice effect is set to be the same between the suggested effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2, the gaming machine 10 can change the execution ratio of the false rumors included in the success, so that the advance notice effect is performed. The success derivation rate can be made different between the suggestive performance 1 and the suggestive performance 2. - 特許庁According to this, the game machine 10 can differentiate the expectations that the player has in each of the suggestive performances, while setting the execution ratio of the actual advance notice performance to be the same between the suggestive performance 1 and the suggestive performance 2.例文帳に追加, can effectively improve interest.

By the way, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to performing the suggestive effect only once in one variation (one variation display game), but it is also possible to perform the suggestive effect a plurality of times. Here, an example of an effect configuration in the case where a suggestive effect is performed a plurality of times within one variation will be described with reference to FIG.

Note that the game machine 10 can also include contradictory patterns at a certain rate in the suggestions of failure 1, failure 2, and failure 3.
In addition, the gaming machine 10, as a contradictory pattern, not only does not execute, but also a contradictory pattern that develops into an unexpected performance different from the suggested content (for example, SP reach (failure 1) is actually a pseudo-continuation (success ) may be included.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an effect configuration example in the case where a plurality of suggestive effects are performed within one variation in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70(1), the gaming machine 10 performs a suggestive effect 1 (success) for the effect structure within one variation, performs a forewarning effect suggested by the suggestive effect 1 (success), and performs a suggestive effect. 1 (
After performing the performance of the suggestion performance 1 (success), the specific performance is performed. In this way, the game machine 10 has a plurality of suggestive effects 1 within one variation.
(Suggestion effect of the same effect content) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(2), the gaming machine 10 sets the effect configuration within one variation to the suggested effect 1
Perform the production of (success), perform the advance notice production suggested by suggestion production 1 (success), carry out the production of suggestion production 2 (success), perform the announcement production suggested by suggestion production 2 (success), and then perform the specific production. It is a production composition that performs In this way, the gaming machine 10 provides a suggestive effect 1 within one variation.
and suggestive effect 2 (a suggestive effect of different effect contents) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(3), the gaming machine 10 sets the effect configuration within one variation to the suggested effect 1
(Failure 2) effect is performed, suggestive effect 2 (success) effect is performed, and after performing the advance notice effect suggested by the suggestive effect 2 (success), the specific effect is performed. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may perform the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 (suggestive effect with different effect contents) within one variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the gaming machine 10 sets the effect configuration within one variation to the suggested effect 1
Perform the production of (failure 2), perform the production of suggestive production 2 (success), perform the advance notice production suggested by suggestive production 2 (success), perform the production of suggestive production 1 (success), and perform the production of suggestive production 1 (
After performing the advance notice effect suggested in (success), the effect configuration is such that the specific effect is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform a plurality of suggestive effects 1 and suggestive effects 2 within one variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(5), the gaming machine 10 sets the effect configuration within one variation to the suggested effect 1
Perform the production of (Failure 2), perform the production of the suggestive production 2 (success), carry out the advance notice production suggested by the suggestion production 2 (success), carry out the specific production, and perform the specific production after carrying out the advance notice production. Configuration. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may perform the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 (suggestive effect with different effect contents) within one variation. Also, the game machine 10 may perform the advance notice effect without going through the suggestive effects 1 and 2 in this manner. note that,
Instead of performing a specific effect and performing a specific effect after performing a notice effect,
The gaming machine 10 can also perform a notice effect during the specific effect (as part of the specific effect). Also, the game machine 10 may be configured to perform the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 during the specific effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(6), the gaming machine 10 sets the effect configuration within one variation to the suggested effect 1
(Success) production, the advance notice production suggested by Suggestion production 1 (Success), the production of Suggestion production 2 (Failure 1), and the specific production suggested by Suggestion production 2 (Failure 1). and In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may perform the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 (suggestive effect with different effect contents) within one variation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(7), the gaming machine 10 sets the effect configuration within one variation to the suggestive effect 2
Perform the production of (failure 1), perform the specific effect suggested by the suggestive effect 2 (failure 1), perform the advance notice effect, perform the effect of the suggestive effect 1 (success), and the advance notice suggested by the suggestive effect 1 (success). The performance configuration is such that a specific performance is performed after the performance is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10
, suggestive effect 1 and suggestive effect 2 (suggestive effect of different effect contents) may be performed within one variation. Also, the game machine 10 may perform the advance notice effect without going through the suggestive effects 1 and 2 in this way.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine 10 can execute suggestive effects of two effects has been described. Production can be configured to be executable.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may be configured so that one suggestive effect can be executed in parallel with another suggestive effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 can make the suggestion of the advance notice effect more clear by performing a plurality of suggestion effects at the same time, thereby making the game easier for the player to understand.

Note that, in one aspect, the suggestive effect can be regarded as a suggestive effect suggesting a change in the execution expectation level of the pseudo-continuation (notice effect). That is, the suggestive effect is that the success of the success/failure effect has increased the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous occurrence (for example, from the execution expectation of 0% to the execution expectation of 90
% (success rate excluding fakes)), and the failure of the success/failure effect does not increase the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous occurrence (for example, the execution expectation remains 0% and does not change)
It can be regarded as a production that suggests. In this case, the initial execution expectation is set to 0%.
Other (for example, 20%) may be used.

[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In Modified Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include a plurality of success patterns in the suggestive content of each suggestive effect. Figure 71 shows
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect of modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG.

FIG. 71 shows an example of the effect content and the suggestive content of the suggestive effect in which the notice content is a pseudo-continuous effect (announcement effect). Suggestive effect 1 and suggestive effect 2
There is

The performance content of the suggestive performance 1 is a pseudo-continuous stimulus performance. Suggestion contents of suggestion production 1 include four: success 1 (normal), success 2 (resurrection), failure 1 (SP reach), and failure 2 (no development). Suggestion content (success 1, success 2) is suggestion content suggested by the success of success/failure effect (success of temporary stop of pseudo consecutive symbols). Suggestion content (failure 1, failure 2) is suggestion content suggested by failure of success/failure effect (failure of temporary stop of pseudo-continuous symbol). Note that success 1 (normal) is
This is an aspect suggesting that the aspect shown in the fifth embodiment develops into a pseudo-continuous effect. ) is suggested (resurrection mode).

Suggestion effect 1 derives the suggestion of success (success 1, success 2) at a rate of 50%, and derives the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the suggestion production 1 derives the suggestion of success 1 at a rate of 45%, the suggestion of success 2 at a rate of 5%, the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 25%, A 25% chance of deriving failure 2 suggestions.

In this way, in the suggestive effect 1, the gaming machine 10 provides four suggested contents (success 1
, success 2, failure 1, failure 2).
The effect content of the suggestive effect 2 is a roulette effect. Suggestion contents of suggestion production 2 include success 1 (normal), success 2 (resurrection), failure 1 (SP reach), failure 2 (no development), failure 3 (
full rotation). Suggestion content (success 1, success 2) is suggestion content suggested by the success of the success/failure presentation (success in selecting the pseudo-continuous option). Suggestions (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3
) is a suggestive content suggested by a failure in success/failure presentation (failure in selecting a pseudo-continuous option). Note that success 1 (normal) is a mode suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect develops according to the mode shown in the fifth embodiment, and success 2 (resurrection) is a mode in which success is displayed after the mode of failure is once displayed. This is a suggestive mode (resurrection mode).

Suggestion production 2 derives a suggestion of success (success 1, success 2) at a rate of 30%, and derives a suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2, failure 3) at a rate of 70%. More specifically, the suggestion production 2 is
25% derive suggestions for success 1, 5% derive suggestions for success 2, 30% derive suggestions for failure 1, and 30% derive suggestions for failure 2. and derive failure 3 suggestions at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in the suggestive effect 2, the gaming machine 10 provides five suggested contents (success 1
, success 2, failure 1, failure 2, failure 3).
In this way, by including a plurality of success patterns in the suggestive content of the suggestive effect, the gaming machine 10 can increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game. Note that the gaming machine 10 can also include in the suggestion content a failure pattern in which failure is suggested after displaying success once.
Also, the gaming machine 10 may be configured such that only one of the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 includes the suggestive content of success (resurrection).

[Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In Modified Example 2 of the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include two or more effect modes (plurality of patterns) in the suggestive effect of each effect content. Although the suggestive effect 1 will be described below as a representative example, the suggestive effect 2 can be similarly applied. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestive effect of Modified Example 2 of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 72 shows a suggestive effect 1 in which the content of the notice is a pseudo-continuous effect and the content of the effect is a pseudo-continuous agitation effect.
2 shows an example of the derivation ratio of each suggested content for each effect mode.
There are two different presentation modes, pattern 1 and pattern 2, for the suggestive presentation 1 mode (drawing mode). For example, pattern 1 is a pattern in which a weak character (a pig-like character) appears as a character, and pattern 2 is a pattern in which a strong character (a tiger-like character) appears.

Suggestion production 1 of pattern 1 mode derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 50% and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the suggestion production 1 whose mode is pattern 1 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 50% and the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 25%,
A 25% chance of deriving failure 2 suggestions.

Suggestion production 1 of pattern 2 mode derives a suggestion of success at a rate of 70% and a suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) at a rate of 30%. More specifically, the suggestion production 1 whose aspect is pattern 2 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 70%, and the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 20%,
10% of the time we derive failure 2 suggestions.

In this way, the suggestive effect of one effect content can be executed in a plurality of modes, and by varying the derivation ratio of the suggested content in each mode, the game machine 10 increases the variation of the effect,
It can improve the interest of the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may also vary suggestive content that can be derived in the suggestive effects of each mode. In addition, two different aspects are examples and are not limited to this. There may be three or more different modes.

Next, an example of the rate of falsehoods included in the success of each mode will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 7
3 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.
Suggestive production 1 of pattern 1 mode includes 5% fakes in success (execution expectation is 95%). That is, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect) at a rate of 95% after the success of the suggestive effect 1 of the mode of the pattern 1, and does not actually execute the notice effect at a rate of 5%. . That is, the suggestive effect 1 of the mode of the pattern 1 is an effect suggesting the execution expectation degree of the pseudo-continuous effect of 95% by the success of the success/failure effect.

Suggestive production 1 of pattern 2 mode includes 10% fakes in success (execution expectation is 90%). That is, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect) at a rate of 90% after the success of the suggestive effect 1 of the mode of the pattern 2, and does not actually execute the notice effect at a rate of 10%. . That is, the suggestive effect 1 of the mode of the pattern 2 is an effect suggesting that the execution expectation degree of the pseudo-continuous effect is 90% due to the success of the success/failure effect.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can vary the ratio of falsehoods (contradictory patterns) to be included in the success depending on the mode. As a result, the gaming machine 10 increases the variation of effects,
It can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In Modified Example 3 of the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 varies the derivation ratio of each suggestive content according to the number of executions within one variation. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestive effect of Modified Example 3 of the fifth embodiment. Although the suggestive effect 1 will be described below as a representative example, the suggestive effect 2 can be similarly applied.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the derivation ratio of each suggestive content for each number of executions of the suggestive effect 1 whose advance notice content is a pseudo-continuous effect.
Suggestive production 1 is configured such that the derivation ratio of each suggestive content differs according to the number of executions within one variation. In the first suggestion production 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 50%, and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) is derived at a rate of 50%. More specifically, in the first suggestion production 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 50%, the suggestion of failure 1 is derived at a rate of 25%, and the suggestion of failure 2 is derived at a rate of 25%. do.

In the second suggestion production 1, the suggestion of success is derived at a rate of 40%, and the suggestion of failure (failure 1, failure 2) is derived at a rate of 60%. More specifically, the second suggestion production 1 derives the suggestion of success at a rate of 40%, the suggestion of failure 1 at a rate of 30%, and the suggestion of failure 2 at a rate of 30%.
We derive the suggestion of

In this way, by varying the derivation ratio according to the number of executions within one variation, the gaming machine 1
0 can increase the variation of effects and improve the interest of the game. Note that the gaming machine 10 may also vary the suggestive contents that can be derived in the suggestive effects of each number of executions. It should be noted that the success rate of the first suggestive effect 1 is not limited to being higher than the success rate of the second suggestive effect 1, and the success rate of the first suggestive effect 1 is higher than the success rate of the second suggestive effect 1. can also be lower.

Next, an example of the percentage of false rumors included in the success of the suggestive effect for each number of executions will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

The first suggestive effect 1 includes 5% falsehoods in success (assuming the execution expectation is 95%). That is, the gaming machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect) at a rate of 95% after the success of the first suggestive effect 1, and does not actually execute the notice effect at a rate of 5%. In other words, the first suggestive effect 1 is a effect that suggests the execution expectation degree of the pseudo-continuous effect of 95% due to the success of the success/failure effect.

The second suggestive effect 1 includes 10% falsehoods in success (assuming the execution expectation is 90%). That is, the game machine 10 actually executes the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect) at a rate of 90% after the success of the second suggestive effect 1, and does not actually execute the notice effect at a rate of 10%. In other words, the second suggestive effect 1 is a effect that suggests the execution expectation degree of the pseudo-continuous effect of 90% due to the success of the success/failure effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can vary the percentage of falsehoods (contradictory patterns) included in success according to the number of executions. As a result, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of effects and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is not limited to making the ratio of cheats in the first suggestive effect 1 lower than the ratio of cheats in the second suggestive effect 1. It may be higher than the proportion of gase. Alternatively, only one of them may contain a fake.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may change the derivation ratio of each suggestion content of the second suggestion performance 1 and the ratio of false rumors included in the success depending on whether the first suggestion performance is successful or unsuccessful. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 only when the first suggestive effect succeeds or only when the first suggestive effect fails, the ratio of derivation of each suggested content of the second suggestive effect 1 and the ratio of fakes included in the success. may be different from the derivation ratio of each suggestion content in the first suggestion production 1 or the ratio of fakes included in the success.

[Modification 4 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can execute a suggestive effect (suggestive effect that foretells the execution of the prefetched advance notice effect) in which the notice content is a prefetch notice effect (prediction effect). FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the suggestive effect of Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 76 shows an example of suggested content of suggestive effect (suggestive effect that foretells execution of prefetched advance notice effect) whose notice content is prefetch notice effect (advance notice effect). The pre-reading notice effect is a effect of changing the display mode of the pending icon or pending completion icon according to the result derived by the variable display game corresponding to the icon (suspended icon or pending completion icon). Suggestive performances in which the content of the notice is a pre-reading notice performance include a suggestive performance 1 and a suggestive performance 2 having different performance contents.

Suggestion contents of the suggestion performance 1 include two of success suggested by the success of the success/failure presentation and failure suggested by the failure of the success/failure presentation. Suggestion production 1 derives a 50% rate (probability) of a suggestion of success (suggesting that it will develop into a pre-reading notice production), and a 50% rate (probability) of suggesting failure (developing into a pre-reading notice production). suggest not).

Suggestion contents of the suggestion production 2 include two of success and failure. Suggestion production 2 derives a suggestion of success (suggesting that it will develop into a pre-reading notice production) at a rate of 60% (probability), and a suggestion of failure (developing into a pre-reading notice production) at a rate of 40% (probability). suggest not).

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform a suggestive effect of a plurality of effect contents not only in the pseudo-continuous effect but also in the pre-reading advance notice effect. It should be noted that the suggested content and the ratio of derivation, etc. described above are merely examples, and are not limited to these. For example, the game machine 10 can execute the suggestive effect of each effect content in a plurality of effect modes even in the pre-reading advance notice effect, or include a plurality of success patterns and a plurality of failure patterns in the suggestive content. can.

Further, the advance notice content of the suggestive effect is not limited to the pre-reading notice effect or the pseudo-continuous effect, and may be a suggestive effect having other effect as the notice content.
The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that since the variation of suggestive effects is scarce, the effects may become monotonous and the interest may not be sufficiently improved. The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the fifth embodiment has the effect of improving the amusement of the game.

(1) The gaming machine 10 has a notice effect means (production control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading notice effect, etc.), and a success of the success/failure effect suggests execution of the notice effect. Suggestion effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pseudo-ream effect, roulette effect, etc.), and specific effect (for example, SP reach) that directs the derivation process of the game result. A specific production means (production control device 300) is included. The suggestive effect means produces a first success/failure effect (for example, a success/failure effect of temporarily stopping a pseudo-ream pattern in a pseudo-reenacting effect) or a second success/failure effect (for example, a success/failure effect of selecting a pseudo-ream option in a roulette effect). The first probability that is executable and is the success probability (derived ratio) of the first success/failure effect is different from the second probability that is the success probability (derived ratio) of the second success/failure effect.

(2) The specific effect means of (1) executes the specific effect when the second success/failure effect fails rather than the third probability, which is the execution probability of executing the specific effect when the first success/failure effect fails. A fourth probability, which is a probability, is increased.

(3) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (production control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading notice effect, etc.) for predicting the result of the game, and a notice effect by the success or failure of the success/failure effect. Suggestion effect means ( For example, a specific production means (production control device 3
00) and The suggestive effect means produces a first success/failure effect (for example, a success/failure effect of temporarily stopping a pseudo-ream pattern in a pseudo-reenacting effect) or a second success/failure effect (for example, a success/failure effect of selecting a pseudo-ream option in a roulette effect). It is feasible, and the success probability of the first success/failure effect (
The first probability that is the derivation rate) is different from the second probability that is the success probability (derivation rate) of the second success/failure effect.

(4) The specific effect means of (3) executes the specific effect when the second success/failure effect fails rather than the third probability, which is the execution probability of executing the specific effect when the first success/failure effect fails. A fourth probability, which is a probability, is increased.

(5) The suggesting performance means of (3) changes the degree of expectation for execution of the advance notice performance before and after the success/failure performance upon success of the success/failure performance, and does not change the execution expectation degree of the notice performance before and after the success/failure performance upon failure of the success/failure performance.

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a notice effect means (production control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading notice effect, etc.) and a suggestive effect (for example, Suggestion effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo-relentless effect, roulette effect, etc.). The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect according to the success or failure of the suggestion effect, and as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect 2 suggestive effects (for example, the success/failure effect of selecting a pseudo-continuous option in a roulette effect) can be executed, and the first probability that is the success probability (derivation ratio) of the first suggestive effect and the success probability of the second suggestive effect (derivation ratio) is different from the second probability.

(7) The gaming machine 10 of (6) includes a specific effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, SP reach) that directs the derivation process of the game result, and the specific effect means is The second
A fourth probability, which is an execution probability of executing a specific performance when the suggestive performance fails, is increased.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to fifth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of the sixth embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment further enhances interest in suggestive effects suggesting execution of advance notice effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and pending change effects. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment realizes the diversification of expectations for suggestive effects felt by experienced players, and improves the interest in games.

The gaming machine 10 can execute a notice effect in a variable display game. The notice effect is a result that the variable display game derives and a effect mode that predicts the derivation process of the result. It can take various production modes.

The results derived from the variable display game include hits, losses, and the magnitude of value at the time of hits. Wins include big wins and small wins. The size of the value at the time of winning is the size of the game value that the player can obtain in one aspect, and includes the number of prize balls that can be obtained, the number of rounds that can be won, and the large winning opening to be opened (large winning opening 1 or Including the big prize gate 2), the presence or absence of probability fluctuations, the presence or absence of general electricity support, the presence or absence of opportunities to acquire probability fluctuations and general electricity support, etc. The derivation process of the result derived by the variable display game is
There are the size of fluctuation time, the presence or absence and type of reach, the presence or absence of development of reach, the type of development reach, and the like.

In addition, the game machine 10 can execute the suggestive effect prior to the advance notice effect. The suggestive effect is a effect that suggests the presence or absence of a notice effect, and may suggest the presence or absence of a notice effect,
It may also suggest the feasibility of the advance notice effect. The suggestive effect includes a predetermined success/failure effect, and suggests the possibility of execution of the advance notice effect by the success result or failure result derived from the success/failure effect. For example, the suggestive effect suggests execution of the advance notice effect by deriving a success result from the success/failure effect, and suggests non-execution of the notice effect by deriving a failure result from the success/failure effect. Note that the suggestive effect may suggest the feasibility of the advance notice effect by preparing a plurality of modes of success/failure effect or failure effect. For example, the suggestive effect suggests the sure execution of the advance notice effect by deriving a success result in which the success or failure effect is a great success, and the success result in which the success/failure effect is simply a success. It may also suggest execution.
In addition, the suggestive effect suggests the definite non-execution of the notice effect by deriving the failure result that the success or failure effect is a big failure, and the non-execution of the notice effect by deriving the failure result that the success or failure effect is a regrettable failure. It may also suggest execution of a slight advance notice effect while suggesting. Note that the suggestive effect may suggest not only the feasibility of the advance notice effect but also the result of the notice effect by preparing a plurality of modes of success/failure effect or failure effect. For example, the suggestive effect suggests the reliable execution of the notice effect by deriving the success result that the success or failure effect is a great success, and the derivation result and derivation process of the variable display game predicted by the notice effect precedes the notice effect. may be suggested by In addition, the success pattern of the suggestive production (successful production that derives the success of the success/failure production) and the failure pattern (failure production that derives the failure of the success/failure production) are the same production (common production) or a different production. In addition, a plurality of success patterns (same for failure patterns) of suggestive production may be prepared, and one success pattern and another success pattern may be the same production,
A different production may be used. Also, one success pattern and another success pattern may be given the same effect until the middle, and the effect of the result derivation part may be changed.

Also, the gaming machine 10 can execute a specific effect in parallel with the suggestive effect. Execution of the suggestive effect and the specific effect in parallel means that the execution period of the suggestive effect and the execution period of the specific effect overlap.

The specific effect is a effect that can be executed in parallel with the suggestive effect. Also, the specific effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the advance notice effect is executed. For example, specific effects include timer effects, SP reach effects, and the like.

First, the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 1). FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 2). FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 3). FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command of the sixth embodiment (No. 4).

The game machine 10 can execute a combination of a suggestive effect, a notice effect, and a specific effect as the effect pattern. First, representative production patterns will be described. Effect pattern A1 shown in FIG. 77 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed, for example, in one variation display game called n-th variation. In the performance pattern A1, the suggestive performance is executed without executing the specific performance in parallel, the success result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and the advance notice performance is executed. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the notice performance are coordinated by performing the notice performance after the suggestion performance succeeds. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve interest more than the single execution of the notice effect.

Effect pattern A2 shown in FIG. 77 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed, for example, during one variation display game called nth variation. In the performance pattern A2, the suggestive performance is executed without executing the specific performance in parallel, and the advance notice performance is executed in spite of deriving a failure result in the success/failure performance in the suggestive performance. Although the effect pattern A2 can give the player a great sense of surprise, frequent appearance is not desirable from the viewpoint of consistency of the game effect. Therefore, the effect pattern A2 may be a rare effect that is almost never selected, or may be an effect that is not selected in the first place, including that it is not prepared in advance. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the notice performance are coordinated by performing the advance notice performance through the failure of the suggestion performance. As a result, the gaming machine 10
Interest can be improved more than the independent execution of the advance notice effect.

Effect pattern A3 shown in FIG. 77 is executed based on a predetermined variation display command, and is executed, for example, in one variation display game called n-th variation. In the performance pattern A3, the suggestive performance is executed without executing the specific performance in parallel, the failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and the advance notice performance is not executed. The effect pattern A3 gives the player a feeling of disappointment, but it is prepared from the viewpoint of the consistency of the game effect. The gaming machine 10
Although the advance notice effect is not performed due to the failure of the suggestive effect, it is possible to produce a sense of expectation for the execution of the advance notice effect through the success of the suggestive effect.

Effect pattern B1 shown in FIG. 77 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, during one variable display game called n-th variation. In the production pattern B1, the suggestive effect is executed while executing the specific effect in parallel, and the success result is derived in the success/failure effect in the suggestive effect, and the advance notice effect is executed. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the notice performance are coordinated by performing the notice performance after the suggestion performance succeeds. In addition, the game machine 10 executes the suggestive effect and the specific effect in parallel, thereby changing the suggestion by the suggestive effect and diversifying the suggestive contents that the player perceives.
As a result, the game machine 10 can improve interest by means of suggestive effects depending on the presence or absence of parallel execution with the specific effects.

Effect pattern B2 shown in FIG. 77 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, in one variable display game called n-th variation. In the performance pattern B2, the suggestive performance is executed while the specific performance is executed in parallel, and the advance notice performance is executed even though the success/failure performance in the suggestive performance has led to a failure result. Although the effect pattern B2 can give the player a great sense of surprise, frequent appearance is not desirable from the viewpoint of consistency of the game effect. Therefore, the effect pattern B2 may be a rare effect that is almost never selected, or may be an effect that is not selected in the first place, including that it is not prepared in advance. The game machine 10 can perform a game performance in which the suggestion performance and the notice performance are coordinated by performing the advance notice performance through the failure of the suggestion performance. In addition, the game machine 10 executes the suggestive effect and the specific effect in parallel, thereby changing the suggestion by the suggestive effect and diversifying the suggestive contents that the player perceives. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve interest by means of suggestive effects depending on the presence or absence of parallel execution with the specific effects.

Effect pattern B3 shown in FIG. 77 is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, during one variable display game called n-th variation. In the performance pattern B3, the suggestive performance is executed while executing the specific performance in parallel, the failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and the advance notice performance is not executed. Although the effect pattern B3 gives the player a feeling of disappointment, it is prepared from the viewpoint of the consistency of the game effect. The game machine 10 does not perform the advance notice performance due to the failure of the suggestion performance, but can produce a sense of expectation for the execution of the notice performance through the success of the suggestion performance. In addition, the game machine 10 executes the suggestive effect and the specific effect in parallel, thereby changing the suggestion by the suggestive effect and diversifying the suggestive contents that the player perceives. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve interest by means of suggestive effects depending on the presence or absence of parallel execution with the specific effects.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 does not limit the specific effect to only one mode, and can select and execute one mode from two or more modes. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a specific effect A and a specific effect B
and can be executed by selecting More specifically, the gaming machine 10 can execute a timer effect (long) with a large timer value as the specific effect A and a timer effect (short) with a small timer value as the specific effect B.

Effect patterns B10, B11, B20, B21, B30, and B31 shown in FIG. 78 are executed based on a predetermined variation display command.
Runs out of one variable display game. In the performance pattern B10, the suggestive performance is executed while executing the specific performance A in parallel, the success result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and the advance notice performance is executed. In the performance pattern B11, the suggestive performance is executed while executing the specific performance B in parallel, the success result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and the advance notice performance is executed. In the performance pattern B20, the suggestive performance is executed while executing the specific performance A in parallel, and the advance notice performance is executed even though the failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance. In the performance pattern B21, the suggestive performance is executed while executing the specific performance B in parallel, and the advance notice performance is executed even though the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance has led to a failure result. The performance pattern B30 executes the suggestive performance while executing the specific performance A in parallel, derives a failure result in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and does not execute the advance notice performance. Production pattern B31 is
In parallel, a suggestive performance is executed while executing a specific performance B, a failure result is derived in the success/failure performance of the suggestive performance, and the advance notice performance is not executed.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 determines not only whether there is a specific effect parallel to the suggestive effect, but also whether the specific effect parallel to the suggestive effect is the specific effect A or the specific effect B. , the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect based on the result of the success/failure effect. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve interest by not only the presence or absence of parallel execution with the specific effect but also the suggestive effect according to the type of the specific effect.

Also, the game machine 10 may prepare an effect pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed without the specific effect or the suggestive effect, like the effect pattern C shown in FIG. Effect pattern C is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, and is executed, for example, during one variable display game called n-th variation. A game machine 10 prepares a performance pattern for carrying out a notice performance without a specific performance or a suggestive performance, thereby changing expectations and reliability of the notice performance and diversifying the contents of the notice perceived by the player. can be done.

Also, the game machine 10 may prepare an effect pattern in which the notice effect is performed in parallel with the specific effect without the suggestive effect, like the effect pattern D shown in FIG. Effect pattern D is executed based on a predetermined variable display command.
It is executed in one variation display game called n-th variation. The game machine 10 prepares a performance pattern in which the notice performance is performed in parallel with the specific performance without suggestive performance, thereby changing the expectation and reliability of the notice performance and diversifying the notice contents that the player perceives. can do.

In addition, the game machine 10 executes the suggestive effect in parallel while executing the specific effect as in the effect patterns E and F shown in FIG. can be anything. In addition, when the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one variation display game, for example, the n-th variation, the specific effect is n
It may be executed across the change of times. Further, the specific effect, like the effect pattern E, may not be executed in parallel with the suggestive effect in the n-th variation nor in parallel with the advance notice effect. Further, the specific effect, like effect pattern F, may be executed in parallel with the suggestive effect in the n-th variation, and may be executed in parallel with at least a part of the advance notice effect. Note that the effect patterns E and F are executed based on a predetermined variable display command, but may be irrelevant to the start timing of the specific effect. again,
The variable display command related to the execution of the effect patterns E and F may be related to the end of the specific effect. The game machine 10 makes it possible to execute the specific performance before receiving the variable display command related to the execution of the suggestive performance, so that the execution of the specific performance itself can produce a sense of anticipation of the notice performance, and the contents of the notice that the player can perceive. You can diversify.

In addition, the game machine 10 executes a suggestive effect in parallel while executing a specific effect, as in the effect pattern G shown in FIG. There may be. In addition, when the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one variation display game, for example, the n-th variation, the specific effect is (n+1) after the n-th variation
)-th variation and may continue after the (n+1)-th variation. Although the effect pattern G is executed based on a predetermined variable display command, it may be related to the start of the specific effect or may not be related to the start of the specific effect. . If the effect pattern G does not relate to the start time of the specific effect, the gaming machine 10 can determine the start time of the specific effect by RTC or other event triggers. The game machine 10 makes it possible to execute the specific performance even after receiving the variable display command related to the execution of the suggestive performance, so that the expectation of the further notice performance can be produced in the execution of the specific performance, and the notice contents that the player can perceive. can be diversified.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may set various start times and end times in relation to suggestive effects and advance notice effects, such as effect patterns B4, B5, B6, and B7 shown in FIG. For example, the specific effect in the effect pattern B4 sets the start time and end time within the same change display game when the suggestive effect and the notice effect are executed in one change display game of the n-th change. Further, the specific effect in the effect pattern B5 sets the start time before the (n-1)th change when the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one variation display game of the nth change. , set the terminal to the n-th variation. Further, the specific effect in the effect pattern B6 is such that when the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one variation display game of the n-th variation, the start period is set to the n-th variation, and the (n+1)th variation is performed. Set the telophase after the change. Further, the specific effect in the effect pattern B7 is set to start before the (n−1)th change when the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in one variation display game of the nth change. , set the final period after the (n+1)th change.

In this way, the game machine 10 sets the start time and end time to a timing that is not related to the reception of the variable display command related to the execution of the suggestive effect, and makes it possible to execute the specific effect. A sense of anticipation can be produced, and the contents of the notice that the player can perceive can be diversified.

Next, an example of the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the presence or absence of the specific effect and the success or failure of the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect according to the sixth embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 81(1) will be described. The gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect (announcement effect) through a successful effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate (probability) of 25%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect without a failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 25%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 45% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 5%, no pseudo-continuous effect after a failed effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestive effect at an execution ratio of 50% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution ratio (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 81(2). The pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance through the failure performance in the suggestive performance is executed at a rate of 0%, and the pseudo-continuous performance without the failure performance in the suggestive performance is executed at an execution rate of 50%.

Then, in the case of parallel execution with the specific effect such as the notice execution ratio (with the specific effect) shown in FIG. Execute the production, execute the pseudo-continuous production through the failure production in the suggested production at a rate of 0%,
At an execution rate of 10%, no pseudo-continuous effect is executed after a failure effect in the suggestive effect.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution ratio to 50% for the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through the successful effect in the suggestive effect when the suggestive effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel, and when the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel. 90% execution rate. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the success ratio of the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect higher than the success ratio of the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect. In other words, the gaming machine 10 makes the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is higher than the execution ratio of the notice effect when the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect is passed. also increase.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes expectations and reliability of the notice performance according to whether the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, and diversifies the contents of the notice perceived by the player. can be done.

Next, another example of the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the presence or absence of the specific effect and the success or failure of the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing another example (part 1) of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 82(1) will be described. The gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect (announcement effect) through a successful effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate (probability) of 25%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect without a failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 25%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 50% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 0%, no pseudo-continuous effect after a failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestive effect at an execution ratio of 50% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution ratio (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 82(2). The pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance through the failure performance in the suggestive performance is executed at a rate of 0%, and the pseudo-continuous performance without the failure performance in the suggestive performance is executed at an execution rate of 50%.

Then, the gaming machine 10, like the notice execution ratio (with specific effect) shown in FIG. 82 (3),
In the case of parallel execution with a specific effect, a pseudo-continuous effect through a successful effect in the suggestive effect is executed at an execution rate of 100%, a pseudo-continuous effect through a failed effect in the suggestive effect is executed at a rate of 0%, and 0 Executes no pseudo-continuous effect through failure effect in suggestive effect at the execution rate of %.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution ratio to 50% for the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through the successful effect in the suggestive effect when the suggestive effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel, and when the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel. 100% execution rate. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the success ratio of the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect higher than the success ratio of the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect. In other words, the gaming machine 10 makes the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is higher than the execution ratio of the notice effect when the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect is passed. also increase. In particular, the gaming machine 10
makes the execution of the advance notice effect definite for the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes expectations and reliability of the notice performance according to whether the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, and diversifies the contents of the notice perceived by the player. can be done.

Next, another example of the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the presence or absence of the specific effect and the success or failure of the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing another example (part 2) of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 83(1) will be described. The gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect (announcement effect) through a successful effect in a suggestive effect without parallel execution with a specific effect at a rate (probability) of 29%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 1% after a failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 performs no pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 35% through a failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 20% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 5% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 10%, no pseudo-continuous effect after a failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the specific effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10, when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution ratio (no specific effect) shown in FIG. The pseudo-continuous performance passed through is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance passed through the failure performance in the suggestive performance is executed at a rate of approximately 1%, and the pseudo-continuous performance passed through the failure performance in the suggestive performance is executed at an execution rate of approximately 54%.

Then, the gaming machine 10, like the notice execution ratio (with specific effect) shown in FIG. 83 (3),
In the case of parallel execution with a specific effect, the execution rate is about 57% to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through a successful effect in the suggestive effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through a failed effect in the suggestive effect is executed at a rate of about 14%. , the execution ratio of about 29% is to execute the non-pseudo continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect.

That is, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed the successful effect in the suggestive effect to about 45% when the suggestive effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel, and the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel. In this case, the execution rate is about 57%. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the success ratio of the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect higher than the success ratio of the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect. In other words, the gaming machine 10 makes the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is higher than the execution ratio of the notice effect when the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect is passed. also increase. In particular, game machine 1
0 makes it possible to execute the notice performance with low frequency even when the failure performance is executed in the suggestive performance.

As a result, the game machine 10 changes expectations and reliability of the notice performance according to whether the suggestive performance and the specific performance are executed in parallel, and diversifies the contents of the notice perceived by the player. can be done.

Next, an example of the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the presence/absence and type of the specific effect and the success or failure of the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing another example (part 3) of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 84(1) will be described. The game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect (announcement effect) through a successful effect in a suggestive effect without parallel execution with a specific effect at a rate (probability) of 20%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect without a failure effect in the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect at a rate of 30%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 15% after the success effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (short), which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (short). In addition, the game machine 10 executes a non-simulated continuous effect at a rate of 15% after a failure effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (short). In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 15% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (long), which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 0% after the failure effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (long). In addition, the game machine 10 executes, at a rate of 5%, no pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (long). The timer effect (short) and the timer effect (long) will be described later in detail.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has undergone a successful effect in the suggestive effect at an execution ratio of 40% when there is no parallel execution with the specific effect such as the advance notice execution ratio (no specific effect) shown in FIG. 84(2). Pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and no pseudo-continuous performance is executed after failure performance in suggestive performance at an execution rate of 60%. It should be noted that the execution at a rate of 0% of the pseudo-continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect is omitted from the illustration.

Then, the gaming machine 10, like the notice execution ratio (with timer effect (short)) shown in FIG. A pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect is executed at an execution rate of 50%. In addition, 0% of the pseudo-continuous production through the failure production in the suggestive production
The execution at the ratio of is omitted from the illustration.

Then, the game machine 10, like the notice execution ratio (with timer effect (long)) shown in FIG. A pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect is executed at an execution rate of 25%. It should be noted that the execution at a rate of 0% of the pseudo-continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect is omitted from the illustration.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution ratio to 40% when the suggestive effect and the specific effect are not executed in parallel with respect to the pseudo-continuous effect that has passed through the successful effect in the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect and the timer effect (short) are executed in parallel. The execution ratio is set to 50% when the suggestion performance and the timer performance (long) are executed in parallel, and the execution ratio is set to 75%. In this way, the gaming machine 10
makes the success rate of suggestive effects having a period overlapping with the specific effect higher than the success rate of suggestive effects having no period overlapping with the specific effect. Furthermore, the game machine 10 makes the success ratio of the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (long) higher than the success ratio of the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (short). In other words, the gaming machine 10 makes the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect is higher than the execution ratio of the notice effect when the suggestive effect having no period overlapping the specific effect is passed. also increase. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (long) is performed, and the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (short) is performed. be greater than the execution rate of

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only determines whether or not the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, another example of the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the type of the specific effect and the success or failure of the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing another example (part 4) of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing another example (No. 5) of the execution ratio of the notice effect pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific effect of the sixth embodiment.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 85(1) will be described. In addition, the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect is omitted from the options and the illustration is simplified, but it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 35% after a successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the timer effect (white), which is one form of the specific effect. Also, game machine 1
0 is executed at a rate of 35% without the pseudo-continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the timer effect (white). In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 20% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the timer effect (red), which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 executes, at a rate of 5%, no pseudo-continuous effect through failure effects in the suggestive effects with parallel execution with the timer effects (red). In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 5% after a successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the timer effect (gold), which is one form of the specific effect. Also, game machine 1
0 is executed at a rate of 0% without the pseudo-continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the timer effect (golden color). In addition, timer effect (white) and timer effect (red)
and timer effect (gold) will be described in detail later.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (gold) is set to the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the timer effect (white) or the timer effect (red). Make it larger than the execution ratio of the notice effect when passing through. Also, the gaming machine 10
, the execution ratio of the notice effect when going through the suggested effect with the period overlapping with the timer effect (red) is higher than the execution ratio of the notice effect when going through the suggested effect with the period overlapping with the timer effect (gold) It is made smaller and made larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance when the suggestive performance having a period overlapping with the timer performance (white) is passed.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only determines whether or not the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 85(2) will be described. In addition, the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect is omitted from the options and the illustration is simplified, but it may be included in the options.

The game machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 30% after a successful effect in a suggestive effect with parallel execution with an even-numbered ready-to-win, which is one form of a specific effect (ready-to-win composition pattern effect).
In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 30%, no pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with even-numbered reach. In addition, the game machine 10 performs a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 20% after a successful effect in a suggestive effect in parallel execution with an odd-numbered reach (excluding 7 reach), which is one form of a specific effect (reach-composing pattern effect). Run. Also, game machine 1
0 is executed at a rate of 10% without a pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with an odd reach (excluding 7 reach). In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 9% after a successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the 7-reach, which is one form of the specific effect (reach-composing pattern effect). In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 1%, no pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with 7 reach. The even reach, the odd reach (excluding 7 reach), and the 7 reach will be described later.

That is, the gaming machine 10 changes the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with 7 reach is performed, when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with even reach or odd reach (excluding 7 reach) is performed. to be larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the odd reach (excluding 7 reach) is calculated as follows: and larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance when the suggestion performance having the period overlapping with the even reach is passed.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only determines whether or not the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 86(1) will be described. In addition, the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect is omitted from the options and the illustration is simplified, but it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 10% after a successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the short SP ready-to-win, which is one form of the specific effect. Also, game machine 1
0 is executed at a rate of 60% without the pseudo-continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the short SP reach. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 10% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the long SP reach, which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 executes, at a rate of 20%, no pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect in parallel execution with the long SP reach. Note that the short SP reach and the long SP reach may be distinguished by comparing the size of the performance time, or the long SP reach may be a development reach performed after the short SP reach. . Also, the short SP reach and the long SP reach are one form of two reach with different expectations, and it is not necessarily required that the performance time is different. Instead of the short SP reach and the long SP reach, the SP reach A and the SP reach B having the same performance time but different performance modes and expectations may be used. The degree of expectation may be the degree of expectation for deriving a win, or the degree of expectation for the magnitude of value that can be obtained at the time of a win.

That is, the gaming machine 10 determines the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the long SP reach is performed, from the execution ratio of the notice effect when the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the short SP reach is performed. also increase.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only determines whether or not the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

First, the advance notice execution ratio (overall) shown in FIG. 86(2) will be described. In addition, the suggestive effect without parallel execution with the specific effect is omitted from the options and the illustration is simplified, but it may be included in the options.

The gaming machine 10 executes a pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 2% after a successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display "0", which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the game machine 10 executes the non-simulated continuous effect after the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “0” at a rate of 18%. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 10% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “1”, which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the production stock display "1".
10% of the rate is 10% without the pseudo-continuous effect through the failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 14% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “2”, which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 6%, no pseudo-continuous effect after a failed effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “2”. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 18% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “3”, which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 2%, no pseudo-continuous effect through a failure effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “3”. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes the pseudo-continuous effect at a rate of 20% after the successful effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display "4", which is one form of the specific effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 executes, at a rate of 0%, no pseudo-continuous effect after a failed effect in the suggestive effect with parallel execution with the effect stock display “4”. The effect stock displays "0", "1", [2], "3" and "4" will be described in detail later.

That is, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the effect stock display “4” is performed to the effect stock display “0”, “1”, [2], and “3”. It is made larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with . In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display "3" is performed to the execution ratio of the suggestive effect having a period overlapping with the effect stock display "4". It is made smaller than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance, and is made larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance when the suggestive performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock display "0", "1", [2] is passed. In addition, the game machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the effect stock display "2" is performed to the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the effect stock display "4", "3". is made smaller than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance in the case of going through, and is made larger than the execution ratio of the notice performance in the case of going through the suggestive performance having a period overlapping with the performance stock display ``0'', ``1''. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the execution ratio of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect having the period overlapping with the effect stock display "1" is performed, to the period overlapping with the effect stock display "4", "3", [2]. is made smaller than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance in the case of going through the suggestive performance having , and larger than the execution ratio of the advance notice performance in the case of going through the suggestive performance having the period overlapping with the performance stock display ``0''.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 not only determines whether or not the suggestive effect and the specific effect are executed in parallel, but also changes the expectation and reliability of the advance notice effect according to the form of the specific effect. The content of the notice to be obtained can be diversified.

Next, a pseudo-continuous effect, which is one form of advance notice effect, will be described with reference to FIG. 87 as a display example following the variable display example described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a display example of the pseudo continuous effect of the sixth embodiment.

A display screen 870 shown in FIG. 87(1) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 850, in which the large symbol group 841 is temporarily stopped (for example, the left symbol "1", the middle symbol "3", and the right symbol "1"). )do.
At this time, the display screen 870 guides the continuation of the pseudo-continuation by displaying the pseudo-continuation count display 872 . For example, the display screen 870 is the first temporary stop display, but by displaying "2" in the pseudo-continuous number display 872, the second pseudo-continuous change is announced.

A display screen 871 shown in FIG. 87(2) is a display screen following the display screen 870, and displays the large symbol group 841 again in a variable manner. At this time, the display screen 871 guides the number of continuous pseudo-runs by displaying a pseudo-run count display 872 . For example, the display screen 871 is the second pseudo-continuous variation, but by displaying "2" in the pseudo-continuous number display 872, the number of continuations of the second pseudo-continuous variation is indicated.

A display screen 873 shown in FIG. 87(3) is a display screen following the display screen 871, and temporarily stops the large symbol group 841 (for example, left symbol "2", middle symbol "3", right symbol "2"). )do.
At this time, the display screen 873 gives notice of the third pseudo-continuous variation by displaying “3” in the pseudo-continuous number display 872 .

In the same manner thereafter, the game machine 10 can continue the pseudo-continuous effect while announcing and guiding the number of times of pseudo-continuous. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous continuation count of the pseudo-continuous effect can be set to any number of times according to the effect pattern.

In addition, although the pseudo-continuous effect has been described as one form of the advance notice effect, the notice effect is not limited to the pseudo-continuous effect as long as it has the advance notice effect function. Effects, freeze effects as described in the fourth embodiment, background changes, cut-ins, effects using characters, and the like may be used.

Here, the suggestive effect parallel to the timer effect (specific effect) before reaching the pseudo-continuous effect (notice effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a display example (part 1) of the timer effect of the sixth embodiment.

A display screen 874 shown in FIG. 88(1) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 850 (see FIG. 64), and shows a state in which a pseudo-consecutive effect is being executed as a suggestive effect. The display screen 874 includes a large symbol group 841 , a pseudo-continuous effect display 852 , and a timer effect display 875 in its display contents. The pseudo-continuation-inciting effect display 852 displays a pseudo-consecutive-inciting effect. The timer effect display 875 is a display that guides the start time or end time of a predetermined effect by timer display. For example, the timer effect display 875 indicates that the time until the result derivation in the variable display game is 80
Guidance is given while decrementing the seconds. The display screen 874 displays a tiger-like character and the words "Stop!" The pseudo-continuous fan effect display 852 indicates a state in which the player is asked whether or not the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is to be temporarily stopped, that is, it foretells the possibility that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. This indicates that the In the large symbol group 841, the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped at the left symbol, and the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped at the right symbol.
5” is temporarily stopped. In addition, the large symbol group 841 operates in a manner that is different from the state of pseudo consecutive symbols being changed in medium symbols (the aspect of the display screen 850) and the temporary stop state (for example,
It shows a state in which the player is asked whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is to be temporarily stopped.

A display screen 876 shown in FIG. 88(2) is a display screen after the display screen 874, and is in a state of suggesting the success of the suggestive effect (pseudo-enthusiast effect). state).

Pseudo-Ren fan effect display 852 on the display screen 876 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "Success!!" It suggests that (developing into a pseudo-representation). A timer effect display 875 on the display screen 876 guides that the time until the result derivation in the variable display game progresses to 75.5 seconds. Note that the value displayed by the timer effect display 875 does not necessarily correspond to an accurate time value, and may be a simple counter. Also, the timer effect display 875 does not need to update the value at a constant speed, and may update the value at an inconstant speed. Also, the timer effect display 875 does not require updating the value by one.
It may be updated with a variable value. Further, the timer effect display 875 is not limited to updating the value in the direction of subtraction, but may update the value in the direction of addition, or may update the value while interweaving subtraction and addition.

In the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 876, the left symbol temporarily stops the symbol "3", the right symbol temporarily stops the symbol "5", the middle symbol temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the pseudo-continuous fanning. It suggests that the production led to success. After that, the gaming machine 10 ends the suggestive effect, and executes a pseudo-continuous effect as a notice effect as shown in FIG. 87, for example.

A display screen 877 shown in FIG. 88(3) is a display screen after the display screen 874, and is in a state of suggesting failure of the suggestive effect (pseudo-continuous effect) (suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). state).

In the display screen 877, a pseudo-reaction effect display 852 displays a character like a tiger and the characters "Failed...", and the pseudo-reaction effect (success or failure effect of temporary stop of the pseudo-relation pattern) fails (
This suggests that failure 1 and failure 2) were derived. A timer effect display 875 on the display screen 877 guides that the time until the result derivation in the variable display game progresses to 75.5 seconds.

In the display screen 877, the large symbol group 841 temporarily stops at symbol "3" in the left symbol, temporarily stops at symbol "5" in the right symbol, and displays the symbol in the middle symbol in a fluctuating state, thereby creating a pseudo-continuation. This suggests that the staging leads to failure and does not develop into a pseudo-continuous staging. It should be noted that the failure of the pseudo-reaming effect may also suggest other developments, such as a suggestion that the game will develop into an SP reach or a suggestion that the effect will not develop.

Next, another example of the display mode of the timer effect (specific effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a display example (part 2) of the timer effect of the sixth embodiment. The display mode of the timer effect makes it possible to change the timer value as the initial display mode and the background as the constant display mode.

The timer effect display 875 shown in FIG. 89(1) sets the timer value as the initial display mode to "60
: 00", and the background as a constant display mode is set to white. The timer effect display 875 produces a timer effect as one form of the specific effect. Further, the timer effect display 875 produces a timer effect (white) as one form of the specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to white.

A timer effect display 875a shown in FIG. 89(2) has a timer value of "30:00" as an initial display mode, that is, a timer effect (short), and a white background as a constant display mode. The timer effect display 875a produces a timer effect (short) as one form of the specific effect by displaying a small value as the timer value as the initial display mode.

A timer effect display 875b shown in FIG. 89(3) has a timer value of "90:00" as an initial display mode, that is, a timer effect (long), and a white background as a constant display mode. The timer effect display 875b produces a timer effect (long) as one form of the specific effect by displaying a large value as the timer value as the initial display mode.

A timer effect display 875c shown in FIG. 89(4) has a timer value of "60:00" as an initial display mode and a red background as a constant display mode. Timer effect display 875
In c, a timer effect (red) is produced as one form of the specific effect by making the background red as a constant display mode.

A timer effect display 875d shown in FIG. 89(5) has a timer value of "60:00" as an initial display mode and a gold background as a constant display mode. Timer effect display 875
d produces a timer effect (gold color) as one form of the specific effect by setting the background as a constant display mode to gold.

Note that the timer effect (short) and the timer effect (long), or the timer effect (red) and the timer effect (gold) make the execution ratio of the advance notice effect different, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the waiting time from setting the timer to the start of the countdown (for example, the period during which the state displayed in the seconds part continues) (timer effect (short waiting time) and timer effect (waiting time The execution ratio of the announcement effect may be varied depending on the length)). In addition, the process of setting the timer (for example, whether the count-up speed for counting up from 00:00 to the number of seconds (for example, 60 seconds) set as a timer is fast or slow) (timer performance (Low count-up speed) and Timer effect (High-speed count-up speed)) may vary the execution ratio of the notice effect. Also, the execution ratio of the notice effect may be varied depending on whether the number of timers is large or small (timer effect (small number of timers) or timer effect (large number of timers)). Also, the execution ratio of the notice effect may be varied depending on the size of the timer (timer effect (large timer) and timer effect (small timer)). Also, depending on whether the additional time (replenishment seconds) generated during the countdown of the timer is large or small (timer effect (more additional time) or timer effect (less additional time)), the execution ratio of the notice effect may be changed. .

Next, the display mode of the ready-to-win configuration symbol effect (specific effect) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a display example of temporary stop during reach according to the sixth embodiment. The ready-to-win composition symbol effect is an effect by a symbol combination of symbols constituting a ready-to-win state among the large symbol group 841, for example, a left symbol and a right symbol. Other symbols in the large symbol group 841 that are not related to the ready-to-win configuration, such as medium symbols, may be temporarily stopped or may be in the process of changing with symbol switching.

A display screen 878 shown in FIG. 90(1) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 64), and is a display screen for carrying out ready-to-win composition symbol effects as one form of specific effects. The display screen 878 displays "2" for each of the left and right symbols constituting the ready-to-win state among the large symbol group 841, and displays "3" for the medium-to-one symbol that is not related to the ready-to-win composition. display screen 878
is an example of an even reach in which the left and right symbols each display an even number.

A display screen 879 shown in FIG. 90(2) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 64), and is a display screen for carrying out ready-to-win composition symbol effects as one form of specific effects. The display screen 879 displays "5" for each of the left and right symbols constituting the ready-to-win state among the large symbol group 841, and displays "3" for the medium-to-one symbol that is not related to the ready-to-win composition. display screen 879
is an example of odd reach (excluding 7 reach) in which the left and right symbols each display an odd number.

A display screen 880 shown in FIG. 90(3) is, for example, a display screen after the display screen 850 (see FIG. 64), and is a display screen for carrying out ready-to-win composition symbol effects as one form of specific effects. The display screen 880 displays "7" for each of the left and right symbols constituting the ready-to-win state among the large symbol group 841, and displays "3" for the medium-to-one symbol that is not related to the ready-to-win composition. Display screen 880
is an example of 7 reach, in which the left and right symbols each display an odd number.

Note that even-numbered reach, odd-numbered reach (excluding 7 reach), and 7 reach in the ready-to-win configuration symbol effect are examples of categories in the ready-to-win configuration symbol effect. The division in the ready-to-win configuration pattern effect can be any division. Of course, if the patterns that make up the large pattern group 841 are not based on numbers, or even if they include letters, they can be classified based on characters, backgrounds, colors, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, description will be given of a pending change inciting effect (suggestive effect) in parallel with the SP ready-to-win effect (specific effect) before reaching the pending change effect (notice effect). FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a display example of the SP ready-to-win effect of the sixth embodiment.

A display screen 881 shown in FIG. 91(1) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 850 (see FIG. 64), and shows a state in which a pending change swaying effect is being executed as a suggestive effect. The display screen 881 is
The display contents include a large pattern group 882, a ready-to-win effect display 883, and a pending change swaying effect display 884. - 特許庁The large pattern group 882 is the large pattern group 841 displayed in the center of the display screen 850.
This is a pattern group display in which the size of is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner. In the large symbol group 882, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach are temporarily stopped and displayed as "7", and the middle symbol, which is not related to the reach structure, is variably displayed with symbol switching.

The reach effect display 883 is one form of specific effect. While the large pattern group 882 constitutes and displays the ready-to-win, the ready-to-win effect display 883 produces the ready-to-win by displaying characters and the like. For example, the ready-to-win effect display 883 directs the process of deriving a win through a match between a lion-like character and a tiger-like character.

The pending change inciting effect display 884 is one form of suggestive effect. Pending change prompting effect display 88
4 performs an action display in which a character such as a pig works on the pending digestion display 846 .
For example, a pig-like character urges the change of the pending digestion icon by tapping the pending digestion icon displayed by the pending digestion display 846 .

A display screen 885 shown in FIG. 91(2) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 881, and shows a state in which the execution result of the pending change inciting effect is displayed as the suggestive effect. A pending change prompt effect display 884 on the display screen 885 shows that the pending digestion display 846 has been successfully acted upon by a pig-like character, and the pending digestion icon has changed. For example, the pending redemption icon changes from white to red to indicate that the expectation of winning derivation has changed (increased). A pending change prompt effect display 884 on the display screen 885 shows how a pig-like character is pleased with the change of the pending digestion icon.

A display screen 886 shown in FIG. 91(3) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 881, and shows a state in which the execution result of the pending change inciting effect as the suggestive effect is displayed. A pending change prompt effect display 884 on the display screen 886 shows a state in which the pig-like character failed to act on the pending digestion display 846 and the pending digestion icon did not change. For example, the pending redemption icon remains white indicating no change in the expectation of winning derivation. display screen 88
6 shows a character like a pig exiting in response to the fact that the pending digestion icon has not changed.

It should be noted that the pending change inciting effect can be used instead of the pending digestion display 846 or the pending digestion display 84
In addition to 6, the suspension display 845 may perform an effect that encourages the suspension change.
In addition, the pending digestion icon displayed by the pending digestion display 846 and the pending standby icon displayed by the pending display 845 are not limited to white and red, but may be blue, yellow, rainbow colors, etc., depending on the degree of expectation and reliability. can do. In addition, the change in the display mode of the pending digestion icon and the pending standby icon is not limited to color, and can be a display mode consisting of shape, operation, size, or a combination thereof according to the degree of expectation and reliability.

In addition, the pending change inciting effect not only produces expectations and reliability from changes in the display mode of the pending digestion icon and the pending standby icon, but also an action display that works on the pending digestion icon and the pending standby icon (for example, like a pig The degree of expectation and reliability may be produced by displaying the actions of a character). For example, the pending change prompt effect can produce expectations and reliability by displaying the action of a pig-like character that is displayed along with the change in the display mode of the pending digestion icon and the pending standby icon. More specifically, the degree of expectation and the degree of reliability may be produced by the magnitude of gestures that a character such as a pig makes happy. In addition, the pending change inciting effect may produce expectations and reliability by displaying the action of a character such as a pig that is displayed without changing the display mode of the pending digestion icon or the pending standby icon.

Next, FIG. 92 shows an effect stock (effect stock display effect), which is one form of a specific effect.
will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a display example of effect stock according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a diagram (part 2) showing a display example of effect stock in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a diagram (part 3) showing a display example of effect stock in the sixth embodiment.

A display screen 891 shown in FIG. 92(1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (during execution of the variation display game). The display screen 891 has two sets of decoration patterns (large pattern group 841, small pattern group 842),
The display contents include a pending display 845 and a pending digestion display 846 .

On the display screen 891, the left, medium and right symbols in the large symbol group 841 are fluctuating at high speed, indicating that the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state. display screen 89
1, the left, medium and right symbols in the small symbol group 842 are fluctuating at high speed, indicating that the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state.

A pending display 845 on the display screen 891 indicates that the number of pending storage is "4" by four pending storage displays (icon displays).
On the display screen 891, the pending digestion display 846 is a pending storage display (icon display) in the frame.
is displayed, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is in a fluctuation display state.

A display screen 893 shown in FIG. 92( 2 ) is a display screen after the display screen 891 . A large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893 shows a state in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and reach has occurred. In the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed, and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped with the symbol "7" swinging. In other words, the large symbol group 841 on the display screen 893 indicates a state in which a ready-to-win with the winning symbol "7" has occurred. In addition, the display screen 893 includes a pending change inciting effect display 884 as one form of suggestive effect. A pending change prompt effect display 884 displays an action in which a pig-like character acts on the pending digestion display 846 . For example, a pig-like character urges the change of the pending digestion icon by tapping the pending digestion icon displayed by the pending digestion display 846 .

A display screen 894 shown in FIG. 92(3) is a display screen after the display screen 893, and shows a state (immediately after the start) in which the stock release effect, which is one form of the specific effect, is being performed.

The display screen 894 includes a production opportunity stock display 896, a stock release production display 895,
Production mode stock display 897 is included in the display contents. The production opportunity stock display 896 displays four fire extinguisher images (images showing production opportunity stock) showing items in the form of fire extinguishers. times.
The four fire extinguisher image representations correspond to the rendition stock representation "4". If there are three fire extinguisher image displays, it corresponds to production stock display "3", if there are two, it corresponds to production stock display "2", and if there is one, it corresponds to production stock display "1". and if there is no directing stock display, "
0”.

On the display screen 894, a pending change stimulating effect display 884 as one form of suggestive effect and a stock release effect (effect stock display "0" to "4") as one form of specific effect are executed in parallel. show the situation. A pending change prompt effect display 884 on the display screen 894 shows that the pending digestion display 846 has been successfully acted upon by a pig-like character, and the pending digestion icon has changed. It should be noted that the pending change fan effect display 884 is the effect opportunity stock display 89
6, the success/failure probability of the success/failure effect in the suggestion effect can be changed according to the display mode of the stock release effect display 895 and the effect mode stock display 897 . In addition, in the pending change inciting effect display 884, the content of notification of the advance notice effect after the success of the suggestive effect can be changed according to the display mode of the effect opportunity stock display 896, the stock release effect display 895, and the effect mode stock display 897.例文帳に追加

Up to this point, the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are finished, but the effect stock display effect after the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are finished will be continuously explained. The performance opportunity stock display 896 holds the performance opportunity stock that indicates (explicitly) the opportunity (number of times) of performing a predetermined performance (performance of extinguishing the flame) at the start of the stock opening performance, the number of which corresponds to the number of performances. It starts to be displayed in the (displayed) state. The stock release effect display 895 on the display screen 894 displays characters "Extinguish the flames!!" to guide the player to the outline of the stock release effect.
The production mode stock display 897 on the display screen 894 includes three flame images (images showing production mode stock) showing flame mode items and a push button image (drawing mode stock) showing items in the push button 25 mode. indicate.

For example, an item in the form of a push button 25 suggests that a push button operation effect will be performed, and an item in a flame form suggests that the push button operation effect will not be performed (cancel the push button operation effect). do. In other words, for items in the form of flames, the push button operation effect will not be executed (although there is a scene where the push button operation effect is executed later, there is a possibility that the push button operation effect will not be executed in that scene). ). In other words, the flame mode item is a presentation mode stock suggesting negative content.

In other words, the effect mode stock display 897 on the display screen 894 indicates that if the stock release effect ends as it is, the push button operation effect will not be performed as the stock consumption effect (the effect will not develop into a push button operation effect). there is

The production mode stock display 897 starts to be displayed in a state of holding (displaying) the production mode stock suggesting the production mode of the stock consumption production when the stock release production starts.
A display screen 898 shown in FIG. 93(1) is a display screen after the display screen 894, and shows a state in which the stock release effect is being performed.

The display screen 898 displays an image showing that the push button is being pressed by hand, the characters "Press!" , and push button 2
5 is urged. In addition, the stock release effect display 895 on the display screen 898 is
The text "4 chances left!!" is displayed to guide the number of remaining stock opening times in the stock opening effect.

In addition, the production opportunity stock display 896 on the display screen 898 translucently displays one of the four fire extinguisher images (images showing the production opportunity stock), and currently the fire extinguisher image (
It indicates that a predetermined production corresponding to the production opportunity stock) is in progress.

A display screen 899 shown in FIG. 93(2) is a display screen after the display screen 898, and shows a state in which the stock release effect is being performed.
On the display screen 899, the stock release effect display 895 displays characters "3 more chances!" to guide the number of remaining stock release times in the stock release effect. Also, on the display screen 899, the production opportunity stock display 896 displays three fire extinguisher images (the translucent displayed fire extinguisher image is gone), which corresponds to the first production opportunity stock. This indicates that the stock release (predetermined effect) has ended.

In the display screen 899, the display area (size) of the production opportunity stock display 896 is left blank in the part where the translucent fire extinguisher image was displayed. By maintaining the display area in this way, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of anticipation that an additional performance opportunity stock will be provided during the stock release rendering.

Also, on the display screen 899, the production mode stock display 897 displays two flame images (images showing production mode stock) and one push button image (image showing production mode stock). Removal of images (directed stock that suggests negative content) (
In other words, if the two flame images are successfully removed by releasing the remaining three stocks, the push button operation effect will be performed as the stock consumption effect.

A display screen 900 shown in FIG. 93(3) is a display screen after the display screen 899, and shows a state in which the stock release effect is being performed. More specifically, the display screen 900 shows a state in which the final stock release in the stock release effect is being performed.

On the display screen 900, the stock release effect display 895 displays an image showing that the push button is being pressed by hand, the characters "Push!" , and prompts the user to operate the push button 25 . Also, on the display screen 900, the stock release effect display 895 is
The text "Last chance!" is displayed to guide the number of remaining stock openings in the stock opening production. Also, on the display screen 900, the production opportunity stock display 896 displays only one translucent fire extinguisher image, indicating that a predetermined production corresponding to the fire extinguisher image is currently in progress. ing.

A display screen 901 shown in FIG. 94(1) is a display screen after the display screen 900, and is a state in which all the flame images (the stock of the production mode suggesting negative contents) cannot be removed by the stock opening production. indicates

On the display screen 901, the stock opening effect display 895 displays the characters "Fire extinguishing failure!!" ing. On the display screen 901, the production mode stock display 897 displays a translucent push button image and a flame image, showing how the push button is extinguished by the flame. That is, the effect mode stock display 897 indicates that the push button operation effect is not performed as the stock consumption effect (does not develop into a push button operation effect).

After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the stock consumption effect, and performs an effect based on the display mode of the effect mode stock display 897 (for example, displays normal symbol variation (display screen 89
After moving to 3, the middle pattern is stopped from fluctuating)).

A display screen 902 shown in FIG. 94(2) is a display screen after the display screen 900, and shows a state in which all the flame images (staging mode stock suggesting negative content) can be removed by the stock opening effect. show.

On the display screen 902, the stock opening effect display 895 displays the characters "Extinguishment succeeded!!", and guides that the flame image (the stock of the effect mode suggesting negative contents) has been removed by the stock opening effect. there is Also, on the display screen 902, the presentation mode stock display 897 displays only the push button image, and shows how the flame image has been removed. That is, the effect mode stock display 897 indicates that a push button operation effect is to be performed as a stock consumption effect (developing into a push button operation effect).

After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the stock consumption effect, and performs the push button operation effect as the stock consumption effect based on the display mode of the effect mode stock display 897 .
The above is the stock effect in the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 1
In 0, instead of adding the production mode stock in the stock release production, the stock production (advance notice) of reducing the production mode stock can be performed.

In addition, in the above effect, the effect opportunity stock was not performed by the stock giving effect (although the effect opportunity stock was provided without effect), but not limited to this, the gaming machine 10
A production opportunity stock may be provided by performing a stock giving production.

In this case, for example, the gaming machine 10 may perform a stock deprivation effect in which the effect opportunity stock is deprived in accordance with the effect instead of the stock giving effect in which the effect opportunity stock is provided in accordance with the effect. good.

For example, the game machine 10 starts the stock deprivation effect from a state in which a predetermined number (for example, five) of the effect opportunity stock is provided, deprives the effect opportunity stock as the stock deprivation effect progresses, and deprives the stock. The stock release effect may be performed by the number of times of the effect opportunity stock remaining at the end of the effect.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform both the stock giving effect and the stock depriving effect. may perform a deprivation effect. According to this,
The game machine 10 can improve the diversity of presentation, prevent the rut, and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the sixth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that since the variation of suggestive effects is scarce, the effects may become monotonous and the interest may not be sufficiently improved. The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the sixth embodiment has the effect of improving the amusement of the game.

(1) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), and the execution of the notice effect in relation to the success or failure of the success/failure effect. Suggestive effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive effect to suggest (for example, a pseudo-inciting effect), and a specification that directs the derivation process of the game result in a period that overlaps with the suggestive effect Specific production means (game control device 100, production control device 300) capable of executing production (for example, timer production) is included. The suggestive effect means is a first success/failure effect having a period that overlaps with the specific effect (for example, a pseudo-repetition effect executed in parallel with the timer effect), or a second success/failure effect that does not have a period that overlaps with the specific effect. It is possible to execute a production (for example, a pseudo-continuous agitation production that is not executed in parallel with the timer production), and the first probability (for example, 90%) of executing the suggestive production after the success of the first success / failure production is Make it larger than the second probability (for example, 50%) of executing the suggestive effect after the success of the success/failure effect of 2 (see FIG. 81).
.

(2) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), and the execution of the notice effect in relation to the success or failure of the success/failure effect. Suggestive effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive effect to suggest (for example, a pseudo-inciting effect), and a specification that directs the derivation process of the game result in a period that overlaps with the suggestive effect Specific production means (game control device 100, production control device 300) capable of executing production (for example, timer production) is included. The specific effect means is a first specific effect of the first effect mode (for example, timer effect (long)), or a second effect different from the first effect mode.
A second specific effect (for example, timer effect (short)) of the effect mode can be executed. The suggestive effect means is a first success/failure effect having a period that overlaps with the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous stimulus effect that is executed in parallel with the timer effect (long)), or a period that overlaps with the second specific effect. A second success/failure effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous stimulus effect that is executed in parallel with a timer effect (short)) can be executed, and a suggestive effect is executed after the first success/failure effect is successful. A probability (for example, 75%) and a second
(eg, 50%) (see FIG. 84).

(3) The game machine 10 has a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), and the execution of the notice effect in relation to the success or failure of the success/failure effect. Suggestive effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive effect to suggest (for example, a pseudo-inciting effect), and a specification that directs the derivation process of the game result in a period that overlaps with the suggestive effect Specific production means (game control device 100, production control device 300) capable of executing production (for example, timer production) is included. The specific effect means is a first specific effect of the first effect mode (for example, timer effect (long)), or a second effect different from the first effect mode.
A second specific effect (for example, timer effect (short)) of the effect mode can be executed. The suggestive effect means is a first success/failure effect having a period overlapping with the specific effect (for example, a pseudo-repetition effect executed in parallel with the timer effect), or a second effect not having a period overlapping with the specific effect.
success/failure effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed in parallel with the timer effect) can be executed, and the first probability of executing the suggestive effect after the success of the first success/failure effect (for example, 60%
(= (15 + 15) / (15 + 15 + 15 + 5))) is set to be greater than the second probability (for example, 40%) of executing the suggestive effect after the success of the second success/failure effect, and out of the first success/failure effect A third success/failure effect having a period that overlaps with the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-repetition effect that is executed in parallel with the timer effect (long)), or a fourth effect that has a period that overlaps with the second specific effect A success/failure effect (for example, a timer effect (short)) can be executed, and a third probability (for example, 75%) of executing a suggestive effect after the success of the third success/failure effect (for example, 75%);
It is different from the fourth probability (for example, 50%) of executing the suggestive effect through the success of the success/failure effect (see FIG. 84).

(4) The game machine 10 includes a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), and a suggestive effect (
For example, suggestive effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo-continuous fan effect), and specific effect means (for example, timer effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, timer effect) in a period overlapping with the suggestive effect Game control device 100, effect control device 300) and. The suggestive effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect becomes a specific effect mode, and the suggestive effect that is executed in duplicate with the specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is executed in parallel with the timer effect) The first probability (for example, 90%) that the performance) is a specific performance mode is executed without overlapping with the specific performance (for example, a pseudo-repetition performance that is not executed in parallel with the timer performance) is the specific performance. It is made larger than the second probability (for example, 50%) which is a mode (see FIG. 81).

(5) The game machine 10 includes a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), and a suggestive effect (
For example, a suggestive effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo-continuous fan effect), and a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a timer effect) during a period overlapping with the suggestive effect (Game control device 100, production control device 300). The specific effect means is a first specific effect of the first effect mode (for example, timer effect (long)), or a second specific effect of a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, timer effect (short )) can be executed. The suggestive effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect becomes the specific effect mode, and can execute the suggestive effect overlapping with the first specific effect or the second specific effect, and the first specific effect. The first mode in which the suggestion effect to be executed overlapping with the effect is a specific effect mode
(for example, 75%) is different from the second probability (for example, 50%) that the suggestive effect executed overlapping with the second specific effect is the specific effect mode (see FIG. 84).

(6) The game machine 10 includes a notice effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect), and a suggestive effect (
For example, suggestive effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of executing a pseudo-continuous fan effect), and specific effect means (for example, timer effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, timer effect) in a period overlapping with the suggestive effect Game control device 100, effect control device 300) and. The suggestive effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect when the suggestive effect becomes a specific effect mode, and the suggestive effect that is executed in duplicate with the specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect that is executed in parallel with the timer effect) A first probability (for example, 90%) that the performance) is a specific performance mode, and a suggestive performance that is executed without overlapping with the specific performance (for example, a pseudo-repetition performance that is not executed in parallel with the timer performance) is the specific performance. It is different from the second probability (for example, 50%) which is a mode (see FIG. 81).

[Seventh embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of the seventh embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

Next, two display devices (display device 41 and LED display device 910) controlled by the effect control device 300 (effect control means) in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 95
[FIG. 12] is a front view of a game board showing the arrangement of each display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 95 shows the game board 8
02, the outline of the front side (front side) of the game board 803 is illustrated. As described above, on the surfaces of the game board 802 and the game board 803, the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 is formed. A center case (game effect structure) 40 is arranged, and an out port 30a is provided at the bottom of the game area 32 . A collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 is provided outside the game area 32 on the game board 802 and the game board 803 .

The display device 41 is composed of a device such as an LCD as described above, and under the control of the production control device 300, the display area performs a variable display of a decorative special figure, which is identification information for production, etc.
, and is the main display device for effects that the player pays the most attention to. The display area of the display device 41 is arranged inside the center case 40 (approximately in the center of the game area 32) as described above.

On the other hand, although the LED display device 910 is omitted from FIG. 2, for example, FIG.
A second display means that is arranged on the front surface of the game board 802 as shown in FIG. It is a sub-display device for production.

The LED display device 910 is arranged inside the game area 32 (for example, outside the center case 40) on the front surface of the game board 802, and is provided at a position closer to the display area of the display device 41 than the collective display device 50 is. Note that the collective display device 50 is arranged outside the game area 32 , whereas the LED display device 910 is arranged inside the game area 32 . As a result, the LED display device 910 is clearly different from the collective display device 50, which is a special figure display means for displaying a so-called special figure (a special figure that is not a decorative special figure for production) under the control of the game control device 100. distinguished.

In addition, the display device 41 is a decoration special figure display means for displaying a decoration special figure for the effect for the player, and the LED display device 910 can be said to assist the display of the display device 41, so-called fourth It is the fourth design display means for displaying the design (information indicating the fluctuation state of the special figure). In this embodiment, the LED display device 910, which is the fourth pattern display means, also has a function of displaying information on the number of reservations (information on starting memory).

LED display device 910, in the configuration related to the production control device shown in FIG.
It corresponds to the board decoration device 46 driven and controlled by the ED control circuit 332, and is one display device (display unit) among a plurality of devices constituting this board decoration device 46. FIG.

The LED display device 910 is always visible from the front side even when the movable part of the character moves so that the display of the LED display device 910 (display as the fourth pattern, etc.) can always be visually recognized by the player. It is placed in a position (for example, a position where the front surface is not covered by other elements on the game board or movable parts of accessories).

From the viewpoint of reducing the moving distance of the line of sight from the display device 41, the LED display device 910 is desirably arranged at a position closer to the display area of the display device 41. For example, FIG.
) may be arranged on the front surface of the center case 40 as shown in FIG. As a result, the display device 41
, and the display of the LED display device 910 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the LED display device 910 is preferably positioned so that the game balls flowing down in the game area 32 do not flow on the front side of the display surface of the LED display device 910, that is, the display of the LED display device 910 is temporarily displayed by the game balls. It is desirable to arrange it in a position where it will not be blocked by the This allows this LE
The display of the D display device 910 (display as the fourth pattern, etc.) can always be easily viewed by the player.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the LED display device 910 (second display means) arranged at a different position separately from the display device 41 (first display means) as described above displays the fourth symbol. display, etc. Therefore, regardless of the display state of the display device 41 and the operation state of the movable part of the character having a movable range covering the display area of the display device 41, the display as the fourth pattern by the LED display device 910 is always reliably displayed. It can be shown to an observer (such as a player).

In the conventional game machine, the fourth symbol is sometimes displayed in part of the display area of the main display device 41 (part of the display screen). It is necessary to control to display the fourth pattern preferentially over other images displayed in the area, and to move the movable part of the character in front of the part of the display area where the fourth pattern is displayed. There was a problem that it was not possible to However, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the LED display device 910 arranged at a position different from the display device 41 performs the display as the fourth symbol, this problem is solved and the display device 41 It is no longer necessary to display the fourth pattern in , and the flexibility of display on the display device 41 is improved, and the entire display area of the display device 41 is temporarily blocked by the movable part of the character. It becomes possible.

Next, the configuration of the LED display device 910 will be described using FIG. FIG. 96 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows an example of the LED display apparatus (2nd display means) of embodiment of this. FIG. 96 shows the display surface of an LED display device 910 that is exposed on the front surface of the game board 30 and arranged to be viewed from the front side. The LED display device 910 in this example includes LED_d21 to LED_d26.
with 6 LEDs up to . The LED display device 910 displays LED_d21 to LED_d
26 lighting modes are used to display various states (notify various types of information).

LED display device 910, by distributing various status display functions from LED_d21 to LED_d26, a special figure 1 variation display unit 911 (second variation display unit of special figure 1) and a special figure 2 variation display unit 912 (special figure 2 2nd fluctuation display part), special figure 1 pending display part 913 (second starting memory display part of special figure 1), and special figure 2 pending display part 914 (second starting memory display part of special figure 2) Prepare.

Here, the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 displays the variation state of the pattern in the special figure 1 game (meaning the variation display game of special figure 1. The same applies hereinafter) by the operation mode of one LED of LED_d21. . The special figure 2 variation display unit 912 displays the variation state of the symbol in the special figure 2 game (meaning the variation display game of special figure 2. The same applies hereinafter) by the operation mode of one LED of LED_d22. The special figure 1 pending display unit 913 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game (special figure 1 start memory in which the special figure 1 variation display game remains unexecuted) by the operation mode of the two LEDs, LED_d23 and LED_d24 It is the number of , and may be called the number of reserved memories or the number of starting memories of Special Figure 1). Special figure 2 pending display unit 914, LED_d25 and LED_d2
6 Depending on the operation mode of the two LEDs, the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game (the number of starting memories of special figure 2 in which the variation display game of special figure 2 remains unexecuted, and the number of starting memories of special figure 2) number or starting memory number).

In addition, while the part that displays the special figure fluctuation in the display area of the display device 41 is the first variation display section, the special figure 1 variation display section 911 and the special figure 2 variation display section 912 in the LED display device 910 are This is the second variable display section. In addition, while the part that performs the pending display in the display area of the display device 41 is the first start memory display unit, the special figure 1 pending display unit 913 and the special figure 2 pending display unit 914 in the LED display device 910 are the first 2 is the starting memory display section.

Next, the operation of the second variable display section of LED display device 910 will be described using FIG. FIG. 97 shows the special figure 1 variation display section and the special figure 2 variation display section (second variation display section) of the seventh embodiment
It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement aspect and alerting|reporting information.

As shown in FIG. 97 (1), the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 is different from the special figure 1 variation display game due to the operation mode in which LED_d21 is turned off (indicated by black filling in the figure. The same applies hereinafter). It indicates that it is stopped, and the operation mode in which LED_d21 is blinking (indicated by gray filling in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) indicates that the variable display game of special figure 1 is being displayed in variable mode, and LED_d21 lights up. It shows that the variable display game of special figure 1 is stopped by winning by the operation mode (indicated by white filling in the figure, the same applies hereinafter).

As shown in FIG. 97 (2), the special figure 2 variation display unit 912 indicates that the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped due to the operation mode in which LED_d22 is turned off, and LED_
The operation mode in which d22 is blinking indicates that the variation display game of special figure 2 is in the process of variation display, and the operation mode in which LED_d22 is lit indicates that the variation display game of special figure 2 is being hit and stopped. indicates

Next, the operation of the second start memory display section of the LED display device 910 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 98 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode and notification information of the special figure 1 pending display section and the special figure 2 pending display section (second starting memory display section) of the seventh embodiment.

Special figure 1 pending display unit 913, as shown in FIG. 98 (1), LED_d23 and LED_d
24 indicate that the number of pending special figures 1 is "0" due to the operation mode in which both are turned off, L
The operation mode in which one of ED_d23 and LED_d24 is lit and the other is turned off indicates that the number of pending special figures 1 is "1", and the operation mode in which both LED_d23 and LED_d24 are lit Special figure 1 indicates that the pending number of is "2", LED_d23 and LE
Due to the operation mode in which one of D_d24 is blinking and the other is lit, the number of pending special figures 1 is "3"
, indicating that the number of pending special figures 1 is "4" by the operation mode that both LED_d23 and LED_d24 are blinking.

Special figure 2 pending display unit 914, as shown in FIG. 98 (2), LED_d25 and LED_d
26 indicate that the number of pending special figures 2 is "0" due to the operation mode in which both are turned off, L
The operation mode in which one of ED_d25 and LED_d26 is lit and the other is turned off indicates that the number of pending special figures 2 is "1", and the operation mode in which both LED_d25 and LED_d26 are lit Special figure 2 is "2", LED_d25 and LE
Due to the operation mode in which one of D_d26 is blinking and the other is lit, the number of pending special figures 2 is "3"
, indicating that the number of pending special figures 2 is "4" by the operation mode that both LED_d25 and LED_d26 are blinking.

Next, the display executed by the effect control device 300 during the game of the gaming machine 10 is shown in FIGS.
00 is used for explanation. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game on the first display means of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a display example during a game on the second display means of the seventh embodiment. Here, the display screen is a screen consisting of one or more images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle different reference numerals are assigned to different display contents. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the first display means is the display device 4
1 and the second display means is the LED display device 910 .

A display screen 500 shown in FIG. 99(1) is a display screen in which symbols are stopped. It is used for period stop display. The display screen 500 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, and a reserved display 505.
, and a pending digestion display 506 are displayed.

The large pattern group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large pattern group 5
01 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 501 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols.

In the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol indicates that
It shows that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, the large symbol group 501 on the display screen 500 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 502 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 501 . The small pattern group 502 is
It includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left, medium and right symbols that constitute the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 501 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 502, has a high degree of freedom of display position, and can change its display mode greatly. On the contrary, the small pattern group 502 is
Compared to the large pattern group 501, it is displayed in a smaller size and has a lower degree of freedom of display position (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4".
The special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 500, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0". The number of pending storage that the pending display 505 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays.

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays "0", the pending display 505 is four pending storage display indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4".

Suspension display 505, depending on its display mode (suspension storage display displayed in suspension display 505),
The number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game can be specified, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be notified.

The pending digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state and inform the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. In the display screen 500, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

A display screen 510 shown in FIG. 99(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. A display screen 510 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 500 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). On the display screen 510, the left, medium and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 510, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "3".
, the special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the pending display 505 shows that the number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game is "3 ”. In addition, on the display screen 510, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

Note that the above-described display screen 500 and display screen 510 displayed in the display area of the display device 41
In the part that displays the special figure fluctuation (large symbol group 501, small symbol group 502, pending digestion display 5
06) corresponds to the first variable display unit, and the part that displays the pending display (display of the number of pending) (special figure 1 pending number display 503, special figure 2 pending number display 504, pending display 505) is the first start memory display equivalent to the department.

Next, the display example of the LED display device 910 shown in FIG. 100(1) is performed during the display of the display screen 500 shown in FIG. 99(1), for example. In this display example, the LED display device 9
10, the LED_d21 of the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 is turned off to notify that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped due to loss, and the LED_d22 of the special figure 2 variation display unit 912 is turned off and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped due to loss, special figure 1 reservation display unit 91
Both LED_d23 and LED_d24 of 3 blink to notify that the number of reservations of special figure 1 (number of reservations of special figure 1 game) is "4", LED_d25 and LED_d26 of special figure 2 reservation display unit 914 Both are turned off and the number of pending special figures 2 (number of pending memories of special figure 2 games) is "0"
to notify that

Next, a display example of the LED display device 910 shown in FIG. 100(2) is performed during display of the display screen 510 shown in FIG. 99(2), for example. In this display example, the LED display device 9
10, the LED_d21 of the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 blinks to inform that the variation display game of special figure 1 is changing, and the LED_d22 of the special figure 2 variation display unit 912 turns off and the special figure 2
LE of the special figure 1 pending display unit 913
One of D_d23 and LED_d24 blinks and the other lights up to inform that the number of reservations of special figure 1 (number of reservations of special figure 1 game) is "3", LED_d2 of special figure 2 reservation display unit 914
5 and LED_d26 are both turned off and the number of pending special figures 2 (number of pending memories of special figure 2 games) is "
0”.

Next, FIG. 101 for the display executed by the effect control device 300 when the gaming machine 10 recovers from power failure
will be used to explain. Drawing 101 is a figure showing an example of the display which the production control device of a 7th embodiment performs at the time of power failure recovery.

As described in step S59 of the main process of the game control device 100, a plurality of commands shown in FIG.

The plurality of commands include the above-mentioned transmission order "2" command (special figure 1 reservation number command) and the transmission The order "3" command (special figure 2 pending number command) is included.

In addition, among the above-mentioned plurality of commands, the command of transmission order "6-1" (hereinafter referred to as customer waiting demo screen command) and the command of transmission order "6-2" (hereinafter referred to as power failure recovery screen command) are This corresponds to the screen designation command described above. Then, when the control states of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game at the time of power failure are both in normal processing (the state is neither during variation, during big hit, or during small hit). , a customer waiting demo screen command is sent to instruct the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, a power failure recovery screen command is sent to instruct the display of the power failure recovery screen (the screen to be displayed when the power failure is restored). .

For this reason, when a power failure occurs during a game (during a special figure change, etc.) and the power is restored, a power failure recovery screen command is sent as a screen designation command instead of a customer waiting demo screen command. Thereby, the production control device 300 receives each command (especially power failure recovery screen command) transmitted at the time of power failure recovery, and displays a display screen 920 shown in FIG. 101 (1) on the display device 41, for example.

A display screen 920 shown in FIG. 101(1) is a power failure recovery screen displayed when a power failure occurs during a game and is restored, and includes a power failure recovery display 921 in the display content. The power failure recovery display 921 is
Display an image (information notifying that the power is being restored) that includes the words "Restoring power". A power failure restoration display 921 informs the player or the like that the power failure is being restored.

Note that the display screen 920 differs from the display screen (for example, the display screen 500, etc.) during a game that is not at the time of power failure recovery, and displays a variable display game such as a large symbol group 501 and a small symbol group 502, and special symbols. The display of the number of reservations (the number of starting memories) such as 1 reservation number display 503 and special figure 2 reservation number display 504 is not included. That is, at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300 causes the first variable display unit of the display device 41 to display predetermined information regarding power failure recovery instead of displaying the variable display game, and displays the power failure instead of displaying the start memory. Display device 4 displays predetermined information about recovery
1 is displayed on the first start memory display section. The predetermined information includes at least information notifying that the power failure is being restored.

In addition, the production control device 300 performs the display shown in FIG. 101 (1) on the display device 41, and receives each command (especially the special figure 1 pending number command and the special figure 2 pending number command) transmitted at the time of power failure recovery. Then, for example, the LED display device 910 performs the display shown in FIG. 101(2).

The display example of the LED display device 910 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is when the power failure occurs when the number of reservations of special figure 1 is "3" and the number of reservations of special figure 2 is "0" and then restored , the power failure recovery screen (
For example, this is performed at the same time as the display of the display screen 920) shown in FIG. 101(1). In this display example, the LED display device 910 is such that the LED_d21 of the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 is in a predetermined state (for example, the off state), and the LED of the special figure 2 variation display unit 912
_d22 becomes a predetermined mode (for example, off state), special figure 1 reservation display unit 91
One of LED_d23 and LED_d24 of 3 blinks and the other lights up, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 is "
3", both LED_d25 and LED_d26 of the special figure 2 reservation display unit 914 are turned off to inform that the number of reservations of special figure 2 is "0".

That is, when the power failure is restored, the effect control device 300 causes the second variable display unit of the LED display device 910 to display a predetermined mode (for example, a light-off state) instead of the variable display game, and the start memory is LE
It is displayed on the second start memory display section of the D display device 910 . As a result, it is possible to provide information with enhanced content when the power is restored. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, in addition to the information that the power failure is being restored, the number of pending special figures 1 and 2, which is information indicating the presence and number of remaining start memories, is notified. be For this reason, even though many execution rights remain (that is, the number of reservations is, for example, the upper limit value of "4" or a value close to the upper limit value of "4"), the player inserts a game medium (or shoots a game ball). operation) is not restarted immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged.

It should be noted that the LED display device 910 at the time of power failure recovery may not be lit until a predetermined condition (for example, until the variable display that was being executed before the power failure is completed) is satisfied (control to light up (You may choose not to do this.) In addition, the LED display device 910 at the time of power failure recovery
may be controlled so that nothing is turned on (actively control that nothing is turned on).

Next, the configuration of the display layer of the display device 41 will be described using FIG. Figure 102
[FIG. 12] is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a display layer in the first display means of the seventh embodiment;
The display layer is a control process that roughly classifies the relative anteroposterior relationship between images, such as whether the image is preferentially displayed as being in the foreground or, conversely, is being displayed as being in the background. It is the upper layer (layer). For example, if two images with different display positions are placed in different display layers and drawn, the image placed in the lower priority display layer in the back is placed in the front display layer with higher priority. occluded by the overlapped part of the
If the transparency of the image on the front side is zero, the image on the back side will not be visible at all to the observer of the display device 41 even if the image on the back side is drawn for control purposes in the overlapped portion.

In the case of this embodiment, as the display layers, for example, as shown in FIG. 102, a display layer L1 in which an image of a power failure restoration screen is arranged and an image of an error notification are arranged in order from the front side (higher priority side). Display layer L2 to be displayed, display layer L3 to arrange the image of the large reservation, display layer L4 to arrange the image of the small pattern and the small reservation, display layer L5 to arrange the image of the character,
There are a display layer L6 for arranging a large pattern image, a display layer L7 for arranging a background image, and a display layer L8 for arranging a movie image. In addition, in FIG. 102, the "blackout recovery screen",
Characters such as "error notification" are descriptions of each display layer and are not displayed.

In this way, by arranging the image of the power failure recovery screen on the frontmost display layer L1, the image of the power failure recovery screen (the image of the power failure recovery display 921) can be reliably displayed regardless of the drawing state of the other display layers. ) can be shown to the observer. For example, while the power failure recovery screen is displayed at the time of power failure recovery, drawing on another display layer on the back side (back side) starts (starting from the state immediately before the power failure occurred), and after the power failure recovery (after the power failure recovery screen is displayed) The power failure restoration display 921 can be reliably shown to the player while preparations are made so that the display can be performed quickly, and the information that the power failure restoration is in progress can be surely notified. Even if drawing is started in another display layer on the back side, if the image of the power failure recovery screen is large enough to cover the entire display area of the display device 41 and has zero transparency, the other display layer on the back side ( Images placed on the display layers L2-L8) are not visible.

In addition, the size of the image of the power failure recovery screen is set to a size that does not cover the entire display area of the display device 41, and during power failure recovery (that is, while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed), the back side of a part of the display area of the display device 41 You may make it show the image of another display layer. Further, by setting the transparency (transparency) of the image of the power failure recovery screen to be greater than zero, images of other display layers on the back side may be seen through during power failure recovery. As a result, it is possible to strongly inform the player that the game machine 10 has recovered from the power failure and is preparing to display a display screen during normal game play (a display screen that is not a power failure recovery screen).

Further, while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed, the image of the power failure recovery screen (for example, the image including the power failure recovery display 921 described above) is simply placed on a predetermined display layer and drawn. A configuration in which no image is drawn may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the order in which the display devices are activated when the gaming machine 10 is powered on will be described. FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing an example of the activation order of each device when power is turned on according to the seventh embodiment.

Assuming that timing T1 is the timing at which the power of the game machine 10 is turned on from off to on due to recovery from power failure (including normal power-on), control of the batch display device 50 is started at timing T2, which is a predetermined time later than timing T1. Then, the collective display device 50 is activated (that is, the collective display device 50 starts displaying), and at the timing T3, which is delayed by a predetermined time from the timing T2, the control of the performance display device 135 is started and the performance display device 135 is activated. (that is, the performance display device 135 starts displaying). For example, the game microcomputer 111, which is the control unit of the game control device 100, executes the above-described step S76 at the time of startup.
In the output process of (1) above, data output from the third output port 134c and the fourth output port 134d is first started, and after a predetermined time, data output from the first output port 134a is started.

Then, for example, at the timing T4 later than the timing T3, the command at the time of starting the game control device 100 (the command at the time of RAM initialization described above or the command at the time of power failure recovery) is transmitted from the game control device 100, and the effect control is performed in response to this command. The device 300, at timing T
4, the display device 41 (first display means) or the LED display device 91
0 (second display means) to initiate display by these displays. This activation order is such that, for example, the game microcomputer 111, at the time of activation, sends commands via the Schmidt buffer 132 after the start of data output from the first output port 134a in the output process of step S76. It is realized by starting

It should be noted that the command at startup (the above-described RAM initialization command or power failure recovery command) is set to be transmitted in step S54 or S59 described above, but the actual timing of transmission depends on, for example, step S54 or S59. Step S7 after receiving the setting
The configuration may be determined by the processing in the output processing of No. 6.

However, although the timing T5 is a timing later than the timing T3, the timing T4 does not necessarily have to be later than the timing T3. Even if the timing T4 at which the start-up command is transmitted from the game control device 100 is, for example, the timing T2 or T3, which is the timing at which the collective display device 50 or the like is started, is the same or earlier, the transmission and reception of this command is performed. The timing T5 may be later than the timing T3 by the time (time from timing T4 to timing T5) until the display device 41 or the like starts display by the effect control device 300. FIG. Therefore, if the time from the timing T4 to the timing T5 is sufficiently long, the start-up command may be transmitted immediately by the serial communication function of the gaming microcomputer 111, for example, when the processing of step S54 or S59 is executed. .

In addition, the timing at which the display device 41 (first display means) starts displaying and the timing at which the LED display device 910 (second display means) starts displaying may be different (one of them may come first). can be). For example, if the timing at which the LED display device 910 starts displaying is earlier, the information on the number of reservations can be notified to the player more quickly, for example, when the power is restored.

In any case, in this embodiment, when the game machine 10 is activated, each display device
Then, the performance display device 135, then the display device controlled by the effect control device 300 (at least the LED display device 910, or further the display device 41) are configured to start displaying in this order. As a result, the display for the player (the display by the LED display device 910 or the display device 41) is delayed, and the display not for the player (the display for the store clerk of the game parlor, etc.) is rather early, and the game is played. Information such as abnormalities can be notified early to a store clerk or the like at the time of start-up.

It should be noted that when the power is restored, other elements on the game board and the movable parts of the characters may be initialized. Since it is arranged at a position where visibility is not hindered by such factors as the above, it is possible to notify the player of the number of pending information in any game state, including when the power is restored.

Next, another example of the power failure recovery screen will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen at the time of restoration from power failure in the seventh embodiment. For example, Figure 1 above
104(1), instead of the display screen 920 shown in FIG. 104(1).
Either the display screen 926 shown in FIG. 104(2) or the display screen 929 shown in FIG. 104(3) may be displayed.

A display screen 923 shown in FIG. 104(1) is a power failure recovery screen, and includes a restart prompting display 924 in addition to the power failure recovery display 921 described above. The restart prompting display 924 displays an image (information prompting the player to restart the game) including the text "Please restart the game".

A display screen 926 shown in FIG. 104(2) is a power failure recovery screen, and includes a manufacturer name display 927 in addition to the power failure recovery display 921 described above. The manufacturer name display 927 displays an image including characters representing the manufacturer name (company name). Instead of the manufacturer name display 927 or in addition to the manufacturer name display 927, a manufacturer logo display (for example, an image of a manufacturer logo (company logo) including a company mascot character) may be displayed. good.

A display screen 929 shown in FIG. 104(3) is a power failure recovery screen, and includes a warning display 930 and a character display 931 in addition to the power failure recovery display 921 described above. The warning display 930 displays an image including characters of the warning "beware of addiction". Character display 931 displays an image of a character such as a tiger. Instead of the warning display 930, or in addition to the warning display 930, "Beware of forgetting to remove the card"
You may display the image (2nd alerting display) containing the character of alerting.

In addition, any one of these display screens as a power failure restoration screen may be preset and displayed, or any one may be selected and displayed by the processing of the effect control device 300 . Further, by the processing of the effect control device 300, a plurality of different preset display screens (or a plurality of different display screens selected from a large number of settings) may be sequentially switched and displayed as a power failure recovery screen. For example, the display screen 920 shown in FIG. 101(1) is first displayed for a predetermined time, then the display screen 923 shown in FIG. 104(1) is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display screen 923 shown in FIG. 104(2) is displayed for a predetermined time. The display screen 926 may be displayed, and then the display screen 929 shown in FIG. 104(3) may be displayed for a predetermined time. In this way, different character information is displayed in sequence, making it easier for the player to grasp the display contents.

[Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment]
Next, modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. Figure 10
5 is a diagram showing an example of a command at the time of RAM initialization and a command at the time of restoration from power failure in Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of recovery from power failure in modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

(1) RAM initialization command indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the time of RAM initialization. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name "specify model") with a transmission order of "1". The command name "specify model" includes MODE "ACH" and one of ACTION "10H" to ACTION "30H" depending on the model. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command of transmission order "2" (command name "special figure 1 pending number").
The command name "Special figure 1 pending number" is MODE "A1H" and ACTIO corresponding to no pending
N "01H" is included. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command of transmission order "3" (command name "number of special figures 2 pending"). Command name "Special figure 2 pending number" is MODE "A2H"
and an ACTION "01H" corresponding to no hold. Next, the game control device 100
A command (command name "probability information") with a transmission order of "4" is transmitted. The command name "probability information" includes MODE "A0H" and ACTION "01H" to ACTI corresponding to the initial state.
Contains either ON "07H".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “set value”) of transmission order “5”. The command name "setting value" consists of MODE "AFH" and ACTIO corresponding to the setting value.
N includes "01H" to "06H". ACTION "01H" to "06H" correspond to setting values "1" to "6".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “6” (command name “how to play”). The command name "hitting method" includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to the initial state (left-handed).

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “7” (command name “power on”). The command name "power on" consists of the MODE "AAH" and the corresponding ACTION "
55H”.

As a result, the game control device 100 can change the setting values (1 to 6
range) and information such as "how to hit" can be notified to the effect control device 300.
(2) The power failure restoration command indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the time of power failure restoration. First, the game control device 100 sends a command with a transmission order of “1” (command name “specify model”).
). The command name "Specify model" is MODE "ACH" and ACT depending on the model.
Contains any of ION "10H" to ACTION "30H". Next, the game control device 1
00 transmits a command (command name "special figure 1 pending number") of transmission order "2". The command name "Special figure 1 pending number" is MODE "A1H" and ACT
Contains any of ION "01H" to ACTION "05H". Next, the game control device 1
00 transmits a command (command name "special figure 2 reservation number") of transmission order "3". The command name "Special figure 2 pending number" is MODE "A2H" and ACT
Contains any of ION "01H" to ACTION "05H". Next, the game control device 1
00 transmits a command (command name "probability information") of transmission order "4". command name "
Probability information" includes MODE "A0H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to various game states.
to ACTION "07H".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “set value”) of transmission order “5”. The command name "setting value" consists of MODE "AFH" and ACTIO corresponding to the setting value.
N includes "01H" to "06H". ACTION "01H" to "06H" correspond to setting values "1" to "6".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “6” (command name “how to play”). The command name "how to play" includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "01H" or "F1H" corresponding to the game state at the time of power failure. Here, ACTION "01H" indicates left-handed hitting, and ACTION "F1H" indicates right-handed hitting. For the benefit of the player, either left-handed hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area 32 or right-handed hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 32 should be selected according to the game state. is. Therefore, the game control device 100 sets the ACTION data of the command of the transmission order "6" (hereinafter referred to as the "playing command") to "01H" if the game state at the time of the power failure should be left-handed. If the game state at the time of the power failure is a state in which the player should hit to the right, AC of the command of the above transmission order "6"
Assume that the data of TION is "F1H".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “7” (command name “power outage restoration”). The command with the command name "power failure recovery" (power failure recovery screen command) is MOD
E "ABH" and corresponding ACTION "55H".

As a result, the game control device 100, the setting value (range of 1 to 6) set at the time of power failure recovery, the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number, and the information such as how to hit the effect control device 300 can be notified.

And the production control device 300 receives each command (especially power failure recovery screen command and hitting method command) transmitted at the time of power failure recovery, and displays the display screen 933 including the hitting method display shown in FIG. 106 (1) for example. It is displayed on the display device 41 as a screen.

A display screen 933 shown in FIG. 106 (1) is a power failure recovery screen when the power is restored in a state where right hitting should be performed. Include in content. The right-handed display 934 is a display of how to hit in the case of right-handed hitting.
Display an image containing the words "right-handed" and an arrow pointing to the right (information recommending right-handed). The right hitting display 934 informs the player or the like that the player should hit right.

For example, instead of the display screen 933, a display screen 936 shown in FIG. 106(2) may be displayed on the display device 41. FIG. The display screen 936 is a power failure recovery screen, and includes a right hitting display 937 in addition to the power failure recovery display 921 and the restart prompting display 924 described above. The right-handed display 937 displays an image (information recommending right-handed hitting) including a pictogram (a kind of visual symbol and also called pictogram) indicating "right-handed hitting". The right hitting display 937 informs the player or the like that the player should hit right.

When the power is restored in a state in which left-handed batting is to be performed, a left-handed display (display for left-handed batting) that displays information recommending left-handed batting is performed instead of the right-handed batting display 934 and the like.
The display indicating the hitting method is the AC of the received hitting method command (MODE “D3H” command).
If the TION data is "01H", left-handed display is displayed, and the received hitting command (MOD
E "D3H" command), if the ACTION data is "F1H", the right-hand shot is displayed.

According to this modified example 1, in addition to the information that the power failure is being restored and the information of the remaining start memory displayed on the LED display device 910, information on how to beat is displayed on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored. . That is, it is possible to realize information notification with more substantial contents at the time of power failure restoration. For this reason, when the power is restored, the player cannot grasp the state of the hitting method (whether the player should hit to the left or the state to hit to the right), and for example, he hits to the left when he should have hit to the right. Such a situation is eliminated, and the player becomes more advantageous.

In this modified example 1, there is no customer waiting demonstration screen command and only the power failure recovery screen command (the above-mentioned transmission order "7" command) is set as the screen designation command in the power failure recovery command. In other words, even if a normal power-on operation (except for a power-on operation that accompanies the operation of the RAM initialization switch) is performed after a normal power-off operation that is not a power failure, the Regardless of the game state (before interruption), a power failure recovery command including a power failure recovery screen command for commanding display of a power failure recovery screen is always transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

As the effect control device 300 that has received the power failure recovery command, for example, even if it is not in the game, according to the power failure recovery screen command included in the power failure recovery command, FIG.
A power failure recovery screen as exemplified in FIG.
When all the pending numbers become zero and the variable display game ends and the game is not in a jackpot state, etc., and the customer waiting demo command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen and displayed. Just do it.

However, other commands included in the received power failure recovery command (special figure 1 pending number command,
From the information indicated by the ACTION data of the special figure 2 pending number command, probability information command, etc.), the production control device 300 is in a state where the customer waiting demo screen should be displayed from the beginning (
That is, when it can be determined that a player is not playing a game, the customer waiting demo screen may be displayed from the beginning without displaying the power failure recovery screen.

[Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment]
Next, modification 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. Figure 10
7 is a diagram showing an example of a power failure restoration command in Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of recovery from power failure in modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.

The following command is transmitted as the power failure recovery command of this modified example 2. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name "specify model") with a transmission order of "1". The command name "specify model" includes MODE "ACH" and one of ACTION "10H" to ACTION "30H" depending on the model. Next, the game control device 100, transmission order "2
” command (command name “number of special figures 1 pending”). Command name "Number of special figures 1 pending"
includes MODE "A1H" and any of ACTION "01H" through ACTION "05H" corresponding to no hold to hold number four. Next, the game control device 100, transmission order "3
” command (command name “number of special figures 2 pending”). Command name "Number of special figures 2 pending"
includes MODE "A2H" and any of ACTION "01H" through ACTION "05H" corresponding to no hold to hold number four. Next, the game control device 100, transmission order "4
” command (command name “probability information”). The command name "probability information" is MO
DE "A0H" and ACTION "01H" to ACTION "
07H”.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “set value”) of transmission order “5”. The command name "setting value" consists of MODE "AFH" and ACTIO corresponding to the setting value.
N includes "01H" to "06H". ACTION "01H" to "06H" correspond to setting values "1" to "6".

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “6” (command name “fluctuating”). This command name "during fluctuation" (hereinafter referred to as "variation state command") includes MODE "D3H" and ACTION "01H" or "
F1H”. Here, ACTION "01H" indicates that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being stopped, and ACTION "F1H" indicates that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100, as the command of transmission order “7”, the command of transmission order “7-1” (command name “power outage recovery (default)”) or the command of transmission order “7-2” (
Send one of the commands corresponding to the command name "power failure recovery (right-handed)"). The command name "power outage recovery (default)" consists of MODE "ABH" and corresponding ACTION "0
1H”. The command name "power failure recovery (right stroke)" includes MODE "ABH" and corresponding ACTION "F1H".

Note that the game control device 100, if the game state at the time of the power failure is a state in which left-handed hitting is to be performed, transmits a command with the command name "power failure recovery (default)" as the command of the transmission order "7", and the game at the time of the power failure. If the state is a state in which right-hand driving should be performed, a command with a command name of "recovery from power failure (right-hand driving)" is transmitted as the command of the transmission order "7".

Thereby, the game control device 100 can notify the effect control device 300 of information such as whether or not it is fluctuating and information such as how to hit in addition to the information such as the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number. It should be noted that, for example, the types of ACTION data of the command of transmission order "6" are increased, and not only that the command is simply stopped, but that the command of transmission order "6" is stopped due to a miss or stopped due to a hit. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which determination can be made based on ACTION data.

And the production control device 300 receives the power failure restoration time command transmitted at the time of power failure restoration, and displays the display screen shown in FIG. 108 on the display device 41, for example. Specifically, if the ACTION data of the command (variation state command) received in transmission order "6" indicates that the command is out of order and is stopped, for example, the display screen 939 shown in FIG. If the ACTION data of the command (fluctuation state command) of transmission order "6" indicates that the game is stopped due to a hit, for example, a display screen 942 shown in FIG. 108(2) is displayed. again,
If the ACTION data of the received command (fluctuation state command) of transmission order "6" indicates that the command is fluctuating, for example, display screen 939 and display screen 9 are displayed as shown in FIG. 108(3).
42 are alternately switched and displayed at a predetermined short cycle (that is, two different still images are alternately switched and displayed).

A display screen 939 shown in FIG. 108(1) is a power failure recovery screen when a power failure occurs while the variable display is stopped due to a failure and the power is restored. Display 940 is included in the display contents. The failure display 940 displays an image (information suggesting failure) including a character with an embarrassed face and an X mark. By displaying the out-of-game display 940 for a predetermined period of time or more beyond the period described above, the player or the like is notified that the out-of-game is stopped.

The display screen 942 shown in FIG. 108 (2) is a power failure recovery screen when power is restored due to a power failure while the fluctuation display is stopped for a win (big win or small win).
21, the display contents include a win display 943 suggesting a win. The win display 943 displays an image (information suggesting a win) including a character with a happy face and a circle mark. Win display 9
When 43 is displayed for a predetermined period of time or longer beyond the period described above, the player or the like is informed that the game is stopped.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (3), the display screen 939 and the display screen 942 are alternately switched at a predetermined short period and displayed, so that the player or the like changes either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. You will be notified that you are inside.

According to this modification 2, in addition to the information that the power failure is being restored and the information of the remaining start memory displayed on the LED display device 910, information on whether it is fluctuating or not, and information on whether it is a hit or not. is performed when the power is restored. That is, it is possible to realize information notification with more substantial contents at the time of power failure restoration. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to being unable to grasp whether or not the player is fluctuating when the power is restored. Also, by switching between the display screen 939 and the display screen 942 (switching between still images) shown in FIG. 108(3), it is possible to easily realize a kind of variable display effect, which enhances interest.

In addition, in this modified example 2, a display screen simpler than that in FIG. 108 may be displayed as the power failure recovery screen. For example, in addition to the power failure restoration display 921 described above, the display screen may include display contents such as characters simply indicating whether or not the power is fluctuating.

Further, even on the power failure recovery screen in the modified example 2, it is possible to display the playing method such as the above-described restart prompting display 924 and the right-hand hitting display 934 . In this case, in the display of how to play, the ACTION data of the received command of transmission order "7" (command of MODE "ABH") is "
01H", the display is left-handed, and the received transmission order of "7" (MODE "ABH"
command), if the ACTION data is "F1H", the right-hand shot is displayed.

In addition, in this modification 2, by the control of the effect control device 300, the ACTION data of the special figure 1 reservation number command and the special figure 2 reservation number command of the received transmission order "2" and "3" are both "01H" (holding number is zero), and when the ACTION data of the command (fluctuation state command) received in the transmission order of "6" is "01H" (stopping), it is determined that the game is not in progress, and the power is cut off from the beginning. A customer waiting demonstration screen may be displayed instead of the recovery screen.

[Modification 3 of the seventh embodiment]
Next, Modification 3 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power failure recovery setting process in the modification 3 of 1 embodiment.

The power failure recovery setting process is a routine that is called and executed when the received command is a power failure recovery time command in, for example, the reception command check process of step D22 in the main process of the effect control device 300 described above.

In this power failure recovery setting process, first, the data of the received power failure recovery command (there are a plurality of commands as described above) is read (step D101), and then displayed on the display device 41 according to the read data. The type and specifications of the display screen to be displayed are selected (step D102). Next, data setting for displaying the selected display screen (step D1
03) to end the power failure recovery setting process.

Here, the types of display screens to be selected in step D102 can be broadly divided into:
There are a power failure restoration screen including information that the power failure is being restored, and a customer waiting demonstration screen that does not include the information that the power failure is being restored and performs a customer waiting demonstration. The types of power failure restoration screens may differ depending on, for example, the mode of the background of the screen (color, brightness, pattern, etc.), the presence or absence of information to be displayed, and the content of the information. The information to be displayed includes messages such as reminders and re-opening reminders, how to hit (left-handed or right-handed), number of holds (number of holds for special 1, number of holds for special 2), change status (changing (whether or not), probability state (high probability or not), winning state (whether it is winning or not, whether it is a big win or a small win), character, manufacturer name, manufacturer logo, and the like.

In addition, as for the specifications of the display screen selected in step D102, in the case of the power failure recovery screen,
For example, message display specifications (number of messages, type, size, display position, display color,
fonts, etc.), display specifications of how to play (type, size, display position, display color, etc. of how to display), display specifications of pending number (type, size, display position, display color, etc. of displayed number of holds), Variation state display specifications (variation state display type, size, display position, display color, etc.), probability state display specifications (probability state display type, size, display position, display color, etc.), hit state Display specifications of (
Display type, size, display position, display color, etc. of hit state), detailed display specifications of background, display specifications of characters (number of characters, type, size, display position, display color, etc.), etc. .

Thus, in this modification 3, the effect control device 300 receives the display contents of the display screen to be displayed on the display device 41 at the time of power failure recovery (including normal power-on without RAM initialization). Different depending on the content of the recovery command. As a result, the optimum display screen can be displayed at the time of power failure recovery according to the situation.

For example, if the number of pending special figures 1 and 2 is both less than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the display screen 923 including the above-mentioned re-opening prompt display 924 is displayed to give the player a game ball , and if either the number of pending special figures 1 and 2 is a predetermined value (for example, "2") or more, the above-described display screen 920 or display screen that does not include the re-opening prompt display 924 926 is displayed, and either the number of reservations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is the second predetermined value (for example, "3")
In the case above, the above-described display screen 929 including the warning display 930 without including the rerun prompting display 924 is displayed. As a result, the optimum display screen corresponding to the number of holds can be displayed when the power is restored.

In addition, when the content of the display screen includes the number of pending, the player can use the LED display device 910
In addition, the main display device 41 also indicates the presence or absence and number of suspensions at the time of power failure recovery (that is,
The presence or absence and number of remaining starting memories can be known, and the player is more advantageous.

[Modification 4 of the seventh embodiment]
Next, Modification 4 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the 2nd display means in the modification 4 of embodiment.

Modification 4 is a case where the model of the gaming machine is a model with only one type of special figure variation display game (for example, a model with only special figure 1 and no special figure 2). And the LED display device 9
It is an embodiment in which the hardware configuration of 10 is shared with the case where there are two types of special figure variation display games described above. Therefore, the hardware configuration of the LED display device 910 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

First, in the specific example 1 shown in FIG. 110 (1), the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 and the special figure 1 pending display unit 913 in the LED display device 910, the special figure 1 variation display game in the same manner as the above-described embodiment Display the state and the number of pending special figures 1, special figure 2 fluctuation display section 912 and special figure 2
A display of decorations or other information is provided by the pending display portion 914 . With other information, for example, the production control device 300 by the command (probability information command) of the transmission order "4" described above
Can be determined by the game state (for example, whether it is a high probability state) information and the transmission order "6" command (command name "hitting method") in the first modification described above. (Left-handed or right-handed) information.

Next, in the specific example 2 shown in FIG. 110 (2), by the special figure 1 fluctuation display unit 911 and the special figure 1 pending display unit 913 in the LED display device 910, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game as in the above-described embodiment In addition to displaying the state and the number of pending special figures 1, special figure 2 fluctuation display section 912
And also by special figure 2 pending display unit 914, special figure 1 fluctuation display unit 911 and special figure 1 pending display unit 91
The same display (mirroring display) as the display performed by 3 is performed.

Next, in the specific example 3 shown in FIG. 110 (3), the special figure 1 variation display unit 911 in the LED display device 910 displays the status of the special figure 1 variation display game in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. Display of decoration or other information (information on game state and hitting method) is performed by the variable display section 912 in FIG. Then, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 913 in the LED display device 910
And the special figure 2 reservation display unit 914 displays the number of reservations of special figure 1.

For example, LED_d23, LE
D_d24, LED_d25, and LED_d26 by lighting and extinguishing a total of four LEDs, to display the number of pending special figure 1. Specifically, the effect control device 300 controls these four LEDs so that the number of LEDs that are lit among the four LEDs, for example, becomes the number of reservations of special figure 1, and the LEDs that are lit The number of shows the number of reservations of special figure 1. As a result, the number of reservations can be displayed without blinking the LED, and information on the number of reservations that is easy for the player to understand can be realized.

[Modification 5 of the seventh embodiment]
Next, modification 5 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 shows the seventh
It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement aspect and notification information of the LED display device (2nd display means) and the hitting|hitting method display part of an LED display device in the modification 5 of embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 111(1), the LED display device 910 of Modification 5 has a configuration in which a hitting method display section 915 (second state display section) is added to the LED display device 910 of the above-described embodiment. . The LED display device 910 of the present modification 5 includes each display unit (special figure 1 fluctuation display unit 91
1, special figure 2 fluctuation display unit 912, special figure 1 pending display unit 913, and special figure 2 pending display unit 914
) in addition to LED_d21 to LED_d26 that constitute the .

The hitting display section 915 displays the hitting state (left-handed or right-handed) by the operation mode of one LED of LED_d27. For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the hitting method display section 915 indicates that the action mode in which the LED_d27 is turned off indicates that the player should hit left, and the action mode in which the LED_d27 is lit indicates that the player should hit right. indicates that it should be. Note that the playing method display unit 915 displays information on how to play even when the power failure is restored by the control of the effect control device 300 that receives the command (command name “how to play”) in the transmission order “6” in the first modification. do.

As a result, even when the information on how to beat is not displayed on the display device 41 (or when it is displayed but cannot be seen), the player can grasp the state of how to beat by looking at the LED display device 910, and can play the game. beneficial to those who It should be noted that the display of the hitting method performed on the display screen of the display device 41 (for example, the above-described right-hand hitting display 934, etc.) is controlled by the first state display section (first
), whereas the hitting method display unit 91 of the LED display device 910
5 corresponds to a second state display section (second hitting state display section).

[Another modification of the seventh embodiment]
Next, another modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described.
The LEDs that make up the LED display device 910 may be LEDs that emit light in a single color, or LEDs that can switch between a plurality of different colors (LEDs capable of emitting full-color light may also be used).
, and other information other than the number of reservations and the variation state (game state such as whether or not it is a high probability state, the state of how to beat, etc.) may be indicated by the color of light emitted from the LED. For example, if the emission color of any of the LEDs that are lit or blinking in the LED display device 910 is blue, it may indicate left-handed shooting, and if it is red, it may indicate right-handed shooting.

Display elements such as those shown in FIGS. 104 and 106 (for example, display 924 to prompt re-opening, display 927 of manufacturer name, display 930 to call attention, display 931 of character, display 934 of hitting right) are displayed in plurality on the power failure recovery screen. can be For example, some or all of the above display elements may be displayed simultaneously.

The first display means is not limited to an image display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) like the display device 41 described above, and may be a reel type display device.
The second display means is not limited to an LED display device such as the LED display device 910 described above, and can be configured by an LCD (liquid crystal display) with a small display area, for example.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing a starting memory as the right to execute a variable display game, and is a first variable display unit capable of displaying the variable display game on the first display means (display device 41). (Display area where large symbol group 501, small symbol group 502, and pending digestion display 506 are displayed), and second variable display section (
Special figure 1 variation display unit 911, special figure 2 variation display unit 912) and the first start memory display unit (special figure 1 reservation number display 503, special figure 2 reservation number display 504, a display area where the pending display 505 is displayed), and a second starting memory display portion (special figure 1 pending display portion 913, special figure 2 pending display portion 914) that can display the starting memory on the second display means And, a game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control, and a performance control means (performance control device 300) for receiving a command from the game control means and controlling the performance means. The game control means detects power failure recovery and notifies at least the information on the starting memory to the effect control means (power failure recovery command including special figure 1 reservation number command and special figure 2 reservation number command). Upon receipt of the notification, the effect control means causes the first variable display unit to display predetermined information (power failure recovery display 921, etc.) regarding power failure recovery instead of displaying the variable display game, and instead of displaying the start memory to display predetermined information (power failure restoration display 921, etc.) regarding power failure recovery on the first start memory display unit, and display a predetermined mode (for example, a mode in which the LED is turned off) instead of the variable display game on the second variable display unit, The starting memory is displayed on the second starting memory display section.

(2) In the gaming machine 10 of (1), a start winning opening is provided in the game area of the game board into which the launched game ball is struck, and the winning of the game ball to this starting winning opening causes a start memory as an execution right. is stored, a variable display game for variable display of identification information (special figure) is performed based on the starting memory, and a state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The first display means and the second display means of (1) are arranged within the game area. The effect control means of (1) is the number of remaining starting memories for which the variable display game has not been executed (the number of reservations of special figure 1, the number of special figures 2
) is displayed on the second start memory display unit.

(3) The second display means of (1) is arranged at a position where the display of this second display means is not obstructed by other components of the gaming machine (for example, movable parts of characters).
(4) In the notification of (1) (power failure restoration command), a hitting method indicating whether the game ball is hit to the left side of the game area or the right hit state to hit the game ball to the right side of the game area The information (hitting command) is included, and the effect control means receives the notification and displays the information on the hitting (for example, right-handed display 934 or display by hitting display unit 915) as the first display means or the second display means (or the first display means and the second display means).

(5) In (1) notification (power failure recovery command), information (variation state command, probability information command)
is included, and the effect control means receives the notification and displays the information indicating the game state (for example, the losing display 940, the winning display 943, or the display by the emission color of the LED display device 910) on the first display means or It is performed by the second display means (or the first display means and the second display means).

(6) The effect control means of (1) selects and displays the type and specifications of the display screen to be displayed on the first display means from among a plurality of types in accordance with the received notification (power failure recovery command).
(7) The production control means of (1) receives the notification (power failure restoration command), and sequentially switches and displays different display screens on the first display means.

(8) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing a starting memory as the right to execute the variable display game, and is a first variable display section capable of displaying the variable display game on the first display means (display device 41). (Display area where large pattern group 501, small pattern group 502, pending digestion display 506 are displayed), and first start memory display section (special figure 1 reservation number display 503 , special figure 2 reservation number display 504, display area where the reservation display 505 is displayed), and the second start memory display section (special figure 1 reservation display unit 9
13, special figure 2 reservation display unit 914) and game control means for performing game control (game control device 1
00), and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means. The game control means detects the power failure recovery and notifies the effect control means of at least the information on the start memory (power failure recovery command including special figure 1 reservation number command and special figure 2 reservation number command). Upon receipt of the notification, the effect control means causes the first variable display unit to display predetermined information (power failure recovery display 921, etc.) regarding power failure recovery instead of displaying the variable display game, and instead of displaying the start memory to display predetermined information on power failure recovery (power failure recovery display 921, etc.) on the first start memory display unit, start memory (number of reservations for special figure 1, special figure 2
) is displayed on the second start memory display unit.

(9) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories, which are the right to execute the variable display game, and can display the variable display game on the first display means (display device 41). A first variable display unit (a display area in which a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, and a pending digestion display 506 are displayed) and a variable display game can be displayed on the second display means (LED display device 910). 2 variation display section (special figure 1 variation display section 911, special figure 2 variation display section 912) and a first start memory display section (special Display area where FIG. 1 pending number display 503, special figure 2 pending number display 504, and pending display 505 are displayed), and information that can specify the number of starting memories can be displayed on the second display means Second starting memory A display unit (special figure 1 reservation display unit 913, special figure 2 reservation display unit 914), game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control, and receiving commands from the game control means to control the effect means A production control means (production control device 300) is provided. The game control means detects the power failure recovery and notifies the effect control means of at least the information on the number of starting memories (special figure 1 pending number command and special figure 2
power-recovery commands, including the Hold Count command). Effect control means receives the notification, causes the first display means to display predetermined power failure recovery information indicating that the power failure is being restored (power failure recovery display 921, etc.), and at least the second display means to start Information that can specify the number of memories is displayed (see FIG. 101).

(10) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the variable display game, and has first display means (display device 41) and second display means. (LE
D display device 910) and the first start memory display unit (special figure 1 reservation number display 503, special figure 2 reservation number display 504, reservation Display 505
is displayed), and the second start memory display section (special figure 1 reservation display section 913, special figure 2 reservation display section 914 ), game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control, and production control means (production control device 300) for receiving commands from the game control means and controlling the production means. The game control means detects power failure recovery and notifies the effect control means of at least the information on the number of starting memories (power failure recovery command including special figure 1 reservation number command and special figure 2 reservation number command). Effect control means receives the notification, causes the first display means to display predetermined power failure recovery information indicating that the power failure is being restored (power failure recovery display 921, etc.), and at least the second display means to start Display information that can identify the number of memories. The second display means is located at a position where the visibility of the second start memory display section is not hindered in any game state (for example, a position where the front surface is not covered by other elements on the game board or movable parts of accessories). , a position where the game ball flowing down in the game area 32 does not flow on the front side of the display surface of the LED display device 910 (Fig. 95,
See Figure 101).

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of the eighth embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to seventh embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. First, a specific lighting mode of the collective display device 50 (FIG. 5) in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 112
[FIG. 12] is a diagram showing an example of a lighting mode of a collective display device according to an eighth embodiment;

Collective display device 50, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), round display unit 51, special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, special figure 1 design display unit 53, special figure 2 design display unit 54, normal figure Design display section 55
And, a normal figure reservation display part 56, a state display part 57, and a special figure 2 reservation display part 58 are provided. The 7-segment LED_d1 of the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 is composed of 8 LEDs (7 segments LE
D (a to g) and one dot LED (dp)). Special figure 2 pattern display unit 54
7 segment LED_d2 is composed of 8 LEDs (7 segment LEDs (a to g) and 1
dot LED (dp)).

In the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation symbol number is alternately changed, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the dot LED (dp) and the segment LED (g) light up (segment L
ED (a to f) are off) and segment LEDs (a to f) are on (dot L
ED (dp) and segment LED (g) are turned off) to indicate that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, segment LED (b, e) is lit) the segment LEDs (a, c, d, f, g) and dot LEDs (dp) are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the win result mode (special result mode)
As a result mode other than the result mode of failure (for example, segment LED (a, b, c, d,
g) is turned on and the segment LEDs (e, f) and dot LEDs (dp) are turned off) to display the game result. In addition, the special figure 1 pattern display portion 53 may be configured with a plurality of LEDs (other than the 7-segment type) like the other display portions. Also, although it has been described that the variable pattern numbers are alternately changed, three or more variable pattern numbers may be prepared and periodically changed.

In the special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation symbol number is alternately changed, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the segment LEDs (a to f) are lit (dot LED (dp) and segment LED (g) are off), and the dot LED (dp) and segment LED (g) are lit (segment LED (a to f) are extinguished states) are alternately switched to indicate that they are changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, if the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, the segment LED (b, e) is turned on. the segment LEDs (a, c, d, f, g) and dot LEDs (dp) are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the win result mode (special result mode)
As a result mode other than the result mode of failure (for example, segment LED (a, b, c, d,
g) is turned on and the segment LEDs (e, f) and dot LEDs (dp) are turned off) to display the game result. In addition, the special figure 2 pattern display part 54 may be composed of a plurality of LEDs (other than the 7-segment type) like the other display parts. Also, although it has been described that the variable pattern numbers are alternately changed, three or more variable pattern numbers may be prepared and periodically changed.

The special figure 1 reserved display unit 52 is a winning opening that is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (for example, the game board shown in FIG. 51 has a starting winning opening 36 and a normal fluctuation winning device 37) Among the numbers, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number (holding memory number) = holding number) is displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs (LED_d11, d12), as shown in FIG. 112(d), for example. do. The flashing cycle is set to 128 ms, for example.

The special figure 2 reserved display unit 58 is a winning opening that is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (for example, in the case of the game board shown in FIG. 51, the starting winning opening 370). For example, as shown in FIG.
D_d13, d14) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking. The blinking period is, for example, 128
It is set to m seconds.

When the round display unit 51 is not in the special game state, all the LEDs (LED_d3
d6) is turned off, and during the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(e),
LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the results. The round display unit 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the state display unit 57 turns off the LED_d7 when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting).
In the case of a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), the LED
_d7 is turned on.

State display unit 57, for example, as shown in FIG. 112 (f), LE
D_d9 is turned on, and LED_d9 is turned off if it is not in the time-saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the state display unit 57 turns on LED_d17 when the power is turned on in a high probability state, and turns off LED_d17 when it is not in a high probability state.

During the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation display game in the normal pattern display unit 55, for example, as shown in FIG.
d10 is turned on (LED_d8, d18 are turned off), and LED_d8, d
18 is turned on (LED_d10 is turned off) to indicate that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. and,
If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, LED_d8) is turned on to indicate that it is a hit, and if the result is "lose", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, LED_d10, d18) are turned on to indicate a failure.

The normal pattern holding display unit 56 indicates the number of balls that have not been digested out of the number of passing balls of the normal pattern starting gate (normal pattern starting gate 34), which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the normal pattern display unit 55 (the number of normal pattern starting memories = pending number),
For example, turning off a plurality of LEDs (LED_d15, d16) as shown in FIG. 112(h),
Displayed by lighting or blinking.

Next, the special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and the special figure variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 127. FIG.

First, the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is "jackpot" will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115 . FIG. 113 is a diagram (part 1) showing a display example of a special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 114 is a diagram (part 2) showing a display example of a special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 115 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of display switching timing between the special figure display on the collective display device and the special figure display on the display device of the eighth embodiment.

Figure 113 (a) is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game (number of special figure 1 reservations) is 1 and special FIG. 2 shows a state in which the number of pending memories of the game (special figure 2 pending number) is zero.

Here, since the game result is "lost", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "123", which is one mode of the result modes of "losing".
Then, the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 to the result mode of "missing" (
Segment LEDs (a, c, d, f, g) with segment LEDs (b, e) turned on
and the dot LED (dp) are turned off). Also, FIG. 113(a)
In the example shown in , the collective display device 50 also sets the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 as a result of "missing" (segment LEDs (b, e) to the lighting state and segment LEDs (a, c, d,
f, g) and the dot LED (dp) are turned off).

Also, here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is in the stop display time, the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 1 and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 0, the display device 41
, the numerical value of the special figure 1 pending number display 503 is set to "1", the numerical value of the special figure 2 pending number display 504 is set to "0", one pending icon 507 is displayed in the pending display 505, and the pending digestion display The frame of 506 is left blank.

In addition, the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52 to a mode corresponding to "one special figure reservation" (LED_d11 is turned on and LED_d12 is turned off (Fig. 112 (d) See)), and the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58 is set to a mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (a mode in which LED_d13, d14 are turned off (see FIG. 112 (d))).

And here, the game result is "lost", the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is 1, and the number of reserved memories for the special figure 2 game is 0, so when the stop display time ends After the figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. , to change the numerical value of the special figure 1 pending number display 503. here,
Since the pending memory of the special figure 1 game is digested and becomes 0, the pending icon 5 of the pending display 505
07 disappears, the numerical value of the special figure 1 reservation number display 503 becomes "0". In addition, collective display device 5
0 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display section 52 to a mode corresponding to "no special figure pending" (a mode in which LED_d11 and d12 are turned off (see FIG. 112(d))).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
starts the variable display of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the collective display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game. Specifically, large pattern group 501
The variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 is started, and the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 is started. In addition, the collective display device 50 has a special figure 1 pattern display unit 53
, that is, a mode corresponding to "fluctuating" (dot LED (dp), segment L
display (see FIG. 112(b)) in which the state in which the ED (g) lights up and the state in which the segment LEDs (a to f) light up alternately) is started. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable time starts, the special figure variable display game starts, but the variable display does not start, and when the first predetermined time has passed from the start of the variable time, The variable display of the special figure variable display game is started.

During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball enters the winning opening that is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the reserved memory (first execution right) of the special figure 1 game is generated, the figure 113(c
), the display device 41 changes the number of pending icons 507 of the pending display 505 and changes the numerical value of the special figure 1 pending number display 503, and the collective display device 50 is the special figure 1 pending display section 52 is changed.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
1), as shown in FIGS. 113(d) and 115, the display device 41 ends the variable display and displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 (large symbol group 501 and small symbol group 502). The state of the group 502 is changed according to the game result), and the pending digestion display 506
is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 . Here, the game result is "jackpot"
Therefore, the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "333" which is one aspect of the result aspect of "jackpot", and the collective display device 50 is the special figure 1 The display mode of the symbol display section 53 is one of the results modes of the "jackpot".

Also, here, the game result is "big hit", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 1, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 0, so when the stop display time ends When the figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), the first special game state ends when the jackpot ending time ends, and the special figure 1 which is the next special figure variation display game. The variable time of the variable display game starts (t13). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. , The numerical value of the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 is changed, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display part 53.

In this embodiment, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 5 are displayed simultaneously with the start of the special game state.
02 is hidden, and after that, at the same time as the start of the variable time, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 5 are displayed.
02 reappears. That is, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the fluctuation time starts. In the reappearing large symbol group 501 and small symbol group 502, first, the result of the previous special symbol variation display game is displayed. Here, because the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "333" (
113(d)), and as shown in FIGS. 113(e) and 115, the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 502 with "333" stopped appearing simultaneously with the start of the variable time (t13). ). Since the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time after the start of the variable time (t1
3 to t14), the display modes of the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 502 do not change, and "333"
is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 of the collective display device 50 is the same display aspect as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (Fig. 113 (d) ) is maintained. Then, the variable display of the special figure variable display game is the first from the start of the variable time
Since it starts when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 115, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game (t11 to t14), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the display mode of special figure 2 design display part 54 do not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation time (t14), as shown in FIG. During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually increases (t14 to t15), and eventually
4(a), high-speed fluctuation (display of fluctuation at a speed that is difficult to distinguish) is performed (t15
~ t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t16). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 114(b), the large pattern group 501 starts the low speed fluctuation in the order of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern, and is temporarily stopped in the order of the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern. . In the temporary stop state, the pattern (identification information) is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the game is not completely stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 114(c), when the same pattern (identification information) is temporarily stopped in the left pattern and the right pattern, the ready-to-win state is entered and the ready-to-win variation starts (t18). In FIG. 115, for convenience, large pattern group 5
As 01, only the timing at which the variation mode of the left pattern changes is shown. Therefore, in FIG. 115, "t14" is the timing at which the left symbol starts low speed fluctuation, and the timing at which the right and middle symbols start low speed fluctuation is between "t14" and "t15". Also,"
t16" is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation) is between "t16" and "t17". be. Also, "t17" is the timing when the left symbol starts to temporarily stop, and "t18"
is the timing at which the right symbol starts the temporary stop, and the timing at which the middle symbol starts the temporary stop is between "t18" and "t19".

On the other hand, in the small pattern group 502 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t14 to t19), the display mode of the small symbol group 502 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t14 to t19), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (here, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
9) As shown in FIGS. 114(d) and 115, the display device 41 terminates the variable display, displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 . After that, the special figure variation display game ends with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "loss",
Since there is no pending memory, it shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a pending memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game starts. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 114(d) is different among FIGS. 113(a) to 114(d). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 114(d), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 is one of the result modes of "hit". Then, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 becomes one mode of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t13 to t14), the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 50 of the display device 41
2 display mode is the result mode of "big hit", and the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 of the collective display device 50
The display mode of is the result mode of "jackpot".

Therefore, in this case, in a state in which the stopped symbols (jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are aligned, the next execution is performed. Variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game (variation display in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and variation display in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502) will be started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "loss" Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the special symbol 1
In the state where the stopped symbols of the symbol display unit 53 are matched, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next is started in the large symbol group 501, the small symbol group 502, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. The Rukoto.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are displayed. In a consistent state, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is the large symbol group 501,
It will start with the small pattern group 502 and the special figure 1 pattern display portion 53 .

Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is consistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next is the large symbol group 501,
It will start with the small pattern group 502 and the special figure 2 pattern display section 54 .

Next, the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is "big win" will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram (part 3) showing a display example of a special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 117 is a diagram (part 4) showing a display example of a special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 118 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of display switching timing between the special figure display on the collective display device and the special figure display on the display device of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 113(a), and FIG.
Since it is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 113(b), its description is omitted.

During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball enters the winning opening that is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the reserved memory (second execution right) of the special figure 2 game is generated, the figure 116(c
), the display device 41 changes the numerical value of the special figure 2 reservation number display 504, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display section 58.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
1), as shown in FIGS. 116(d) and 118, the display device 41 terminates the variable display and displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden.

In addition, the collective display device 50 displays the game result on the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 after the variable display ends. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the large symbol group 5
01 and the small pattern group 502 are displayed as one of the result modes of the "jackpot".
333", and the collective display device 50 makes the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 one of the result modes of the "jackpot".

Also, here, the game result is "big hit", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 0, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 1, so when the stop display time ends When the figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), the first special game state ends when the jackpot ending time ends, and the special figure 2 which is the next special figure variation display game. The variable time of the variable display game starts (t23). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the display device 41 displays a pending icon 507 corresponding to the pending memory of the special figure 2 game on the pending display 505, as shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 117( a ), the pending icon 507 at the left end of the pending display 505 performs a display that shifts to the pending digestion display 506 , and changes the numerical value of the special figure 2 pending number display 504 . In addition, the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 2 reserved display portion 58 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect (the effect of performing the display to shift the pending icon 507 at the left end of the pending display 505 to the pending digestion display 506) is the special figure 1 variable display When executing the special figure 1 fluctuation display game next to the game (Fig. 11
3(a), FIG. 113(b), FIG. 113(e), FIG. 114(a), FIG. 116(a), FIG.
6 (b)), when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (Fig. 116(e),
(See FIG. 117(a)) and the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game is the same. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Also, in the present embodiment, the pending icon 507 (
The pending digestion icon 508) has an elliptical shape, and the pending icon 507 (suspended digestion icon 508) corresponding to the pending memory of the special figure 2 game has a heptagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, the shape of the pending icon 507 (suspended digestion icon 508) corresponding to the pending storage of the special figure 1 game and the shape of the pending icon 507 (suspended digestion icon 508) corresponding to the pending storage of the special figure 2 game By making it different, the pending icon 507 being displayed has notified whether it corresponds to any of the pending memory of the special figure 1 game and the pending memory of the special figure 2 game. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, it is notified whether the pending icon 507 corresponds to the reserved memory of the special figure 1 game or the reserved memory of the special figure 2 game. You may make it

As described above, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 501 is displayed simultaneously with the start of the special game state.
And the small pattern group 502 is hidden, and then, at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time, the large pattern group 501
And the small pattern group 502 reappears. In the reappearing large symbol group 501 and small symbol group 502, first, the result of the previous special symbol variation display game is displayed. Here, since the result of the last special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 116(d)), FIG. 116(e
) and as shown in FIG. 118, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 with "333" stop-displayed appear simultaneously with the start of the variable time (t23). Since the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, from the start of the variable time until the first predetermined time has passed (t23 to t24), The display modes of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 of the collective display device 50 is the same display aspect as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (Fig. 116 (d) ) is maintained. Then, the variable display of the special figure variable display game is the first from the start of the variable time
Since it starts when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 118, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game (t21 to t24), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the display mode of special figure 2 design display part 54 do not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually increases (t24 to t25), and eventually
7(a), high-speed fluctuation (display of fluctuation at a speed that is difficult to distinguish) is performed (t25
~ t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t26). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t26 to t27), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t27-t29). In addition, as shown in FIG. 117(c), if the same pattern (identification information) is temporarily stopped in the left pattern and the right pattern, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation is started (
t28). In FIG. 118, for the sake of convenience, only the timings at which the fluctuation mode of the left symbol changes are shown as the large symbol group 501 .

On the other hand, in the small pattern group 502 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t24 to t29), the display mode of the small symbol group 502 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t24 to t29), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (here, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
9) As shown in FIGS. 117(d) and 118, the display device 41 terminates the variable display, displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 displays the game result on the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 when the variable display ends. After that, the special figure variation display game ends with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no reserved memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 117(d) is different among FIGS. 116(a) to 117(d). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 117(d), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 is one of the result modes of "hit". Then, the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 becomes one mode of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t23 to t24), the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 50 of the display device 41
The display mode 2 is the result mode of "jackpot". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. ~ t24), the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is followed by the special figure When executing the 2-variation display game, in a state in which the stopped symbols (jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (lost symbols) of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 do not match, Variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and variation display in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502) will be started.

In addition, when the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "small hit" Similarly, when executing the FIG. 2 variable display game, stop symbols (
In a state where the small winning pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 do not match, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next is a large pattern group 501 and a small pattern group. 502
, and the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 will be started.

That is, when the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "hit" is followed by the special figure. When the 2-variation display game is executed, the stopped symbols (hit symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (losing symbols) of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 do not match, The variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next is started in the large symbol group 501, the small symbol group 502, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

When the special figure 2 pattern display part 54 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 variation is next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the display game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stopped symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are aligned, At the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed (t23 to t24), the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 5
02, the result of "losing" may be displayed (the result of the previous game (result of "hit") may be displayed first, and then the result of "losing" may be displayed, or the result of the previous game may be displayed. It is also possible to display the result mode of "missing" instead of Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 "hit"
It is necessary to display the result mode of

If so, the player may have the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the reserved memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 50
1 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is started with inconsistency, so the game situation can be avoided from being erroneously recognized, and the variable display game can be smoothly progressed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, in FIGS. 119 to 121, after the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is "big hit",
The case of executing the special figure 1 variable display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram (No. 5) showing a display example of the special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 120 shows
It is a figure (the 6) which shows the display example of the special figure variation display game in the collective display apparatus of 8th Embodiment, and the display example of the special figure variation display game in the display apparatus. FIG. 121 is a diagram (Part 3) showing an example of display switching timing between the special figure display on the collective display device and the special figure display on the display device of the eighth embodiment.

Figure 119 (a) shows that during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 0 and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is one. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "123", which is one mode of the result modes of "losing". , The collective display device 50 makes the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 the result mode of "missing". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 119(a), the collective display device 5
0, the display mode of the special figure 1 pattern display portion 53 is also the result mode of "missing".

And here, the game result is "lost", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 0, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 1, so when the stop display time ends After the figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. , The numerical value of the special figure 2 reservation number display 504 is changed, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display section 58.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
starts the variable display of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the collective display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game.

During the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game ball enters the winning opening that is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the reserved memory (first execution right) of the special figure 1 game is generated, the figure 119(c
), the display device 41 changes the numerical value of the special figure 1 reserved number display 503, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved display section 52.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
1), as shown in FIGS. 119(d) and 121, the display device 41 ends the variable display and displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 . Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "333" which is one of the result modes of the "big win". , batch display device 50
, the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Also, here, the game result is "big hit", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 1, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 0, so when the stop display time ends When the figure variation display game ends, the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends, and the special figure 1 which is the next special figure variation display game. The variable time of the variable display game starts (t33). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. After that, Figure 120
As shown in (a), the pending icon 507 at the left end of the pending display 505 is the pending digestion display 5
Along with the display to shift to 06 is performed, the numerical value of the special figure 1 pending number display 503 is changed. In addition, the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved display section 52 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 501 is displayed simultaneously with the start of the special game state.
And the small pattern group 502 is hidden, and then, at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time, the large pattern group 501
And the small pattern group 502 reappears. Then, in the reappearing large symbol group 501 and small symbol group 502, first, the result of the previous special symbol variation display game is displayed. Here, since the result of the last special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 119(d)), FIG. 119(e
) and as shown in FIG. 121, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 with "333" stop-displayed appear simultaneously with the start of the variable time (t33). Since the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, from the start of the variable time until the first predetermined time has passed (t33 to t34), The display modes of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 of the collective display device 50 is the same display aspect as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (Fig. 119 (d) ) is maintained. Then, the variable display of the special figure variable display game is the first from the start of the variable time
Since it starts when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game (t31 to t34), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the display mode of special figure 2 design display part 54 do not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation time (t34), as shown in FIG. During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually increases (t34 to t35), and eventually
A high-speed fluctuation (display of fluctuation at a speed that is difficult to distinguish) as shown in 0(a) is performed (t35
~ t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t36). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t36 to t37), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. (t37-t39). In addition, as shown in FIG. 120(c), when the same pattern (identification information) is temporarily stopped in the left pattern and the right pattern, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation is started (
t38). In FIG. 121, for the sake of convenience, as the symbol group 501, only the timings at which the variation mode of the left symbol changes are shown.

On the other hand, in the small pattern group 502 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the small symbol group 502 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (here, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
9) As shown in FIGS. 120(d) and 121, the display device 41 terminates the variable display, displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 . After that, the special figure variation display game ends with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "loss",
Since there is no pending memory, it shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 120(d) is different among FIGS. 119(a) to 120(d). Specifically, when the game result is "win", in FIG. 120(d), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 is changed to one of the "win" result modes. Then, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 is set to one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t33 to t34), the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 50 of the display device 41
The display mode 2 is the result mode of "jackpot". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "loss", as shown in FIGS. ~t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is next to the special figure In the case of executing the 1-variation display game, in a state in which the stopped symbols (jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 do not match the stopped symbols (lost symbols) of the special 1 symbol display section 53, Variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and variation display in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "small hit" Similarly, when the FIG. 1 variable display game is executed, stop symbols (
In a state in which the small winning pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next is the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group. 502
, and the special figure 1 pattern display portion 53 will be started.

That is, when the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure When executing the 1-variation display game, in a state in which the stopped symbols (hit symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 do not match the stopped symbols (losing symbols) of the special symbol 1 symbol display section 53, The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next is started in the large symbol group 501, the small symbol group 502, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

When the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 variation is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the display game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stopped symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are aligned, At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed (t33 to t34), the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 5
02, the result of "losing" may be displayed (the result of the previous game (result of "hit") may be displayed first, and then the result of "losing" may be displayed, or the result of the previous game may be displayed. It is also possible to display the result mode of "missing" instead of Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 "hit"
It is necessary to display the result mode of

If so, the player may have the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the reserved memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 50
1 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started while inconsistent, so the game situation can be avoided from being erroneously recognized, and the variable display game can be smoothly progressed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is "normal jackpot" will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. FIG. FIG. 122 shows the eighth
It is a diagram (part 7) showing a display example of the special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 123 is a diagram (No. 8) showing a display example of a special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of display switching timing between the special figure display on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and the special figure display on the display device (part 4
).

FIG. 122(a) shows that during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 1 and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 0. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "123", which is one mode of the result modes of "lose". , The collective display device 50 makes the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 122(a), the batch display device 5
0, the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, the game result is "lost", the number of reserved memories for the special figure 1 game is 1, and the number of reserved memories for the special figure 2 game is 0, so when the stop display time ends After the figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. , The numerical value of the special figure 1 reservation number display 503 is changed, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display part 52.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
starts the variable display of the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the collective display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game. During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball enters the winning opening that is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the reserved memory (second execution right) of the special figure 2 game is generated, the figure As shown in 122(c), the display device 41
Changes the numerical value of the special figure 2 reservation number display 504, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
1), as shown in FIGS. 122(d) and 124, the display device 41 terminates the variable display, displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 . Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "222", which is one of the results modes of the "normal big win". The collective display device 50 makes the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, the game result is "normal jackpot", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 0, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 1, so when the stop display time ends The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t43). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the display device 41 displays a pending icon 507 corresponding to the pending memory of the special figure 2 game on the pending display 505, as shown in FIG. , FIG. 123(a)
As shown in , the display to move the pending icon 507 at the left end of the pending display 505 to the pending digestion display 506 is performed, and the numerical value of the special figure 2 pending number display 504 is changed. again,
The collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 2 reserved display portion 58 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 501 is displayed simultaneously with the start of the special game state.
And the small pattern group 502 is hidden, and then, at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time, the large pattern group 501
And the small pattern group 502 reappears. In the reappearing large symbol group 501 and small symbol group 502, first, the result of the previous special symbol variation display game is displayed. Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222" (see FIG. 122(d)), FIG. 122(e
) and as shown in FIG. 124, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 with "222" stop-displayed appear simultaneously with the start of the variable time (t43). Since the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t43 to t44). The display modes of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 of the collective display device 50 is the same display aspect as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (Fig. 122 (d) ) is maintained. Then, the variable display of the special figure variable display game is the first from the start of the variable time
Since it starts when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 124, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game (t41 to t44), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the display mode of special figure 2 design display part 54 do not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. 124, the large pattern group 501 of the display device 41 initially performs low-speed variation (variation display at an identifiable speed). During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually increases (t44 to t45), and eventually the
A high-speed fluctuation (display of fluctuation at a speed that is difficult to distinguish) as shown in 3(a) is performed (t45
~t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 123(b), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t46). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. (t47-t49). In addition, as shown in FIG. 123(c), if the same pattern (identification information) is temporarily stopped in the left pattern and the right pattern, the reach state is reached and the reach variation starts (
t48). In FIG. 124, for the sake of convenience, only the timings at which the fluctuation mode of the left symbol changes are shown as the large symbol group 501 .

On the other hand, in the small pattern group 502 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t44 to t49), the display mode of the small pattern group 502 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t44 to t49), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (here, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "changing".

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
9) As shown in FIGS. 123(d) and 124, the display device 41 terminates the variable display, displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 . After that, the special figure variation display game ends with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "loss",
Since there is no pending memory, it shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 123(d) is different among FIGS. 122(a) to 123(d). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 123(d), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 is one of the result modes of "hit". Then, the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 becomes one mode of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 124, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 on the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal jackpot". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed in the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", as shown in FIGS. 122 to 124,
At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit".

Therefore, in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed, the result is "normal big hit" next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the stopped symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and variation display in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502) will be started. .

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the result is the "probable variable big hit" next to the special figure 1 variable display game. Similarly, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the stopped symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are displayed. In the inconsistent state, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next is the large symbol group 501
, the small pattern group 502, and the special figure 2 pattern display portion 54 will be started.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big win" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big win" different from the first big win. When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the large symbol group 501
And the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next in a state where the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbol (first jackpot symbol) of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 do not match will be started in the large symbol group 501, the small symbol group 502, and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54.

Here, one of the "regular jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the invention is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot",
When one of the ``7R jackpot'' and the ``2R jackpot'' is set as the ``first jackpot'' and the other one is set as the ``second jackpot'', the next game is played in a state where the stop symbols are not consistent. is started.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" next to the special figure 1 variable display game When executing the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to start the variation display in a state where the stopped symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are aligned , At the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), large symbol group 5
01 and the small pattern group 502 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit" (the previous game result (result mode of "normal big hit") may be displayed, and then the result mode of "variable probability big hit" may be displayed,
Instead of displaying the result of the previous game, it is possible to display the result mode of the "variable probability big hit"). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next (t43 to t4
In 4), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54.

If so, the player may have the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the reserved memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 50
1 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is started with inconsistency, so the game situation can be avoided from being erroneously recognized, and the variable display game can be smoothly progressed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal jackpot, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state is reached.

Next, the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is "normal jackpot" will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. FIG. 125 shows the eighth
It is a diagram (part 9) showing a display example of the special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 126 is a diagram (No. 10) showing a display example of the special figure variation display game on the collective display device of the eighth embodiment and a display example of the special figure variation display game on the display device. FIG. 127 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of display switching timing between the special figure display on the collective display device and the special figure display on the display device of the eighth embodiment.

Figure 125 (a) shows that during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 0 and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is one. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "123", which is one mode of the result modes of "losing". , The collective display device 50 makes the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 125(a), the collective display device 5
0, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 is one mode of the result mode of "probability variation big hit".

And here, the game result is "lost", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 0, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 1, so when the stop display time ends After the figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. , The numerical value of the special figure 2 reservation number display 504 is changed, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display section 58.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
starts the variable display of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, and the collective display device 50 starts the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game.

During the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game ball enters the winning opening that is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the reserved memory (first execution right) of the special figure 1 game is generated, the figure 125(c
), the display device 41 changes the numerical value of the special figure 1 reserved number display 503, and the collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved display section 52.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
1), as shown in FIGS. 125(d) and 127, the display device 41 terminates the variable display and displays the game result in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 . Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display device 41 sets the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 to "222", which is one of the results modes of the "normal big win". The collective display device 50 makes the display mode of the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, the game result is "big hit", the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is 1, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is 0, so when the stop display time ends When the figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), the first special game state ends when the jackpot ending time ends, and the special figure 1 which is the next special figure variation display game. The variable time of the variable display game starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, the display device 41 displays a pending icon 507 corresponding to the pending memory of the special figure 1 game on the pending display 505, as shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 126(a), the display of the pending icon 507 at the left end of the pending display 505 is displayed to shift to the pending digestion display 506, and the display mode of the special figure 1 pending number display 503 is changed. again,
The collective display device 50 changes the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved display portion 52 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 501 is displayed simultaneously with the start of the special game state.
And the small pattern group 502 is hidden, and then, at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time, the large pattern group 501
And the small pattern group 502 reappears. In the reappearing large symbol group 501 and small symbol group 502, first, the result of the previous special symbol variation display game is displayed. Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222" (see FIG. 125(d)), FIG. 125(e
) and as shown in FIG. 127, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 with "222" stop-displayed appear simultaneously with the start of the variable time (t53). Since the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, from the start of the variable time until the first predetermined time has passed (t53 to t54), The display modes of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 of the collective display device 50 is the same display aspect as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (Fig. 125 (d) ) is maintained. Then, the variable display of the special figure variable display game is the first from the start of the variable time
Since it starts when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 127, from the start of the stop display time to the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game (t51 to t54), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the display mode of special figure 2 design display part 54 do not change.

When the first predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually increases (t54 to t55), and eventually the
A high-speed fluctuation (display of fluctuation at a speed that is difficult to distinguish) as shown in 6(a) is performed (t55
~t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(b), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t56). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. (t57-t59). In addition, as shown in FIG. 126(c), if the same pattern (identification information) is temporarily stopped in the left pattern and the right pattern, the reach state is entered and the reach variation starts (
t58). In FIG. 127, for the sake of convenience, the large symbol group 501 shows only the timings at which the fluctuation mode of the left symbol changes.

On the other hand, in the small pattern group 502 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t54 to t59), the display mode of the small pattern group 502 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (t54 to t59), the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (here, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
9) As shown in FIGS. 126(d) and 127, the display device 41 displays the game results in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 after the variable display is completed, and suspends the pending completion display 506. The digestion icon 508 is hidden. In addition, the collective display device 50 ends the variable display and displays the game result on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 . After that, the special figure variation display game ends with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "loss",
Since there is no start memory, it shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 126(d) is different among FIGS. 125(a) to 126(d). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", in FIG. 126(d), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 is one of the result modes of "hit". Then, the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 becomes one mode of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display mode of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 on the display device 41 is the "normal jackpot" result mode. Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is "probability variation big hit", as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127,
At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit".

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the stopped symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and variation display in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502) will be started. .

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" next to the special figure 2 variable display game Similarly, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the stopped symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are displayed. In the inconsistent state, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is the large symbol group 501
, the small pattern group 502 and the special figure 1 pattern display portion 53 will be started.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big win" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big win" different from the first big win. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the large symbol group 501
And the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next in a state where the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbol (first jackpot symbol) of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 do not match is started in the large symbol group 501, the small symbol group 502 and the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53.

Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot",
When one of the ``7R jackpot'' and the ``2R jackpot'' is set as the ``first jackpot'' and the other one is set as the ``second jackpot'', the next game is played in a state where the stop symbols are not consistent. is started.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When executing the special figure 1 variable display game, in order to start the variation display in a state where the stopped symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are aligned , At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), large symbol group 5
01 and the small pattern group 502 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit" (the previous game result (result mode of "normal big hit") may be displayed, and then the result mode of "variable probability big hit" may be displayed,
Instead of displaying the result of the previous game, it is possible to display the result mode of the "variable probability big hit"). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t5
In 4), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the reserved memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the large symbol group 50
1 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 are inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started with inconsistency, so the game situation can be avoided from being erroneously recognized, and the variable display game can be smoothly progressed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the large pattern of the display device 41 Group 5
01 and small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 are matched, the special figure 1 variable display is performed while the matching state is maintained. The variable display of the game is started, and if it is not consistent, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the state of non-matching, so that the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the large pattern group 501 and the small pattern group 50 of the display device 41
2 stop pattern and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 are matched, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed while the matching state is maintained. start and
If it is not consistent, since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game is started in the state of non-matching, the progress of the game can be performed smoothly.

Hereinafter, when the stop symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 are consistent at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game The case where the stopped symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 are matched at the start is simply referred to as "matching case".

Also, when the stop symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 do not match at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game The case where the stopped symbols of the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 and the stopped symbols of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 are not matched at the start is simply referred to as "unmatched case".

In the above description, as an example of "if consistent", when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation Although the case of executing the display game has been mentioned, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, when the result mode of "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "big hit" is followed by the special figure. 2
When the variation display game is executed, or when the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variation in which the result is "missing" When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the display game, it is also "matched".

Also, in the above description, as an example of "if not consistent", in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 "missing" result mode is displayed stop and the result is "
If the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game that is "hit" (Fig. 11
6 to FIG. 118) and the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "hit" When executing the special figure 1 fluctuation display game next (see FIGS. 119 to 121), and the collective display device 50
Special figure 2 variation display next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result mode of "first big win" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and the result is "second big win" When the game is executed (see FIGS. 122 to 124), and when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50, the result is "second 2 jackpot" special figure 2 fluctuation display game followed by special figure 1 fluctuation display game (see FIGS. 125 to 127) was mentioned, but "cases that are not consistent" are these cases is not limited to For example, when the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "hit" and the result is "lost", the special figure 1 variable display game is followed by the special figure 2. When a variable display game is executed, or when the result mode of "one of the big win or the small win" is displayed in the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "big win Or when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game which is the other of the small hits, it is also "not consistent".

Here, the large symbol group 501 starts low-speed variation (starts variable display) in the order of left, right, and middle symbols, and then starts high-speed variation (low-speed variation) simultaneously for left, left, and middle symbols. change)
After that, the high speed fluctuation is ended (low speed fluctuation is started) in the order of the left design, the right design and the middle design.

As shown in FIGS. 115, 118, 121, 124 and 127, the effect control device 30
0 (
In order to make the display mode according to the desired result mode), the symbols (identification information) of the large symbol group 501 are set at the start of the high speed variation (t15, t25, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of the high speed variation. Replace with (t16, t26, t36, t46, t56).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 115, 118, and 121, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333", so the variation display starting from "333" starts (t14, t2
4, t34). Then, the effect control device 300, at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol group 501 (t
15, t25, t35), a first replacement process is executed to replace the variable display starting with "333" with a variable display starting with a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123"). Also, at the end of the high-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 (t16, t26, t36), the variation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed as the game result and the remaining variation time (t16-t19, t26-t).
29, t36 to t39) and fluctuation patterns (whether or not a reach state has occurred, etc.) and the like, and the second replacement process is executed to replace with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward.

Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 124 and 127, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222
', the variable display starting from '222' starts (t44, t54). and,
At the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol group 501 (t45, t55), the effect control device 300, "2
22” is replaced with a variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, “123”). In addition, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol group 501 (t46, t56), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed as the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t46-t49, t56-t59), and the fluctuation pattern (reach A second replacement process is executed for replacing with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the presence or absence of occurrence of a state, etc.). Execution of these replacement processes is reserved in, for example, variable command processing.

In order to stop display a desired result mode in the large symbol group 501, it is possible to replace the symbols of the large symbol group 501 during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the large pattern group 50
There is a risk that the player will notice that the pattern of 1 has been replaced, and the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, by replacing the symbols of the large symbol group 501 during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the symbols of the large symbol group 501 have been replaced.

The timing for replacing the symbols in the large symbol group 501 can be appropriately changed if the large symbol group 501 is in high speed fluctuation.
Also, the number of times the symbols in the large symbol group 501 are replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times that the symbols in the large symbol group 501 are replaced may be one, and in that case,
It is preferable to execute only the second replacement process without executing the first replacement process. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 (or after the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 and before the end of the high-speed variation) and large pattern group 501
), the variable display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure variable display game is replaced with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the game result etc. Second replacement Processing should be performed. Also, if the number of times the symbols in the large symbol group 501 are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process should be the second replacement process.

Further, the large symbol group 501 may be subjected to the ready-to-win fluctuation directly from the high-speed fluctuation without going through the low-speed fluctuation instead of performing the ready-to-win fluctuation via the low-speed fluctuation from the high-speed fluctuation. If the low-speed fluctuation is not passed, for example, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation, the symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the large symbol group 501 (for example, the left and right symbols) are replaced with the desired ready-to-win state (desired ready-to-win symbol). A replacement process may be performed.

On the other hand, in the small pattern group 502, the left, right, and medium symbols start high-speed fluctuation (start fluctuation display) at the same time. display).

As shown in FIGS. 115, 118, 121, 124 and 127, the effect control device 30
0, in order to stop display the desired result mode (here "424") in the small symbol group 502,
The pattern (identification information) of the small pattern group 502 is changed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29, t39, t
49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols, the small symbol group 50
2 is configured to perform a third replacement process of replacing the symbols stopped and displayed in the second row with a desired result mode. Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process.

The timing for replacing the symbols of the small symbol group 502 can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbol group 502 is changing at high speed. When the symbols of the small symbol group 502 are replaced at a timing other than when the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol group 502 ends, the first replacement process of replacing the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode may be executed. Alternatively, a second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from a result mode calculated backward based on the game result, the remaining variable time, the variable pattern, or the like.

When executing the second replacement process for replacing the symbols of the small symbol group 502, the third replacement process need not be performed when the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol group 502 ends.
Also, when executing the first replacement process for replacing the symbols of the small symbol group 502, the second replacement process for replacing the symbols of the small symbol group 502 is performed after the first replacement process. Alternatively, it is preferable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol group 502 .

Also, the number of times that the symbols in the small symbol group 502 are replaced may be one time or a plurality of times. If the number of times the small symbol group 502 is replaced is 1, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. . Also, if the number of times the symbols in the small symbol group 502 are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is "matched" (for example, t13 to t14) and "not matched" (for example, t23
t24, t33-t34, t43-t44, t53-t54).

In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (for example, t14 to t15) and "not matched" (for example, t24 to t2
5, t34-t35, t44-t45, t54-t55).

Also, the time from the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 to the end of the high-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 is "matched" (for example, t15 to t16) and "not matched".
(eg, t25-t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the low-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 to the end of the low-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 is "matched" (for example, t16 to t17) and "not matched".
(eg, t26-t27, t36-t37, t46-t47, t56-t57).

Further, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol group 501 to the start of the reach variation of the large symbol group 501 is "matched" (for example, t17 to t18) and "not matched". (For example, t27-t28, t37-t38, t47-t48, t57-t58)
is the same as

In addition, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol group 501 to the end of the fluctuation display is "matched" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matched" (eg, t
28-t29, t38-t39, t48-t49, t58-t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the start of the high speed variation of the large symbol group 501, and the time from the start of the high speed variation of the large symbol group 501 to the large symbol group The time until the end of the high-speed variation of 501, the time from the start of the low-speed variation of the large symbol group 501 to the end of the low-speed variation of the large symbol group 501, and the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol group 501 to the large symbol group 501. and the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol group 501 to the end of the fluctuation display, each time is "matched" and "not matched". By making them the same, the variation time when starting the variable display in the inconsistent state and the varying time when starting the variable display in the matching state can be made the same. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern).

It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between the "matching case" and the "mismatching case". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game cannot be smoothly progressed in some cases, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment has the effect of making the game more interesting.

The gaming machine 10 executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and enters a special game state when the result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode. , and as a variable display game, the first variation based on the establishment of the first start condition among the start conditions (winning to the winning opening that is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) First variable display means (special figure 1
Symbol display unit 53) and, as a variation display game, a second variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions (winning a winning opening that is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54). Second variation display means (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) capable of displaying (special figure 2 variation display game),
Game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the first variable display means and the second variable display means
), and a large pattern group (large pattern group 5
01), and a small pattern group (small pattern group 502) that variably displays identification patterns (symbols) that are smaller than the large pattern group corresponding to the variable display game, and effect display means (display device 41) that can display. , effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means, and when the second variable display game is executed next to the first variable display game, at the start of the second variable display game ,
There is a case where the result mode stop-displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the large pattern group (and/or the small pattern group) stop-displayed on the effect display means do not match. In this case, the game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game without performing the process to make these result modes consistent, and the effect control means starts the second variable display game. It is configured to start the variable display of identification symbols in the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) corresponding to the 2-variation display game (see FIGS. 116, 117, 122 and 123).

Therefore, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41),
When the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) does not match, the second variation display game and the second variation display game are handled in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 119, 120, 125 and 126).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41), When the stop symbol of the second variation display means (the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is not consistent, the second variation display game and the second variation display game are supported in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if there is no match, the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a special result mode ("hit" result mode). At the end of the generated special game state, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is a result mode ("lost" result mode) other than the special result mode. And, the number of starting memories (reserved memories of special figure 1 game) that is the right to execute the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is 0, and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game)
The number of starting memory (reserved memory of the special figure 2 game) that is the right to execute is 1 or more, in which case the game control means (game control device 100) is the special game state After the end, from the state in which the result mode other than the special result mode is stopped and displayed in the second variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300). After the end of the special game state, as the variable display of the identifying symbols in the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) corresponding to the second variable display game, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started. (Figs. 116, 117, 1
22, see FIG. 123).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the effect display means (display device 41)
If the stopped symbol is a winning symbol and the stopped symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is a lost symbol, the second variation display game and the second variation remain in that state. Since the variable display of the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) corresponding to the display game can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the game can be more interesting.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 119, 120, 125 and 126).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. symbol and the stopped symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is a missing symbol, the second variation display game and the second variation display game are performed in that state. Since the variable display of the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) can be started, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is changed to the special result mode is not limited to the "winning" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of the "big win" among the result modes of the "hit", or only the result mode of the "minor win" among the result modes of the "hit". It may be only the result mode of "variable probability big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". Alternatively, it may be only the result mode of "10R jackpot" among the result modes of "hit", or the result mode of "hit" may be "
It may be only the result mode of "7R hit", or "2R hit" among the result modes of "hit"
It may be only the result aspect of.

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 100) stores the starting memory that is the right to execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the starting memory that is the right to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is configured to execute the 2-variation display game with priority over the special figure 1-variation display game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, if the number of special 2 reservations (the number of reserved memories of the special 2 game) is 1 or more, the number of special 1 reservations (the number of reserved memories of the special 1 game) is not 0 (i.e. special figure 1
The number of reservations may be 1 or more).

That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game) became the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of special figures 2 games' pending memories) is 1 or more, but
It is not necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories (reserved memories of the special figure 1 game) that is the right to execute the first variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game) is 0.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, the number of special figures 1 reserved must be 1 or more, and the number of special figures 2 reserved must be 0.

That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The condition that the number of special figure 2 game reserved memories) is 0" and "starting memory (special figure 1 game reserved memory) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) number is 1 or more".

The gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game became the special result mode is terminated. Sometimes, the special figure 2 reservation number is 1 or more, and the special figure 1 reservation number needs to be 0.

That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game) has changed to the special result mode, the "start memory that becomes the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) (
The condition that the number of special figure 1 game reserved memories) is 0" and "starting memory (special figure 2 game reserved memory) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) number is 1 or more".

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode At the end of , if the special figure 1 reservation number is 1 or more, the special figure 2 reservation number may not be 0 (that is, the special figure 2 reservation number may be 1 or more).

That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) became the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) (
It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of special figures 1 game's pending memory) is 1 or more, but
It is not necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories (reserved memories of the special figure 2 game) that is the right to execute the first fluctuation display game (the special figure 2 variation display game) is 0.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variation display game (one of a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game) and a second variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game). (the other of the games) in order of winning.

In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more". or "the earliest starting memory among the starting memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that it is a starting memory that is

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and a start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game. In the state, the variable display game in the order of memory (special figure variable display game)
can be configured to run

In the case of such a configuration, when the result mode of the first variation display game is not matched, the second variation display means stop-displays at the end of the special game state that occurs when the result mode of the first variation display game becomes the special result mode. The result mode is a result mode other than the special result mode, the number of starting memories to be the right to execute the first variable display game is 0, and the number of starting memories to be the right to execute the second variable display game is zero. When the number is 1 or more, and when the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is the special result mode. A result mode other than a mode, the number of starting memories to be the right to execute the first variable display game is 1 or more, and the number of starting memories to be the right to execute the second variable display game is 1
and the case where the first stored starting memory is the starting memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game, and in these cases, the game control means After the end of the special game state, the second variable display means starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game from a state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result modes other than the special result mode, and the effect control means, After the end of the special game state, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started as the variable display of the identifying symbols in the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) corresponding to the second variable display game. be able to.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is the winning symbol. When the stopped symbol of the second variable display means is a lost symbol, the second variable display game and the large symbol group (and/or the small symbol group) corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification symbol (symbol) when performing the variable display of the identification symbol (symbol) in the large symbol group. can be converted into a low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are identifiable and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are difficult to identify, and the variation display of the identification symbols in the large symbol group corresponding to the second variation display game is started. to the start of the low-speed variation display mode through the high-speed variation display mode is the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the stop display on the effect display means at the start of the second variable display game. The result mode of the displayed large pattern group is consistent (t14 to t16) and is not consistent (t24 to t26, t34 to t36, t4
4 to t46, t54 to t56).

With this configuration, the fluctuation time can be the same between when the variable display is started in the inconsistent state and when the variable display is started in the consistent state.
Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of the identification information (symbol) to the start of the low-speed variation through the high-speed variation is different between the "matching case" and the "mismatching case". , the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the identification pattern when performing the variable display of the identification pattern (symbol) in the small pattern group. can be converted to a difficult-to-identify high-speed fluctuation display mode, and from the start of the fluctuation display of the identification pattern in the small pattern group corresponding to the second fluctuation display game to the end of the fluctuation display through the high-speed fluctuation display form. time (t14-t19, t24-t29, t34-t3
9, t44 to t49, t54 to t59), at the start of the second variable display game, the result mode statically displayed on the second variable display means and the small pattern group statically displayed on the effect display means. When the result mode is consistent (t14 to t19) and when it is not consistent (t24
t29, t34-t39, t44-t49, t54-59).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation time to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and in the case where the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to the configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of information (symbols) to the stop of the variable display through high-speed fluctuation is different between "matching" and "not matching",
It is possible to reduce the processing load.

In this embodiment, both the large symbol group and the small symbol group are displayed, but only one of the large symbol group and the small symbol group may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the large pattern group and the small pattern group are displayed, a mode in which the large pattern group is displayed but the small pattern group is not displayed, and a mode in which the small pattern group is displayed and the large pattern group is not displayed. There may be

In the game machine 10, the game control device 100 may not notify the effect control device 300 of the stop symbol of the special figure variation display game when the predetermined condition is established. For example, in the game machine 10, when the power is restored in the customer waiting state, the game control device 100 does not notify the effect control device 300 of the stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game. In the case where such a game control device 100 does not notify the effect control device 300 of the stop pattern of the special figure variation display game, the effect control device 300 sets a preset "loose stop pattern (for example, left pattern "1", middle Initial values such as symbol “2” and right symbol “3”)” can be displayed on the display device 41 . At this time, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, if the previous stop pattern was hit (for example, the left pattern "3", the middle pattern "3", the right pattern "3", etc.), the previous time When the variable display is started from the special symbol variable display game in which the stop symbol is a hit, the variable display is started from the combination of symbols in which the decorative symbols are lost, which may cause inconsistency. Similarly, the effect control device 300 can display a preset "hit stop symbol (eg, initial values of left symbol "3", middle symbol "3", right symbol "3", etc.)" on the display device 41. is. At this time, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the previous stop pattern is removed (for example, the left pattern "1", the middle pattern "
2", the initial value of the right symbol "3", etc.), when the variable display is started from the special symbol variation display game in which the last stop symbol was lost, the decorative symbol is hit and the variation display is performed from the symbol combination. start and can cause inconsistencies. Even in such a case, the gaming machine 10
By allowing the inconsistency that occurs when switching decorative patterns corresponding to the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the progress of the game can be performed smoothly.

[Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to seventh embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. is. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to seventh embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted. It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game cannot be smoothly progressed in some cases, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. The gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can execute the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 . Then, the game control device 100 displays the state of the special figure 1 variation display game (display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game) by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50. And, the state display of the special figure 2 variation display game (display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game) is displayed in parallel (see FIG. 112).

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be those that make it possible to execute the game exclusively in the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation The display game may be one that allows the game to be executed alternately regardless of the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or one of them has priority over the other (for example, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the special figure 1 fluctuation display (preferred to the game) to make it executable. Also, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be allowed to be executed at the same time. In any case, the gaming machine 10 allows the game to proceed smoothly by allowing inconsistencies that occur when switching the decoration patterns corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. can.

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
Display control of the variable display of decorative symbols (identifying symbols in the large symbol group or identifying symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to either the variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game (Fig. 1
13 to 114, etc.). The effect control device 300 may display both the large pattern group and the small pattern group on the display device 41, or may display only one of them.

The effect control device 300 comprises a decorative pattern including a symbol portion having identifiability as a pattern due to non-character attributes and a number portion having identifiability as a pattern due to character attributes, and thick outline display of the symbol portion. The width (size) and the thickness of the contour display of the number portion can be changed independently (see FIG. 19, etc.). That is, the effect control device 300 controls the thickness of the contour display of the symbol portion,
The thickness of the outline display of the number part may be changed at the same time, or the thickness of the outline display of the symbol part and
The thickness of the contour display of the number portion may be changed at different timings. In addition, production control device 3
For 00, only the thickness of the outline display of the symbol portion may be changed, or only the thickness of the outline display of the number portion may be changed.

Note that the effect control device 300 may change the thickness of the outline display of the symbol portion and the thickness of the outline display of the number portion according to a predetermined variable display state. For example, the effect control device 300 increases the thickness of the outline display of the symbol portion and the thickness of the outline display of the number portion (for example, one thickness) while the symbols are stopped (except for the temporary stop), and during the symbol fluctuation. (Except during temporary stop), the thickness of the outline display of the symbol part and the thickness of the outline display of the number part are thinned (for example, the thickness is 2nd thinner than the first thickness), and the outline of the symbol part is reduced during temporary stop The thickness of the display is reduced (eg, double thickness), and the thickness of the outline display of the number portion is increased (eg, single thickness). In addition, the effect control device 300 may change the thickness of the outline display of the symbol part and the thickness of the outline display of the number part according to the expectation for the game result (for example, to produce a high expectation). thicker when playing, thinner when producing a low expectation), and may be switched according to the game state (for example, thicker when the player is in an advantageous game state and thinner when the player is in a disadvantageous state).

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
By executing the special figure 2 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game are invalid. When matching, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, or One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) starts from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the other is special figure 2 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

Effect control device 300, special figure 2 based on the command received from the game control device 100
By executing the special figure 1 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game are invalid. In the case of matching, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, or One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) is started from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the other is the special figure 1 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment performs the symbol display control described in the eighth embodiment and the symbol display control (for example, outline control) described in the first embodiment. Combinations are applicable. Further, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment applies the combination of the symbol display control described in the eighth embodiment and the symbol display control (for example, outline control) described in the first embodiment. Alternatively, the combination application of the symbol display control described in the eighth embodiment and the symbol display control (for example, symbol loss) described in the third embodiment is also possible.

The gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), and has a main control unit ( A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed in parallel on the first display device (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) can be alternatively variably displayed on the second display device (display device 41). The subordinate control unit includes a first identification component (symbol unit) having an identification power capable of specifying the third identification information by a first attribute (non-character attribute);
The third identification information includes a second identification component (number part) having identification power that can be specified by a second attribute (character attribute), and the thickness of the outline display of the first identification component and the second By making it possible to independently change the thickness of the outline display of the identification component (FIG. 19, etc.) and executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, the second variable display game is executed. When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game are inconsistent, the variation display of the second variation display game is changed to the second variation display game. Starting from the third identification information displayed corresponding to one variation display game (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.), the first variation display game is executed after the second variation display game based on the command received from the main control unit. By doing so, when the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game are inconsistent, the second variation display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 119 to 1
21 etc.).

(2) The third identification information of (1) includes a first symbol display (large symbol group) and a second symbol display (small symbol group).
(3) The slave control unit of (2) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, and the first symbol display and the second variation display game are displayed. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(4) The slave control unit of (2) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the first symbol display and the first variation display game displayed corresponding to the second variation display game. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(5) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed and controlled by the first display means (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) to the second display means (display device 41)
, it is possible to perform variable display control alternatively. The sub-control unit converts the third identification information into a first identification component (symbol portion) having an identification power that can be specified by a first attribute (non-character attribute), and the third identification information by a second attribute (character attribute). and a second identification component (number portion) having an identifiable power (FIG. 19, etc.), and based on the command received from the main control unit, the second variation display game is performed after the first variation display game. By executing, if the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game are inconsistent, the second variation The variable display of the display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

[Modification 2 of the eighth embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to eighth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51). is. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to seventh embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted. It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game cannot be smoothly progressed in some cases, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. The gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 2 of the eighth embodiment has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can execute the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (including game control devices 100 a and 100 b ) and an effect control device 300 . Then, the game control device 100 includes the collective display device 5
State display of special figure 1 variation display game (display corresponding to special figure 1 variation display game) and status display of special figure 2 variation display game by special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of 0 (
Display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed in parallel (see FIG. 112).

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be those that allow the game to be executed exclusively in the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation The display game may be one that allows the game to be executed alternately regardless of the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or one of which is given priority over the other (for example, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a special figure 1 fluctuation display (preferred to the game) to make it executable. Also, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be allowed to be executed at the same time. In any case, the gaming machine 10 allows the game to progress smoothly by allowing inconsistencies that occur when the decorative patterns corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are switched. can.

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
Display control of variable display of decorative symbols (identifying symbols in the large symbol group or identifying symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to either the variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game (Fig. 1
13 to 114, etc.). The effect control device 300 may display both the large pattern group and the small pattern group on the display device 41, or may display only one of them.

Also, the game machine 10 may have the game features of the third embodiment. As described above in the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes first winning derivation means (eg, game control device 100a, effect control device 300, display device 830) and second winning derivation means (eg, game control Device 100a, production control device 300, display device 830) and control means (for example, game control device 100a). The first winning derivation means assigns a first execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 1 game) that can be acquired based on the winning to the first start prize area (for example, start prize opening 36, start opening 1). A specific area (for example, specific area 96) from the result (for example, big hit of special figure 1 game) of the first variation display game (for example, special figure 1 game) that can be stored with the number of 1 (for example, 4) as the upper limit (For example, the specific area switch 38
The first hit (for example, special game state, opening of special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1)) can be derived without conditional on detection of game ball by e). The second winning derivation means is a second execution right (for example, a special figure 2 game starting memory) can be stored up to a second number (for example, one) smaller than the first number, and the result of the second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 game) that can be stored (for example, special figure 2 Game small win, special variable winning device 95
It is possible to derive a second win (for example, special game state, opening of special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1)) from (opening of big winning opening 2)) on the condition of winning in a specific area. The control means are
After the end of the first win, a transition is made from a second start winning non-easy state in which winning to the second start winning region is not easy to a second start winning easy state in which winning to the second start winning region is easy, and Two or more execution rights of the second variation display game can be obtained in the start easy winning state, a second winning is derived based on one execution right of the two or more execution rights of the second variation display game, and 2
Execution of two or more execution rights of the second variable display game in a second start non-easy winning state transitioned from the second easy winning state after the end of the second win derived in the easy starting winning state The second win can be derived based on the right (see FIG. 32).

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
By executing the special figure 2 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game are invalid. In the case of matching, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 1 variable display game. One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) starts from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the other is the special figure 2 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

Effect control device 300, special figure 2 based on the command received from the game control device 100
By executing the special figure 1 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game are invalid. In the case of matching, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) starts from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the other is the special figure 1 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

Also, the game machine 10 may have the game features of the fourth embodiment in place of the game features of the third embodiment. As described above in the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 1
0 is the first per derivation means (for example, the game control device 100b, the effect control device 300, the display device 830), the second per derivation means (for example, the game control device 100b, the effect control device 3
00, display device 830) and first start winning conversion control means (for example, game control device 100
b), first winning derivation conversion control means (eg, game control device 100b), second winning derivation conversion control means (eg, game control device 100b), control means (eg, game control device 100b), including. The first winning derivation means is a first variable display game that can be executed based on a winning in a first start winning area (for example, start winning port 36 (starting port 1), normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 3)). (For example, special figure 1 game) From the result (for example, special figure 1 game jackpot), it is possible to derive the first win (for example, opening of special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1)). The second winning derivation means provides a second variable display game (for example, special It is possible to derive the second win (for example, the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 (big prize winning opening 1)) from the result of the FIG. The first start winning conversion control means has a first start winning easy state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) in which winning in the first starting winning region is easy and a first start winning non-easy state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) , closed state of the normal variable winning device 37). The first winning derivation conversion control means is
It is possible to convert the first winning easy state (eg, special figure 1 game high probability) and the first winning non-easy state (eg, special figure 1 game low probability) where the first winning is easy to derive. The second winning derivation conversion control means is a second winning easy state (for example, special figure 2 game high probability) in which the second winning is easy to derive and a second winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 2 game low probability) that is not easy ) can be converted to The control means includes a first start winning non-easy state (for example, normal variable winning device 37 closed state), a first winning non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability) and a second winning non-easy state (for example, Special figure 2 game low probability) is the first game state (for example, normal game state)
In the first, the derivation of the first hit is easier than the second hit, and the transition is made after the first game state.
A second game state (for example, a special game state A that is a start winning non-easy state, a first winning easy state (for example, a special figure 1 game high probability) and a second winning easy state (for example, a special figure 2 game high probability) ) makes it easier to derive the second win than the first win, and transitions after the second game state, the first start easy winning state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) and the first easy winning state and In the third game state (for example, special game state B), which is the second easy win state, the derivation of the first win is made easier than in the second win (FIGS. 53 and 54).

The gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the eighth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), and has a main control unit ( A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed in parallel on the first display device (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) can be alternatively variably displayed on the second display device (display device 41). The main control unit stores the first execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 1 game) that can be acquired based on the winning in the first start prize area (for example, the start prize mouth 36, the start mouth 1). The number (for example, 4) is the upper limit and the result of the first variation display game (for example, the special figure 1 game) that can be stored (for example, the special figure 1 game jackpot) to the specific area (for example, the specific area 96) Winning a prize (for example, specific area switch 3
8e (detection of game ball by 8e)), making it possible to derive the first hit (for example, special game state, opening of special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 1)), second start different from first start winning area A second execution right (for example, starting memory of special figure 2 game) that can be acquired based on winning in the winning area (for example, normal variable winning device 37, starting gate 2) is set to a second number smaller than the first number (
For example, a second variable display game that can be stored with an upper limit of 1 (for example, special figure 2 game)
(For example, a small hit in a special figure 2 game, opening of a special variable winning device 95 (large winning opening 2)) to a second hit (for example, a special game state, a special variable winning device 38 (opening of the large winning opening 1)) can be drawn out, and it is easy to win a prize to the second start winning area from a second start winning non-easy state in which it is not easy to win a second start winning area after the first win is completed. a second start-up easy-to-win state, making it possible to acquire two or more execution rights of the second variable display game in the second start-up easy-to-win state, and one of the two or more execution rights of the second variable display game The second win is derived based on the execution right of No. 1, and after the second win derived in the second start easy win state is completed, the second start easy win state is transitioned from the second start easy win state. A second win can be derived based on the other execution right among the two or more execution rights of the two-variation display game (see FIG. 32). The slave control unit executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on a command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying third identification information corresponding to the first variable display game; When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game is inconsistent, the variation display of the second variation display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game. (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.), and by executing the first variable display game after the second variable display game based on commands received from the main control unit,
When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game are inconsistent, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. It starts from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

(2) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed in parallel on the first display device (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) can be alternatively variably displayed on the second display device (display device 41). The main control unit controls the first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game) can be executed, and the first win (for example, the opening of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1)) can be derived from the result of the first variable display game (for example, the jackpot of the special game 1). , and based on winning in a second start winning area (for example, starting winning opening 370 (starting opening 2)) different from the first starting winning area
A variable display game (for example, special figure 2 game) can be executed, and from the result of the second variation display game (for example, special figure 2 game jackpot) to the second hit (for example, special variation winning device 38
(Opening of the large winning prize port 1)), and the first start winning conversion control means is a first start winning easy state in which winning to the first start winning region is easy (for example, the normal variable winning device 37 open state) and a non-easy first start winning state (for example, the closed state of the normal variable winning device 37), and a first winning easy state (for example, a special figure 1 game high probability) and a non-easy first hit non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability), and a second hit easy state (for example, special figure 2 game high probability)
and not easy second hit non-easy state (for example, special figure 2 game low probability) can be converted, first start winning non-easy state (for example, normal variable winning device 37 closed state) and first hit non-easy Easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability) and second hit non-easy state (for example, special figure 2
In the first game state (for example, normal game state) where the game is low probability), the derivation of the first win is easier than the second win, and the transition is made after the first game state. 1 per easy state (for example, special figure 1 game high probability) and 2nd per easy state (for example,
In the second game state (for example, special game state A) that is a special figure 2 game high probability), the derivation of the second hit is easier than the first win, and the transition is made after the second game state. In a third game state (for example, a special game state B) which is a state (for example, an open state of a normal variable winning device 37) and a first easy-to-win state and a second easy-to-win state (for example, a special game state B), the first win is derived more than the second win. (Figs. 53, 54). The slave control unit executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on a command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying third identification information corresponding to the first variable display game; When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game is inconsistent, the variation display of the second variation display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game. (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.), and by executing the first variable display game after the second variable display game based on commands received from the main control unit, the second variable display game is displayed corresponding to the second variable display game. When the third identification information and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game are inconsistent, the variable display of the second variable display game is displayed corresponding to the second variable display game. 3 Starting from identification information (FIGS. 119 to 12
1 etc.).

(3) The third identification information of (1) or (2) includes a first symbol display (large symbol group) and a second symbol display (small symbol group).
(4) The slave control unit of (3) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, and the first symbol display and the second variation display game are displayed. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(5) The slave control unit of (3) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the first symbol display and the first variation display game displayed corresponding to the second variation display game. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(6) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed and controlled by the first display means (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) to the second display means (display device 41)
, it is possible to perform variable display control alternatively. The main control unit controls the first start winning area (for example,
First execution right (for example,
The result of the first variable display game (for example, the special figure 1 game) that can be stored with the upper limit of the first number (for example, 4) of the start memory of the special figure 1 game (for example, the big hit of the special figure 1 game) to the specific area (for example, the specific area 96) (for example, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38e) without the condition of the first hit (for example, special game state, special variable winning device 3
8 (opening of the large winning opening 1)) can be derived, and the second starting winning area different from the first starting winning area (for example, the normal variable winning device 37, the starting opening 2) can be obtained based on the winning. 2 execution right (for example, the start memory of the special figure 2 game) can be stored up to a second number (for example, one), and the result of the second variable display game (for example, the special figure 2 game) (for example, special figure 2 game) Second hit (for example, special game state, special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1 ) can be derived), and it is easy to win the second start winning area from the second start winning non-easy state in which it is not easy to win the second start winning area after the first win. state, making it possible to acquire two or more execution rights of the second variable display game in the second start-up easy winning state, based on one of the two or more execution rights of the second variable display game. 2 of the second variable display game in the second start non-easy winning state in which the transition from the second start easy winning state is made after the second winning derived in the second start easy winning state is completed. The second winning can be derived based on other execution rights among the above execution rights (see FIG. 32). The slave control unit executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on a command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying third identification information corresponding to the first variable display game; When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variable display game is inconsistent,
The variable display of the second variable display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

(7) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed and controlled by the first display means (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) to the second display means (display device 41)
, it is possible to perform variable display control alternatively. The main control unit controls the first start winning area (for example,
A first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game) can be executed based on the winning of the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) and the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 3), and the first variable display It is possible to derive the first winning (for example, opening the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1)) from the result of the game (for example, the jackpot of the special game 1), and the second starting different from the first starting winning area A second variable display game (for example, a special figure 2 game) can be executed based on the winning in the winning area (for example, the start winning port 370 (starting port 2)), and the result of the second variable display game (for example, It is possible to derive the second win (for example, the opening of the special variable winning device 38 (big winning opening 1)) from the special figure 2 game jackpot), and the first start winning easy to win the first starting winning area It is possible to convert the state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) and the non-easy first start winning state (for example, the closed state of the normal variable winning device 37). Easy to win state (for example, special 1 game high probability, special 2 game high probability) and non-easy hit state (for example, special 1 game low probability, special 2 game low probability ) can be converted into the first start winning non-easy state (for example, normal variable winning device 37 closed state) and hit non-easy state (for example, special figure 1 game low probability, special figure 2 game low probability) In a certain first game state (for example, normal game state), the derivation of the first win is easier than the second win, and a first start winning non-easy state and easy-to-win state (for example, In the second game state (for example, special game state A) where special figure 1 game high probability, special figure 2 game high probability), derivation of the second hit is easier than the first win, transition after the second game state Then, in the third game state (for example, special game state B) which is the first start easy winning state (for example, the open state of the normal variable winning device 37) and the easy winning state (for example, the special game state B), the first win is higher than the second win.
Facilitates the derivation of winnings (Figs. 53 and 54). the slave control unit, when executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on a command received from the main control unit, displays third identification information corresponding to the first variable display game; When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game is inconsistent, the variation display of the second variation display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game. (Figs. 116 to 118, etc.).

[Modification 3 of the eighth embodiment]
In the description of the game machines of the first to seventh embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine provided with a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of Modification 3 of the eighth embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. is. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to seventh embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted. It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game cannot be smoothly progressed in some cases, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. The gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 3 of the eighth embodiment has the effect of making the game more interesting.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can execute the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (including game control devices 100 a and 100 b ) and an effect control device 300 . Then, the game control device 100 includes the collective display device 5
State display of special figure 1 variation display game (display corresponding to special figure 1 variation display game) and status display of special figure 2 variation display game by special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of 0 (
Display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed in parallel (see FIG. 112).

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be those that allow the game to be executed exclusively in the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation The display game may be one that allows the game to be executed alternately regardless of the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or one of which is given priority over the other (for example, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a special figure 1 fluctuation display (preferred to the game) to make it executable. Also, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be allowed to be executed at the same time. In any case, the gaming machine 10 allows the game to progress smoothly by allowing inconsistencies that occur when the decorative patterns corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are switched. can.

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
Display control of variable display of decorative symbols (identifying symbols in the large symbol group or identifying symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to either the variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game (Fig. 1
13 to 114, etc.). The effect control device 300 may display both the large pattern group and the small pattern group on the display device 41, or may display only one of them.

Also, the game machine 10 may have the game features of the sixth embodiment. As described above in the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a notice effect means (the effect control device 300) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading notice effect, etc.), and executing the notice effect. Suggestion effect means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-relentless effect, a roulette effect, etc.) that suggests The suggestion effect means can suggest the execution of the advance notice effect according to the success or failure of the suggestion effect, and as the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect 2 Suggestive production (for example,
The success probability (derivation ratio) of the first suggestion effect, and the success probability (derivation ratio) of the second suggestion effect. It is different from the second probability (see FIG. 76).

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
By executing the special figure 2 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game are invalid. When matching, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, or One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) starts from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the other is special figure 2 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

Effect control device 300, special figure 2 based on the command received from the game control device 100
By executing the special figure 1 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game are invalid. In the case of matching, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) starts from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the other is the special figure 1 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

The gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the eighth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), and has a main control unit ( A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed in parallel on the first display device (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) can be alternatively variably displayed on the second display device (display device 41). The slave control unit performs a suggestive production (for example,
It is possible to suggest the execution of a notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading notice effect, etc.) according to the success or failure of a pseudo-continuous stimulating effect, a roulette effect, etc.), and as a suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (
For example, it is possible to execute a success or failure effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-ream pattern in the pseudo-reenacting effect) or a second suggestion effect (for example, success or failure effect of selecting a pseudo-ream option in the roulette effect), and the success probability of the first suggestion effect The first probability that is (derivation rate) and the success probability of the second suggestion production (
(derivation ratio), which is different from the second probability (Fig. 76, etc.), and the second variation display game is executed after the first variation display game based on the command received from the main control unit. By doing so, when the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game are inconsistent, the second variation display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game (FIG. 116
118, etc.), the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variable display game and , when the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game is inconsistent,
The variable display of the second variable display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

(2) The third identification information of (1) includes a first symbol display (large symbol group) and a second symbol display (small symbol group).
(3) The slave control unit of (2) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the second variation display game and the first symbol display and the second variation display game are displayed. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(4) The slave control unit of (2) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the first symbol display and the first variation display game displayed corresponding to the second variation display game. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(5) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed and controlled by the first display means (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) to the second display means (display device 41)
, it is possible to perform variable display control alternatively. The slave control unit is capable of suggesting the execution of an advance notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading notice effect, etc.) according to the success or failure of the suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a roulette effect, etc.), and a suggestive effect. As a first suggestion effect (for example, success or failure effect of temporarily stopping the pseudo-ream pattern in the pseudo-ream effect) or a second suggestion effect (for example, the success or failure effect of selecting the pseudo-ream option in the roulette effect). It is possible to execute suggestive effect control in which the first probability, which is the success probability (derivation ratio) of one suggestive effect, and the second probability, which is the success probability (derivative ratio) of the second suggestive effect, are different (Fig. 76, etc.). ), by executing the second variation display game after the first variation display game based on the command received from the main control unit, the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second variation When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the display game is inconsistent, the variable display of the second variable display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game (Fig. 116 to Figure 1
18 etc.).

[Modification 4 of the Eighth Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) and a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the game machine of Modification 4 of the eighth embodiment can be applied to any of them including modifications. is. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to seventh embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted. It should be noted that the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game cannot be smoothly progressed in some cases, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. The gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 4 of the eighth embodiment has the effect of making the game more interesting.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can execute the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (including game control devices 100 a and 100 b ) and an effect control device 300 . Then, the game control device 100 includes the collective display device 5
State display of special figure 1 variation display game (display corresponding to special figure 1 variation display game) and status display of special figure 2 variation display game by special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of 0 (
Display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed in parallel (see FIG. 112).

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be those that allow the game to be executed exclusively in the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation The display game may be one that allows the game to be executed alternately regardless of the order of occurrence of the execution opportunity, or one of which is given priority over the other (for example, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a special figure 1 fluctuation display (preferred to the game) to make it executable. Also, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be allowed to be executed at the same time. In any case, the gaming machine 10 allows the game to progress smoothly by allowing inconsistencies that occur when the decorative patterns corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are switched. can.

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
The display device 41 controls the variable display of decorative symbols (identifying symbols in the large symbol group or identifying symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to either the variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game (Fig. 113 to Fig. 114, etc.). The effect control device 300 may display both the large pattern group and the small pattern group on the display device 41, or may display only one of them.

In addition, the effect control device 300, based on the command received from the main control unit, the number of execution rights corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 start memory number) and the execution right corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The number (special figure 2 starting memory number) can be displayed and controlled on the display device 41. For example, the effect control device 300 can display the number of execution rights corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 reservation number display 503 and the reservation display 505 on the display device 41, and the special figure 2 reservation number display 504 and It is possible to display the number of execution rights corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game in the pending display 505 (see FIGS. 113 to 114, etc.).

In addition, the production control device 300 displays and controls the variation display of the so-called fourth symbol (special figure 1 variation display section 911) on the LED display device 910 based on the command received from the main control section. For example, the effect control device 300, LED_d2 in the special figure 1 fluctuation display unit 911
Display the variation state of the pattern in the special figure 1 variation display game by the operation mode of one LED of 1, and the operation mode of one LED of LED_d22 in the special figure 1 variation display section 912 Display the changing state of the pattern (see FIGS. 95, 96, etc.).

In addition, the effect control device 300, based on the command received from the main control unit, the number of execution rights corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 start memory number) and the execution right corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The number (special figure 2 starting memory number) is controlled to be displayed on the LED display device 910. For example, the effect control device 300, LED_d23 and LE in the special figure 1 pending display unit 913
The number of reservations in the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by the operation mode of the two LEDs of D_d24, and the special figure 2 reservation display unit 914 displays the special figure 2 variation display game by the operation mode of the two LEDs, LED_d25 and LED_d26. to display the number of pending (see FIGS. 95, 96, etc.).

In addition, the game machine 10 may be able to execute the display control process executed by the effect control device in the seventh embodiment at the time of power failure recovery, and the game control device 100 detects the power failure recovery and changes the special figure 1 The effect control device 300 is notified of the execution right number (special figure 1 start memory number) corresponding to the display game and the execution right number (special figure 2 start memory number) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

The effect control device 300 receives notification from the game control device 100 (detection notification of power failure recovery: power failure recovery command including special figure 1 reservation number command and special figure 2 reservation number command). The effect control device 300 receives a notification from the game control device 100 and causes the display device 41 to display predetermined information (power failure recovery display 921, etc.) regarding power failure recovery instead of displaying the decorative pattern on the display device 41 . In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the predetermined information on power failure recovery on the second display device instead of displaying the special figure 1 start memory number and the special figure 2 start memory number, and the fourth identification information and the fifth Instead of the identification information, the display device 41 is caused to display a predetermined mode (power failure restoration display 921, etc.). In addition, the effect control device 300, special figure 1 pending display portion 913 of the LED display device 910
To display the special figure 1 start memory number, and to display the special figure 2 start memory number on the special figure 2 reservation display unit 914 of the LED display device 910.

Effect control device 300 special figure 1 based on the command received from game control device 100
By executing the special figure 2 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game are invalid. In the case of matching, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, or One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) starts from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the other is special figure 2 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

Effect control device 300, special figure 2 based on the command received from the game control device 100
By executing the special figure 1 variation display game after the variation display game, the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game are invalid. In the case of matching, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started from the decoration pattern displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

In the case of the above inconsistency, both the identification pattern in the large pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group may be started from a state in which they are displayed in correspondence with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, or One of the identification patterns in the pattern group and the identification pattern in the small pattern group (for example, a large pattern group with higher visibility) is started from a state in which it is displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the other is the special figure 1 You may start from the state (matched state) displayed corresponding to the variable display game.

The gaming machine 10 of Modification 4 of the eighth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), and has a main control unit ( A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed in parallel on the first display device (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) can be selectively changed and controlled on the second display device (display device 41), and corresponds to the number of execution rights (special figure 1 start memory number) corresponding to the first variable display game and the second variable display game. The number of execution rights (special figure 2 start memory number) to be displayed can be controlled on the second display device, and the fourth identification information (so-called fourth symbol) corresponding to the first variable display game based on the command, The fifth identification information (so-called fourth pattern) corresponding to the second variable display game can be controlled to be variable displayed on the third display device (LED display device 910), and the number of execution rights corresponding to the first variable display game and the number of execution rights corresponding to the second variable display game can be displayed and controlled on the third display device. The main control unit detects power failure recovery and notifies the slave control unit of the number of execution rights corresponding to the first variable display game and the number of execution rights corresponding to the second variable display game (special figure 1 reserved number command and special FIG. 2 Commands at power failure recovery including hold count commands). Upon receipt of the notification, the sub-control unit displays predetermined information (power failure recovery display 921
etc.) is displayed on the second display device, and instead of displaying the number of execution rights corresponding to the first variable display game and the number of execution rights corresponding to the second variable display game, predetermined information regarding power failure recovery (power failure recovery display 921, etc.) is displayed on the second display device, a predetermined mode (for example, a mode in which the LED is turned off) is displayed on the third display device instead of the fourth identification information and the fifth identification information, and the first variable display game and the number of execution rights corresponding to the second variable display game are set to the third
Third identification information displayed in correspondence with the first variable display game by displaying it on the display device and executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit. and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variable display game are inconsistent, the third identification information displaying the variable display of the second variable display game corresponding to the first variable display game. (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.), and by executing the first variable display game after the second variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, display corresponding to the second variable display game and the third identification information displayed in correspondence with the first variable display game
When the identification information is inconsistent, the variation display of the second variation display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second variation display game (FIGS. 119 to 121, etc.).

(2) The third identification information of (1) includes a first symbol display (large symbol group) and a second symbol display (small symbol group).
(3) The slave control unit of (2) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the second variation display game and the first symbol display and the second variation display game are displayed. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(4) The slave control unit of (2) executes the second variable display game after the first variable display game based on the command received from the main control unit, thereby displaying in response to the first variable display game. When the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed in correspondence with the second variation display game are inconsistent with the first symbol display and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display of the second variation display game is performed. Starting with the first symbol display displayed corresponding to the first variation display game and the second symbol display displayed corresponding to the second variation display game, the second variation display game is started based on the command received from the main control unit. By executing the first variation display game after the and when inconsistent with the second symbol display, the variation display of the second variation display game is displayed corresponding to the first symbol display and the first variation display game displayed corresponding to the second variation display game. Start from the display of the second symbol.

(5) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), A game control device 100) and a subordinate control unit (effect control device 300) are provided. The main control unit includes first identification information (special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) corresponding to the first variation display game, and second identification information (special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) corresponding to the second variation display game. can be variably displayed and controlled by the first display means (collective display device 50). Based on the command received from the main control unit, the slave control unit generates third identification information (decorative symbols, identification symbols in the large symbol group, identification symbols in the small symbol group) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. ) to the second display means (display device 41)
, it is possible to perform variable display control alternatively. The main control unit detects power failure recovery and notifies the slave control unit of the number of execution rights corresponding to the first variable display game and the number of execution rights corresponding to the second variable display game (special figure 1 reserved number command and special FIG. 2 Commands at power failure recovery including hold count commands). Upon receipt of the notification, the sub-controller causes the second display means to display predetermined information (power failure recovery display 921, etc.) regarding power failure recovery, and based on the command received from the main control part, after the first variable display game, the second display is displayed. When the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first change display game and the third identification information displayed corresponding to the second change display game become inconsistent by executing the change display game, The variable display of the second variable display game is started from the third identification information displayed corresponding to the first variable display game (FIGS. 116 to 118, etc.).

[Ninth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be explained. In the following description, the game machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is provided with a game board 801 (see FIG. 51), but the invention is not limited to this, and other game boards may be applied. can. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to eighth embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

First, the game performance of the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
28 is a diagram showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a so-called 1 type + 1 type game feature. The game property called 1 type + 1 type is a game property in which two special feature games can be executed. The game property called type 1 enables the derivation of a big hit as a result of a random number lottery in a special game (variation display game), and the result of the random number lottery is produced by the variable display of symbols.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a special figure 1 game (a special figure 1 fluctuation display game) as two special figure games.
And special figure 2 game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be executed. In addition, the game machine 10 has two
Two special figure fluctuation display games may be executed in parallel except when a win (big win, small win) is executed. In other words, the gaming machine 10 may be capable of simultaneously changing and displaying the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game. In addition, the game machine 10 forcibly stops the other player when one of the players wins in the simultaneous variation display, thereby eliminating duplicate execution of the win.

The special figure 1 game is one winning to the starting winning port 36, or one to the normal variable winning device 37
It is possible to execute one variable display triggered by one win, and it is possible to store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. Special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/30 at low probability
0, the small hit probability is 150/300, and the remaining 149/300 is lost. The special figure 1 game has a plurality of small winning patterns including small winning A, small winning B, and small winning C as small winning patterns (types of small winning). The small hit A, the small win B, and the small win C are small wins (small wins related to the transition of the game state) that can be transition conditions of the game state. In the special figure 1 game, 3/300 of the small hits are set to the small hit A, 17/300 of the small hits are set to the small hit B,
55/300 of the small wins are taken as the small win C, and the remaining 225/300 are taken as the small wins which cannot be the transition condition of the game state. In addition, the special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/1 at high accuracy.
00. In the special figure 1 game, regarding the control state after the big hit, 2/10 of the big hits are without low-probability electric support, 3/10 of the big hits are with low-probability electric support, and 5/10 of the big hits are 10 is assumed to have high-probability general electric support.

The special figure 2 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the start winning hole 370, and can store up to four (maximum pending number) execution rights of variable display. special figure 2
In the game, when the probability is low, the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the probability of a small hit is 297/300,
The remaining 2/300 is discarded. Special figure 2 game is a small hit pattern (type of small hit)
It has a plurality of small-hit patterns including small-hit A, small-hit B, and small-hit C. In the special figure 2 game, 3/300 of the small hits are the small hit A, 17/300 of the small hits are the small hit B, 55/300 of the small hits are the small hit C, and the rest 225/300 is set as a small hit that cannot be a game state transition condition. Also, the special figure 2 game has a jackpot probability of 1/100 at the time of high accuracy. In the special figure 2 game, regarding the control state after the big hit, 4 out of the big hits
/10 with low probability general electric support, 3/10 of the big hits without high probability general electric support, and 3/10 of the big hits with high probability general electric support.

It should be noted that the plurality of types of small winning patterns in the small winnings associated with the transition of the game state have different small winning symbols. Multiple types of small hit patterns in the small hits related to the transition of the game state,
Each of the small winning patterns in the special symbols and decoration patterns (large and small patterns) is made into a specific pattern to clearly indicate to the player that the small winning is related to the transition of the game state.

In addition, the plurality of types of small winning patterns in the small winning patterns related to the transition of the game state are special patterns different from the patterns normally displayed in the large patterns (for example, small winning (red letters), small winning (green) characters), small wins (blue letters), etc.) may be used to clearly indicate to the player that it is a small win related to the transition of the game state, the type of the small win, or both. In addition, the plurality of types of small winning patterns in the small winnings associated with the transition of the game state make the small winning pattern in the large pattern unknown and inform the player that the small winning is related to the transition of the gaming state and the type of the small winning. Or, both of them may be clearly indicated by a small pattern or this special figure. In addition, the plurality of types of small winning patterns in the small winning patterns associated with the transition of the game state are made unknown to the small winning patterns in the large patterns and the small patterns to inform the player that the small winning pattern is related to the transition of the game state. The type of hit or both may be specified only by this special figure.

In addition, a plurality of types of small winning patterns in the small winnings related to the transition of the game state are decorated patterns (at least one of the large patterns and the small patterns) to give the player a small winning related to the transition of the game state. When the type of the small win or the type of the small win or both of them are made unknown, by changing the opening mode of the big winning opening in the small win, the player is informed that the small win is related to the transition of the game state and the type of the small win. , or both. For example, the gaming machine 10 informs the player that it is a small win related to the transition of the game state, the type of the small win, or both, by the small win that differs in the combination of the number of openings of the big winning openings and the opening time. can let you know. In this case, the gaming machine 10 associates the degree of advantage of the transition of the game state with the degree of advantage of the opening mode of the big winning prize opening in the small win, thereby creating an expectation of the game state transition from the opening state of the big winning prize gate. can perform.

In addition, a plurality of types of small winning patterns in small winnings related to the transition of the game state are decorated patterns (at least one of large patterns and small patterns) to give the player a small winning related to the transition of the game state. When the type of the small win or both of them are made unknown, by changing the fluctuation time in the variable display game without changing the opening mode of the big winning opening in the small win, the player can relate to the transition of the game state. It is also possible to let the player know that it is a small win, the type of the small win, or both. In this case, the game machine 10 associates the degree of advantage of the transition of the game state with the variation time leading to the small win, so that the expectation of the game state transition can be produced from the variation time leading to the small win.

Next, FIG. 129 shows the game characteristics (playability) of the gaming machine 10 having such game performance.
will be used to explain. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment.

The game machine 10 has a normal game state without low-probability general electric support, a special game state A with high-probability general-purpose electric support, a special game state B without high-probability general-purpose electric support, and a low-probability general electric support. It can be controlled by switching to the special game state C. The game state 10 guides the left-handed game in the normal game state, and guides the right-handed game in the jackpot state, the special game state A, the special game state B, and the special game state C.

The normal game state is mainly a special figure 1 game (winning a game ball to the start winning opening 36 by hitting left)
It is a game state that executes In the normal game state, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A, the special game state C, or the normal game state triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 1 game.

Transition condition from normal game state to special game state A (state transition A establishment condition (transition condition A)
) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is high-probability electric support. The transition condition from the normal game state to the special game state C (establishment condition of the state transition B (transition condition B)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being low-probability electric support. The transition condition from the normal game state to the normal game state (the establishment condition of the state transition C (transition condition C)) is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no low-probability general electric support.

The special game state A is a game state in which a special figure 1 game is mainly executed (right-handed winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37). The special game state A is a game state that realizes a more advantageous game progress for the player than the normal game state because it is a high-probability state with general electric support. In the special game state A, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the normal game state, the special game state A, or the special game state C with the jackpot of the special figure 1 game as a trigger. Further, in the special game state A, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state B with the end of the general electric support as a trigger.

Transition condition from special game state A to normal game state (state transition D establishment condition (transition condition D)
) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is set to no low-probability electric power support. The transition condition from the special game state A to the special game state A (the establishment condition of the state transition E (transition condition E)) is
This is the end of the jackpot, with the control state after the jackpot being high-probability electric support. The transition condition from the special game state A to the special game state C (establishment condition of the state transition F (transition condition F)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being low probability general electric support. The transition condition from the special game state A to the special game state B (condition for establishment of the state transition G (transition condition G)) is the end of the general electric support. General electric support in the special game state A, the end condition (transition condition G) is the end of execution of the variable display of the specified number of times (predetermined number of times). In addition, the general electric support in the special game state A is terminated with the occurrence of a specified number of small hits (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) that can be a transition condition of the game state. Details of the transition condition G will be described later with reference to FIG.

The special game state B is a game state in which the special figure 2 game is mainly executed (the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 370 by striking to the right). The special game state B is a high-probability state, although there is no general electric support, and it is possible to progress the game without reducing the number of balls held by the player due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. This is a game state that realizes game progress that is more advantageous to the player than the game state. In addition, in the special game state B, although there is no general electric support, it is possible to progress the game without reducing the number of balls held by the player due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. This is a game state in which more advantageous game progress than in the special game state A is realized. In the special game state B, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A, the special game state B or the special game state C triggered by the big hit of the special figure 2 game.

Transition condition from special game state B to special game state A (condition for establishment of state transition H (transition condition H
)) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is high-probability electric support. The transition condition from the special game state B to the special game state B (establishment condition of the state transition I (transition condition I)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot as no high probability general electric support. The transition condition from the special game state B to the special game state C (the establishment condition of the state transition J (transition condition J)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being low-probability general electric support.

The special game state C is a game state in which a special figure 1 game is mainly executed (right-handed winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37). Although the special game state C is a low probability state, it is a game state in which a game progress more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state is realized because of the general electric support. In the special game state C, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the normal game state, the special game state A, or the special game state C with the jackpot of the special figure 1 game as a trigger. In addition, in the special game state C, the game machine 10 can transition to the normal game state with the end of the general electric support as a trigger.

Transition condition from special game state C to normal game state (state transition K establishment condition (transition condition K)
) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is set to no low-probability electric power support. again,
The transition condition (transition condition K) from the special game state C to the normal game state is the end of the general electric support. The general electricity support in the special game state C is a variable display of the specified number of times (variable display game)
The end condition is the end of the execution of The transition condition from the special game state C to the special game state A (establishment condition of the state transition L (transition condition L)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being high probability general electric support. The transition condition from the special game state C to the special game state C (establishment condition of the state transition M (transition condition M)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being low-probability general electric support.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 realizes a game property in which a big win is further guaranteed when a big win with a probability variation is derived in the normal game state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes from the game state with the high-probability general electric support to reaching the ceiling of the general electric support (finishing the execution of the variable display of the normal electric support number of times (prescribed number of times) set as the number of times of general electric support). In addition, it realizes a game property that shifts to a game state without high-probability general electric support (a game state in which the game can be progressed without reducing the number of balls held by the player) due to the occurrence of a specified number of small hits.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 realizes unprecedented novel game characteristics (game characteristics) while suppressing excessive gambling characteristics in accordance with the game rules. In addition, the gaming machine 10 enhances the interest in the game while suppressing excessive gambling in accordance with the game rules by such game characteristics (playability).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A, the special game state B or the special game state C in the normal game state, the special game state A and the special game state C triggered by the special game 2 jackpot. However, the explanation is omitted because it is rare even if it does not occur normally. In addition, the game machine 10 can transition to the normal game state, the special game state A or the special game state C triggered by the special game 1 game even in the special game state B. are omitted due to their rarity.

Next, transition condition G will be described in more detail using FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of transition condition G according to the ninth embodiment.
A transition condition G is the end of the general electricity support. The gaming machine 10 ends the general electric support when any one of the conditions 1 to 4 (four end conditions) is satisfied in the special game state A.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 sets 100 fluctuation times (completion of execution of the fluctuation display of 100 times (general electric support number of times) set as the number of times of general electric support) as the ending condition of the general electric support in the special game state A. (Condition 1). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit A has occurred once (condition 2). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the fact that the small hit B has occurred three times as a termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A (condition 3). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit C has occurred five times (condition 4).

In this way, in addition to the end of the preset (regulated) number of fluctuations (variation game of the number of normal electric support) (reaching the ceiling of the normal electric support), the occurrence of a specified number of specific small hits is also a transition condition. Therefore, variations in state transitions can be increased. In particular, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to one occurrence of a specific small win, and the occurrence of a plurality of specific small wins as a state transition trigger (
state transition conditions), it is possible to realize state transitions with more variations. As a result, the game machine 10 can increase the variation of effects, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 makes the prescribed number of transition conditions different for each small win, it is possible to make the value of each small win different from an unprecedented point of view (progress of state transition). For example, if the special game state B is a more advantageous game state than the special game state A, it is desirable to shift to the special game state B. Small hit B>small hit C. On the other hand, in the states other than the special game state A, the state transition does not occur due to the small win, so the value becomes the small win A=small win B=small win C.

In the following, the left pattern is "1", the middle design is "2", and the right design is "3". A symbol combination of "6" is a small win B, and a symbol combination of "7" on the left, "8" on the middle and "9" on the right is a small win A.

Next, an example of an effect when the special game state A is shifted to the special game state B (state transition G) will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment.

The display screen 950 shown in FIG. 131(a) is immediately after the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot with high probability general electric support (at the start of the special game state A, immediately after transition to the special game state A).
indicates the state of The display screen 950 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, a reserved display 505, and a reserved consumption display 506 in the display contents. .

On the display screen 950, the large symbol group 501 is stopped with symbols displaying "3" in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the special symbol variation display game is before the start of variation (stopped state, more specifically indicates that it is immediately after returning from the big hit). Also, on the display screen 950, the small pattern group 5
In 02, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed with symbols displaying "3", indicating that the special figure variation display game is before the start of variation. Also, on the display screen 950, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays "3", indicating that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3". Also, on the display screen 950, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays "0", indicating that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0". Also, in the display screen 950, the pending display 505 displays three pending icons 507, indicating that the pending storage number is "3". Further, in the display screen 950, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame, indicating that the special figure variation display game is before the start of variation.

In addition, the display screen 950 includes a general electric support frequency display 951 , an effect explanation display 952 , and an effect display 953 in the display contents.
The general electric support number display 951 displays the number of special figure fluctuation display games until the general electric support reaches the ceiling (remaining number of general electric support games). to see if the phone support continues). In other words, the general electric support frequency display 95
1 clearly indicates the end timing of the general electricity support (the degree of progress of the end condition (condition 1) is displayed so as to be comprehensible). On the display screen 950, the general electricity support frequency display 951 is "10 remaining
0 times” is displayed, indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 100 times later.

The effect explanation display 952 displays the explanation of the effect displayed by the effect display 953 . Display screen 9
In 50, the effect explanation display 952 displays "Aim for the goal!" Note that the effect explanation display 952 may clearly indicate the condition for the character to move to the goal (for example, display "generate a small hit and aim for the goal!", etc.), or when the goal is reached, the game It may be specified that the state transitions to a more favorable state.

The effect display 953 displays the effect related to the state transition (transition) to the special game state B.
On the display screen 950, the effect display 953 includes a character display 953a and a character display 953a.
3b and a character display 953c are included in the display contents, and it is clearly shown that the state transition occurs (the termination condition is satisfied) when the character reaches the goal. The character display 953a is a boy-like character, and the number of occurrences of the small hits C is displayed in such a manner that the number of occurrences can be comprehended (the degree of progress of the end condition (condition 4) can be comprehended). The character display 953b is a character like a tiger, and the small hit B
is displayed so that the number of occurrences can be comprehended (the degree of progress of the end condition (condition 3) is displayed so that it can be comprehended). The character display 953c is a character such as a lion, and the number of occurrences of the small win A is displayed in such a manner that the number of occurrences can be comprehended (the degree of progress of the end condition (condition 2) can be comprehended).

On the display screen 950, the effect display 953 displays four lines between the goal and the character display 953a, clearly indicating that the character display 953a will reach the goal by five actions (five small actions). It clearly indicates that the goal is reached by the occurrence of a hit C). In addition, on the display screen 950, the effect display 953 is displayed between the goal and the character display 953b.
A book line is displayed, and the character display 953b clearly indicates that the goal is reached by three actions (it is clearly indicated that the goal is reached by the occurrence of three minor wins B).
In addition, the effect display 953 on the display screen 950 displays 0 lines between the goal and the character display 953c, clearly indicating that the character display 953c reaches the goal by one action (one action). It clearly states that the goal is reached by the occurrence of a small hit A)
.

The display screen 954 shown in FIG. 131(b) is a display screen after the display screen 950, and is a state in which the first small hit C occurs after the transition to the special game state A (a small hit after the transition to the special game state A). A has occurred 0 times, a small win B has occurred 0 times, and a small win C has occurred once).
In the display screen 954, the large pattern group 501 has a left pattern of "1", a middle pattern of "2", and a right pattern of "3".
” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit C has occurred. Also, on the display screen 954, the small symbol group 502 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "1" for the left symbol, "2" for the middle symbol, and "3" for the right symbol, and a small win C has occurred. is shown. In addition, on the display screen 954, the general electric support number display 951 displays "remaining 95 times",
It shows that the general electricity support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 95 times later (it clearly indicates that the progress of the end condition (condition 1) has increased). Also, on the display screen 954, the effect display 953 displays the character display 953a in a state of being moved to the position of the first line, and clearly indicates that the character display 953a will reach the goal by the next four movements. (which clearly indicates that the degree of progress of the end condition (condition 4) has increased).

The display screen 955 shown in FIG. 132(a) is a display screen after the display screen 954, and is a state in which the first small hit B occurs after the transition to the special game state A (a small hit after the transition to the special game state A). A has occurred 0 times, a small win B has occurred once, and a small win C has occurred once).
On the display screen 955, the large pattern group 501 has a left pattern of "4", a middle pattern of "5", and a right pattern of "6".
” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small win B has occurred. Also, on the display screen 955, the small pattern group 502 is stopped and displayed with a pattern combination of "4" for the left pattern, "5" for the middle pattern, and "6" for the right pattern, and a small win B has occurred. is shown. Also, on the display screen 955, the general electric support number display 951 displays "remaining 90 times",
It shows that the general electricity support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 90 times later (it clearly indicates that the progress of the end condition (condition 1) has increased). Also, on the display screen 955, the effect display 953 is displayed with the character display 953b moved to the position of the first line, and clearly indicates that the character display 953b will reach the goal after two more actions. (which clearly indicates that the degree of progress of the end condition (condition 3) has increased).

The display screen 956 shown in FIG. 132(b) is a display screen after the display screen 955, and is a state in which the fifth small hit C occurs after the transition to the special game state A (a small hit after the transition to the special game state A). A has occurred 0 times, a small hit B has occurred once, and a small win C has occurred 5 times) (
This indicates a state in which the end condition (condition 4) is met). On the display screen 956, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "1" for the left symbol, "2" for the middle symbol, and "3" for the right symbol, indicating that a small win C has occurred. ing. Also, on the display screen 956, the small pattern group 502 is stopped and displayed with a pattern combination of "1" for the left pattern, "2" for the middle pattern, and "3" for the right pattern, and a small win C has occurred. is shown. In addition, on the display screen 956, the general electric support number display 951 displays "50 times remaining", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 50 times later (end condition (It clearly states that condition 1) has not yet been established). On the display screen 956, the effect explanation display 952 displays “goal!!”, indicating that the goal has been reached in the effect aiming at the goal performed in the effect display 953. FIG. On the display screen 956, the effect display 953 is displayed with the character display 953a moved to the goal position, and clearly indicates that the character display 953a has reached the goal (end condition (condition 4) is satisfied). clearly indicate that
. After displaying the display screen 956, the gaming machine 10 ends the special game state A and starts the special game state B (the game state changes from the special game state A to the special game state B) as the transition condition G is established. Transition).

The display screen 957 shown in FIG. 133(a) is a display screen after the display screen 955, and is a state in which the third small hit B occurs after the transition to the special game state A (a small hit after the transition to the special game state A). A has occurred 0 times, small hit B has occurred 3 times, and small win C has occurred 1 time) (
This indicates a state in which the termination condition (condition 3) is met). On the display screen 957, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "4" for the left symbol, "5" for the middle symbol, and "6" for the right symbol, indicating that a small win B has occurred. ing. Also, on the display screen 957, the small pattern group 502 is stopped and displayed with a pattern combination of "4" for the left pattern, "5" for the middle pattern, and "6" for the right pattern, and a small hit B has occurred. is shown. In addition, on the display screen 957, the general electric support number display 951 displays "50 remaining times", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 50 times later (end condition (It clearly states that condition 1) has not yet been established). On the display screen 957, the effect explanation display 952 displays "GOAL!!", indicating that the goal has been reached in the effect aiming at the goal performed in the effect display 953. FIG. On the display screen 957, the effect display 953 displays the character display 953b moved to the goal position, and clearly indicates that the character display 953b has reached the goal (the end condition (condition 3) is indicate that it has been established). After displaying the display screen 957, the gaming machine 10 ends the special game state A and starts the special game state B (the game state changes from the special game state A to the special game state B) as the transition condition G is established. Transition).

The display screen 958 shown in FIG. 133(b) is a display screen after the display screen 955, and is a state in which the first small hit A occurs after the transition to the special game state A (a small hit after the transition to the special game state A). A has occurred once, a small hit B has occurred once, and a small win C has occurred once) (
This indicates a state in which the termination condition (condition 2) is met). On the display screen 958, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "7" for the left symbol, "8" for the middle symbol, and "9" for the right symbol, indicating that a small win A has occurred. ing. Also, on the display screen 958, the small pattern group 502 is stopped and displayed with a pattern combination of "7" for the left pattern, "8" for the middle pattern, and "9" for the right pattern, indicating that a small win A has occurred. is shown. In addition, on the display screen 958, the general electric support number display 951 displays "50 times remaining", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 50 times later (end condition (It clearly states that condition 1) has not yet been established). On the display screen 958, the effect explanation display 952 displays “goal!!”, indicating that the goal has been reached in the effect aiming at the goal performed in the effect display 953. FIG. Also, on the display screen 958, the effect display 953 displays the character display 953c in a state of being moved to the goal position, and clearly indicates that the character display 953c has reached the goal (the end condition (condition 2) is indicate that it has been established). After displaying the display screen 958, the gaming machine 10 terminates the special game state A and starts the special game state B (the game state is changed from the special game state A to the special game state B) in accordance with the establishment of the transition condition G. Transition).

The display screen 959 shown in FIG. 134 is a display screen after the display screen 955, and reaches the ceiling of the general electricity support after the transition to the special game state A (variation display of the general electricity support number set as the number of times of general electricity support execution end) (indicates a state in which the end condition (condition 1) is met). In the display screen 959, the large pattern group 501 has a left pattern of "5" and a middle pattern of "5".
, the combination of symbols with the right symbol being "4" is stopped and displayed, indicating that a deviation has occurred. In addition, in the display screen 959, the small pattern group 502 has a left pattern of "5" and a middle pattern of "5".
, and a symbol combination in which the right symbol is ``4'', indicating that a failure has occurred. In addition, on the display screen 959, the general electric support number display 951 displays "remaining 0 times", indicating that the general electric support will end (it clearly indicates that the end condition (condition 1) has been met). ). After displaying the display screen 959, the gaming machine 10 ends the special game state A and starts the special game state B (the game state changes from the special game state A to the special game state B) as the transition condition G is established. Transition).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can be a game state transition condition (small win A, small win B
, C), the display mode of the effect display 953 is changed, and the number of occurrences of each small win (the degree of progress until the condition is satisfied) is displayed so that the player can understand the game content. can be easily understood. As a result, the gaming machine 10 realizes a game that is easy for the player to understand, and enhances the interest in the game.

135 to 137, description will be given of a modification of the effect when the special game state A is shifted to the special game state B (state transition G). FIG. 135 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram (No. 6) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram (No. 7) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the ninth embodiment.

The display screen 960 shown in FIG. 135 (a) is immediately after the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot with high probability general electric support (at the start of the special game state A, immediately after transition to the special game state A).
indicates the state of The display screen 960 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, a reserved display 505, and a reserved consumption display 506 in the display contents. .

On the display screen 960, the large symbol group 501 is stopped with symbols displaying "3" in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the special symbol variation display game is before the start of variation (stopped state, more specifically indicates that it is immediately after returning from the big hit). Also, on the display screen 960, the small pattern group 5
In 02, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed with symbols displaying "3", indicating that the special figure variation display game is before the start of variation. Also, on the display screen 960, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays "3", indicating that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3". Also, on the display screen 960, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays "0", indicating that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0". Also, on the display screen 960, the pending display 505 displays three pending icons 507, indicating that the pending storage number is "3". Also, in the display screen 960, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame, indicating that the special figure variation display game is before the start of variation.

In addition, the display screen 960 includes a general electric support number display 951 , an effect explanation display 952 , and an effect display 953 in the display contents.
On the display screen 960, the general electric support count display 951 displays "100 times remaining", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure variation display game ends 100 times later.

The effect explanation display 952 displays the explanation of the effect displayed by the effect display 953 . Display screen 9
In 60, the effect explanation display 952 displays "Defeat the enemy!" In addition, the effect explanation display 952 may indicate the conditions for defeating the enemy (for example, display "Generate a small hit and defeat the enemy!"), or the game state will be enhanced when the enemy is defeated. You may explicitly state that you are moving to an advantageous state.

The effect display 953 displays the effect related to the state transition (transition) to the special game state B.
On the display screen 960, an effect display 953 displays a character that looks like a tiger wearing sunglasses, and clearly indicates that a state transition will occur by defeating the character that looks like a tiger wearing sunglasses (finishing conditions are met). is doing.

A display screen 961 shown in FIG. 135(b) is a display screen after the display screen 960 and shows a state in which a small win C has occurred after the transition to the special game state A. On the display screen 960, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "1" for the left symbol, "2" for the middle symbol, and "3" for the right symbol, indicating that a small win C has occurred. ing. Also, on the display screen 960, the small symbol group 502 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "1" for the left symbol, "2" for the middle symbol, and "3" for the right symbol. is shown. In addition, on the display screen 961, the general electric support number display 951 displays "remaining 85 times", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 85 times later (end condition (It clearly indicates that the degree of progress of condition 1) has increased). In addition, on the display screen 961, an effect display 953
displays a scene of attacking a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses with a fist (damage effect corresponding to a small hit C). (closer to the termination condition). The game machine 10 displays the display screen 961 when the transition condition G (condition 4) is not established even when the small win C occurs, and then displays the effect display 953 of the display screen 960 as the effect display 953. , when the transition condition G (condition 4) is satisfied by the occurrence of the small hit C, the display screen 961
is displayed, the effect display 953 of the display screen 964 to be described later is displayed as the effect display 953 .

A display screen 962 shown in FIG. 136(a) is a display screen after the display screen 960 and shows a state in which a small win B has occurred after the transition to the special game state A. On the display screen 962, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "4" for the left symbol, "5" for the middle symbol, and "6" for the right symbol, indicating that a small win B has occurred. ing. Also, on the display screen 962, the small pattern group 502 is stopped and displayed with a pattern combination of "4" for the left pattern, "5" for the middle pattern, and "6" for the right pattern, and a small win B has occurred. is shown. In addition, on the display screen 962, the general electric support number display 951 displays "85 remaining times", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 85 times later (end condition (It clearly indicates that the degree of progress of condition 1) has increased). In addition, on the display screen 962, an effect display 953
displays a scene in which a character that looks like a tiger wearing sunglasses is being attacked with a sword (damage effect corresponding to a minor hit B). It states that there is In the damage presentation corresponding to the small win B, the effect is emphasized more than the damage presentation corresponding to the small win C, so that the battle with the character like a tiger wearing sunglasses is getting closer to the end ( (specifically 20% (1/5)) than small hit B (specifically 33% (1/3)) is larger). The gaming machine 10 displays the display screen 962 when the transition condition G (condition 3) is not established even when the small win B is generated, and then displays the effect display 953 of the display screen 960 as the effect display 953. , transition condition G (condition 3
) is established, after the display screen 962 is displayed, the effect display 953 of the display screen 964 to be described later is displayed as the effect display 953 .

A display screen 963 shown in FIG. 136(b) is a display screen after the display screen 960 and shows a state in which a small hit A has occurred after the transition to the special game state A. On the display screen 963, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "7" for the left symbol, "8" for the middle symbol, and "9" for the right symbol, indicating that a small win A has occurred. ing. In addition, on the display screen 963, the small pattern group 502 is stop-displayed with a pattern combination in which the left pattern is "7", the middle pattern is "8", and the right pattern is "9". is shown. In addition, on the display screen 963, the general electric support number display 951 displays "85 remaining times", indicating that the general electric support will end when the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game ends 85 times later (end condition (It clearly indicates that the degree of progress of condition 1) has increased). In addition, on the display screen 963, an effect display 953
displays a scene in which a character that looks like a tiger wearing sunglasses is being attacked with a gun (damage effect corresponding to a minor hit A). It states that there is In the damage presentation corresponding to the small win A, the effect is emphasized more than the damage presentation corresponding to the small win B, so that the battle with the character like a tiger wearing sunglasses is nearing the end ( (specifically 33% (1/3)) than small hit A (specifically 100% (1/1)) is larger). Since the transition condition G (condition 2) is satisfied by the occurrence of the small win A, the gaming machine 10 displays the display screen 963, and then displays the display screen 9 described later as the effect display 953.
64 effect display 953 is displayed.

A display screen 964 shown in FIG. 137(a) is a display screen after the display screen 963, and is a small win (small win A, small win B,
It shows a state in which the end condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the specified number of small hits C). More specifically, display screen 964 indicates a state in which the end condition (condition 2) is satisfied.

On the display screen 964, the effect explanation display 952 displays "subjugation success!!"
This indicates that the enemy has been defeated in the performance of fighting against the enemy performed at 53, that is, the termination condition has been satisfied by the occurrence of a specified number of small hits that can be the transition condition of the game state.

On the display screen 964, an effect display 953 indicates that a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses has been defeated, and indicates that the battle with the character like a tiger wearing sunglasses has ended (game state transition condition). It clearly indicates that the end condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specified number of possible small wins (small win A, small win B, small win C).

After displaying the display screen 964, the gaming machine 10 terminates the special game state A and starts the special game state B (the game state is changed from the special game state A to the special game state B) as the transition condition G is established. Transition).

The display screen 965 shown in FIG. 137(b) is a display screen after the display screen 960, and reaches the ceiling of the general electricity support after the transition to the special game state A (the number of times of general electricity support set as the number of times of general electricity support end of execution of the variable display) (indicates a state in which the end condition (condition 1) is met). On the display screen 965, the large symbol group 501 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination of "5" for the left symbol, "5" for the middle symbol, and "4" for the right symbol, indicating that a deviation has occurred. . Also, on the display screen 965, the small pattern group 502 is stop-displayed with a pattern combination of "5" for the left pattern, "5" for the middle pattern, and "4" for the right pattern, indicating that a deviation has occurred. ing. In addition, on the display screen 965, the general electric support number display 951 is displayed as "remaining 0
time” is displayed to indicate that the general electricity support will end (it clearly indicates that the end condition (condition 1) is satisfied). After displaying the display screen 965, the gaming machine 10 ends the special game state A and starts the special game state B (the game state changes from the special game state A to the special game state B) as the transition condition G is established. Transition).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can be a game state transition condition (small win A, small win B
, C), the display mode of the effect display 953 is changed (although the progress of the effect is clearly indicated), but the number of occurrences of each small win (degree of progress until the condition is satisfied) may not be specified. . In this way, by making the degree of progress until the condition fulfillment invisible (by making it impossible for the player to grasp when the condition is fulfilled), the gaming machine 10 becomes interested in the performance at the time of occurrence of each small win. and improve interest in games. Note that the gaming machine 10 may also make the general electric support frequency display 951 non-specific. The gaming machine 10 displays a scene in which a character, such as a tiger wearing sunglasses, is injured, thereby making it possible to approach the fulfillment of each condition while hiding the specific achievement status until the fulfillment of each condition. It may be possible to grasp that

Next, a modified example of transition condition G will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Figure 138 shows
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a modification of the transition condition G of the ninth embodiment; FIG.
138(a) is a modified example of the transition condition G. FIG. In the modified example of the transition condition G shown in FIG. 138(a), the gaming machine 10 has conditions 1 to 4 (four end conditions) in the special game state A.
If any of the following conditions are satisfied, the public electricity support will end.

Specifically, the game machine 10 sets 10,000 fluctuation times (completion of execution of the variable display of 10,000 times (the number of times of general electric support) set as the number of times of general electric support) as the ending condition of the general electric support in the special game state A. (Condition 1). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit A has occurred once (condition 2). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state B that the small hit B has occurred three times (condition 3). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit C has occurred five times (condition 4).

By setting the transition condition based on the number of fluctuations to 10000 times in this way, the transition is substantially prevented from occurring under the condition, and the gaming machine 10 is configured so that the general electric support is substantially ended only with a small hit. (so as to satisfy the establishment condition of the transition condition G).

138(b) is a modified example of the transition condition G. FIG. In the modification of transition condition G shown in FIG.
If one of the following conditions is satisfied, the public electricity support will end.

Specifically, the game machine 10 sets 100 fluctuation times (completion of execution of the fluctuation display of 100 times (general electric support number of times) set as the number of times of normal electric support) as the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A. (Condition 1). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit A has occurred once (condition 2). Also, the gaming machine 10
, the occurrence of the small hit B three times is set as the end condition of the general electric support in the special game state B (condition 3). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit C has occurred five times (condition 4). In addition, the game machine 10 has two small hits B,
The end condition of the general electric support in the special game state A is that the small hit C has occurred twice (
Condition 5). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the occurrence of one small win B and four small wins C as a termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A (condition 6).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can also set the establishment condition of the transition condition G that each of the two kinds of small wins has occurred a specified number of times. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide variations of effects (
transition timing) can be increased.

138(c) is a modification of the transition condition G. FIG. In the modification of the transition condition G shown in FIG. 138(c), the gaming machine 10, in the special game state A, conditions 1 to 5 (five end conditions)
If any of the following conditions are satisfied, the public electricity support will end.

Specifically, the game machine 10 sets 10,000 fluctuation times (completion of execution of the variable display of 10,000 times (the number of times of general electric support) set as the number of times of general electric support) as the ending condition of the general electric support in the special game state A. (Condition 1). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A to the fact that the small hit A has occurred once (condition 2). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the fact that the small hit B has occurred 10 times as a termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state B (condition 3). In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the occurrence of 50 small wins C as a termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A (condition 4). In addition, the game machine 10 sets the occurrence of 100 small hits D as a termination condition of the general electric support in the special game state A (
Condition 5).

In this way, the game machine 10 can be a transition condition of the game state.
, Not only the small win C, but also other small wins can be small wins that can be transition conditions. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the variation of effects (transition timing).

The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
It should be noted that the conventional game machine has a problem that the game may become monotonous due to lack of variations in the transition of the game state, and the interest in the game may not be sufficiently enhanced. The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has the effect of making the game more interesting.

(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game and awarding a first value (a prize ball) to a player when the result of the variable display game is a first result (jackpot). Easy-to-win state (open state) in which game balls are easy to win and non-easy-to-win state (closed state) in which game balls are not easy to win
a winning device control means (game control device 100) capable of converting a normal variable winning device into a first variable winning device;
A derivation state control means (game control device 100) capable of converting a first result derivation state to a non-easy derivation state (low probability state), and a first game that is in an easy winning state and an easy derivation state. From the state (special game state A), the second game state (
A game state control means (game control device 100) capable of transitioning the game state to the special game state B) upon establishment of a predetermined condition (transition condition G) is provided (FIGS. 129 and 130).

(2) When the result of the variable display game of (1) is a second result (minor win) with a higher probability of occurrence than the first result, a second value different from the first value can be given, and the game state The control means are
Triggered by establishment of predetermined conditions (conditions 2 to 4) related to the second result, the game state can be transitioned from the first game state to the second game state (FIGS. 129 and 130).

(3) The game state control means of (2) changes the game state from the first game state to the second game state when a variable display game that does not lead to the first result is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (condition 1). State transition is possible, and when either one of a predetermined condition related to the second result is established and a variable display game not deriving the first result is continuously executed a predetermined number of times, a first game state is established. The game state is changed from to the second game state.

(4) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game and awarding the first value (prize ball) to the player when the result of the variable display game is the first result (jackpot). Easy-to-win state (open state) in which game balls are easy to win and non-easy-to-win state (closed state) in which game balls are not easy to win
a winning device control means (game control device 100) capable of converting a normal variable winning device into a first variable winning device;
A derivation state control means (game control device 100) capable of converting a first result derivation state to a non-easy derivation state (low probability state), and a first game that is in an easy winning state and an easy derivation state. From the state (special game state A), the second game state (
A game state control means (game control device 100) capable of transitioning the game state to the special game state B) upon establishment of a predetermined condition (transition condition G), and displaying the achievement status of the predetermined condition (Fig. 131). Display means (display device 41, effect control device 300) and (Fig. 129, Fig. 130)
.

[Tenth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the state transition from the game state without the low-probability general-purpose power supply (normal game state) to the game state with the low-probability general-purpose power supply (special game state C) is only triggered by the big hit. . In the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, even when the variable display (variable display game) of the specified number of times is completed (reaches the ceiling) without the occurrence of a big hit, the game state (normal game state)
Execute the state transition from to the game state (special game state C) with low probability general electric support.

It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as in the first to ninth embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ceiling transition control processing according to the tenth embodiment.
The ceiling transition control process is a process to control the state transition when the variable display of the specified number of times is completed (reaches the ceiling) without a big hit in the game state without the low probability general electric support (normal game state). . The ceiling transition control process is the process performed in S82 and S83 of the timer interrupt process (the process performed when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are executed). The ceiling transition control process is a process executed by the game control device 100 .

[Step S91] The control unit determines whether or not the current game state is the normal game state (game state without low-probability general electric support). The control unit proceeds to step S92 when determining that the current game state is the normal game state, and terminates the ceiling transition control process when determining that the current game state is not the normal game state.

[Step S92] The control unit determines whether or not the derivation result of the variable display game to be executed is a big win. The control unit proceeds to step S96 when determining that the derivation result of the variation display game to be executed is a big win, and proceeds to step S93 when determining that the derivation result of the variation display game to be executed is not a big win.

[Step S93] The control unit updates (+1) the ceiling counter.
[Step S94] The control unit determines whether or not the ceiling counter has reached a specified value (the value set as the ceiling). As the specified value of the ceiling counter, for example, a value corresponding to the probability of a big win in the normal game state (for example, a fixed value corresponding to the probability of a big win) is specified. The default value of the ceiling counter is 750, for example.

If the control unit determines that the ceiling counter has reached the specified value, it proceeds to step S95, and if it determines that the ceiling counter has not reached the specified value, it ends the ceiling transition control process.

[Step S95] The control unit sets a transition to a game state with a low-probability general electricity support.
[Step S96] The controller clears the ceiling counter (0 clear).

According to this, the game machine 10 updates (+1) the ceiling counter each time a variation display is performed in which the derivation result is not a big win in the normal game state, and when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value (without a big win) When the execution of the variable display of the specified number of times is completed), it is possible to set the transition to the game state with low probability general electric support.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can take measures to transition to a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state even when execution of the variable display of the prescribed number of times is completed without occurrence of a big win in addition to the big win. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest while suppressing excessive gambling in accordance with the game rules.

Next, a modification of the ceiling transition control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. Figure 13
In 9, it is determined whether or not the variable display has been performed for the specified number of times without occurrence of a big hit by incrementing the ceiling counter (whether or not the specified value has been reached). In the modification of the ceiling transition control process, it is determined whether or not the variable display has been performed a specified number of times without the occurrence of a big hit by decrementing the ceiling counter.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ceiling counter initial value setting processing according to the tenth embodiment. The ceiling counter initial value setting process is a process of setting the initial value of the ceiling counter used in the ceiling transition control process when the gaming machine 10 is started. The ceiling counter initial value setting process is a process performed in S53 or the like of the main process. The ceiling counter initial value setting process is a process executed by the game control device 100 .

[Step S101] The controller sets an initial value (for example, 750) to the ceiling counter.
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a modification of the ceiling transition control process of the tenth embodiment.

[Step S91] The control unit determines whether or not the current game state is the normal game state (game state without low-probability general electric support). The control unit proceeds to step S92 when determining that the current game state is the normal game state, and terminates the ceiling transition control process when determining that the current game state is not the normal game state.

[Step S92] The control unit determines whether or not the derivation result of the variable display game to be executed is a big hit. If the control unit determines that the derivation result of the variation display game to be executed is a big win, it proceeds to step S960, and if it determines that the derivation result of the variation display game to be executed is not a big win, it proceeds to step S93.

[Step S93] The control unit updates (-1) the ceiling counter.
[Step S940] The control unit determines whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero. If the control unit determines that the ceiling counter has reached 0, it proceeds to step S95, and if it determines that the ceiling counter has not reached 0, it ends the ceiling transition control processing.

[Step S95] The control unit sets a transition to a game state with a low-probability general electricity support.
[Step S960] The controller sets the ceiling counter to an initial value (750).

According to this, the gaming machine 10 updates the ceiling counter (-1) each time a variation display is performed in which the derivation result is not a big hit in the normal game state, and when the ceiling counter reaches 0 (
When the variable display of the specified number of times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit), it is possible to set a transition to a game state (special game state) with a low probability general electric support.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can take measures to transition to a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state even when the execution of the variable display of the prescribed number of times is completed without the occurrence of the big win in addition to the big win. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest while suppressing excessive gambling in accordance with the game rules.

In addition, when the game machine 10 sets the transition to the game state with the low-probability general electric support when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, a specific symbol ( The ceiling reaching time reduction pattern) may be displayed in each of the special pattern and the decoration pattern (large pattern, small pattern). In addition, when the game machine 10 sets a shift to a game state with a low-probability general electric power support when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value, a large pattern is displayed in the variable display game in which the ceiling counter reaches the specified value. A specific pattern including a special pattern (for example, time saving rush) different from the pattern normally displayed may be displayed. In addition, the game machine 10 displays a specific pattern (chance pattern) in each of the main special pattern and the decorative pattern (large pattern, small pattern) before the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, It is also possible to suggest a transition setting to a game state with support.

In addition, when the game machine 10 sets the transition to the game state with the low-probability general electric support when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, a specific symbol ( Ceiling arrival time reduction pattern) is not limited to displaying in each of this special figure and decorative pattern (large pattern, small pattern), but at least one of this special figure and decorative pattern (large pattern, small pattern) may be displayed as

In addition, the game machine 10 is set to transition to the game state with the low-probability general electric support when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, but a predetermined lottery (different from the jackpot lottery or pattern lottery) is set. (may be used in combination with these) may be set to transition to a game state with a low probability general electric support by winning. again,
In the transition setting to the game state with low probability general electric support, the number of electric support may be one (for example, 100 times for electric support), or may be multiple (for example, 0 times, 1 time, 10 times , 10
0 times and 10000 times).

[Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, the game machine 10 changes from a game state without a low-probability general electric support (normal game state) to a low-probability display when the execution of the variable display of the specified number of times is completed (reaches the ceiling) without the occurrence of a big hit. A state transition to a game state (special game state C) with general electric power support was executed. In the modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, the game machine 10 is in a game state without a low-probability general electric support (normal game state) when the execution of the variable display of the specified number of times is completed (reaches the ceiling) without the occurrence of a big hit. ) to a relief game state with a low-probability universal electric support (a dedicated game state that does not transition when a big hit is triggered) is executed. In addition, in the modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can shorten the time until the player makes a state transition to the relief game state (the time until the execution of the specified number of variable displays is completed). to

First, the game board included in the game machine 10 of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 142 is a front view showing an example of a game board of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment. In addition, the first
Configurations similar to those of the first to tenth embodiments may be denoted by the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

In the game board 970, a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided above the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32 to provide a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In addition, a normal figure starting gate 34 is provided on the upper left side of the center case 820 in the game area 32 . A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by a gate switch.

Also, below the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is a starting winning opening 36 that forms a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch.

In addition, at a position below the normal figure start gate 34 and below the center case 820, a normal variation winning device that gives the start condition of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) 37 (second starting winning port, starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b at a position serving as an inflow portion. The movable member 37b is slid forward and backward by a general electric solenoid to prevent the inflow of game balls into the inflow portion, and in an allowable state to retreat backward and allow the inflow of game balls into the inflow portion. can be changed to The movable member 37b is normally in a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player).
holding Then, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the state is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric). Incidentally, with the normal variable prize winning device 37, when the special variable prize winning device 95 is open, chances of winning are more restricted than when the special variable prize winning device 95 is closed.

Also, the center case 820 does not have a warp flow path, but may have a warp flow path. For example, a warp port (warp inlet) is provided on the left side of the center case 820, and the game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port rolls on the stage in the center case 820, and part of it is used as the warp outlet. You may make it guide. In that case, the warp exit may be positioned directly above the start winning opening 36 so that the game ball guided to the warp exit can easily enter the starting winning opening 36.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, the game area 32 where the game balls flow down
Among them, the area on the left side of the center case 820 is the left side game area, and the center case 82
The area to the right of 0 is the right game area. Then, the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the normal figure start gate 34 and the start winning opening 3
6. You can aim to win a prize to the general winning port 35 (located in the left game area), the normal variable winning device 37, etc., and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting) to start the normal figure start gate 34, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning devices 38 and 95, general winning opening 35 (located in the right game area), etc. can be aimed at.

Next, the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a so-called 1 type + 1 type game feature. The game property called 1 type + 1 type is a game property in which two special feature games can be executed. The game property called type 1 enables the derivation of a big hit as a result of a random number lottery in a special game (variation display game), and the result of the random number lottery is produced by the variable display of symbols.

The gaming machine 10 can execute a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game as two special figure games. Can run in parallel. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can perform variable display for the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game at the same time. In addition, the game machine 10 forcibly stops the other player when one of the players wins in the simultaneous variation display, thereby eliminating duplicate execution of the win. The flow of effects when the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are displayed simultaneously will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 144 .

The special figure 1 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the start winning port 36, and can store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. In the special figure 1 game, when the probability is low, the probability of a big hit is 1/300, the probability of a small hit is 150/300, and the remaining 149/300 is lost. Also, the special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/100 at the time of high accuracy. In the special figure 1 game, about the control state after the big hit, 2/3 of the big hit
is assumed to have a low-probability general-purpose electric support, and 1/3 of the big hits are assumed to have a high-probability general-purpose electric support.

The special figure 2 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the normal variable winning device 37, and can store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. . In the special figure 2 game, when the probability is low, the big hit probability is 1/300, the small hit probability is 297/300, and the remaining 2/300 is lost. Also, the special figure 2 game has a jackpot probability of 1/100 at the time of high accuracy. In the special figure 2 game, the control state after the big hit is 2 out of the big hits.
/3 is assumed to have a low-probability universal electric support, and 1/3 of the jackpots is assumed to have a high-probability universal electric support. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set most of the small hits in the special figure 2 game to small wins (for example, open for 0.1 second) that can hardly be expected to win a prize in the big winning opening.

Next, the flow of production when the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are displayed at the same time is shown in Fig. 1
44 will be used for explanation.
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment are displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

FIG. 144(a) is when the special figure 1 game scheduled to derive the result at the timing t1 and the special figure 2 game scheduled to derive the result at the timing t2 which is the timing after the timing t1 are displayed simultaneously. 2 shows the flow of production when the special figure 1 game that derives the result earlier (timing t1) derives the loss. The gaming machine 10, the special figure 1 at the timing t1
A loss (result of the variable display game) is derived as the result of the game, and the result of the special figure 2 game is derived at timing t2.

FIG. 144(b) shows that when the special figure 2 game scheduled to derive the result at timing t1 and the special figure 1 game scheduled to derive the result at timing t2 are displayed simultaneously, the result is derived first. Shows the flow of production when the special figure 2 game derives the loss. The gaming machine 10 derives a loss (result of the variation display game) as the result of the special figure 2 game at timing t1, and derives the result of the special figure 1 game at timing t2.

FIG. 144(c) is when the special figure 1 game scheduled to derive the result at the timing t1 and the special figure 2 game scheduled to derive the result at the timing t2 which is the timing after the timing t1 are displayed simultaneously. 2 shows the flow of effects when the special figure 1 game that derives the result first (timing t1) derives a small hit or a big hit. The gaming machine 10 derives a small win or a big win (variation display game result) as a result of the special figure 1 game at timing t1. When a small win or a big win is derived as a result of the special figure 1 game, the gaming machine 10 forcibly terminates the special figure 2 game scheduled to derive the result at timing t2, and derives a loss as a result of the special figure 2 game. .

FIG. 144(d) is when the special figure 2 game scheduled to derive the result at the timing t1 and the special figure 1 game scheduled to derive the result at the timing t2 which is the timing after the timing t1 are simultaneously fluctuatingly displayed. 2 shows the flow of effects when the special figure 2 game that derives the result first (timing t1) derives a small hit or a big hit. The gaming machine 10 derives a small win or a big win (variation display game result) as a result of the special figure 2 game at timing t1. When the gaming machine 10 derives a small win or a big win as a result of the special figure 2 game, it forcibly terminates the special figure 1 game scheduled to derive the result at timing t2, and derives a loss as a result of the special figure 1 game. .

In this way, since the gaming machine 10 can execute the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game at the same time,
It is possible to shorten the time until the execution of the specified number of variable displays is completed.
In particular, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 game is 299.
/300. Therefore, the game machine 10, in the game state without the low-probability electric support (normal game state), when the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are executed at the same time, the special figure 1 game is frequently forced to end. Since the execution time of the special figure 1 game can be shortened with a high probability (substantially every time the result of the special figure 2 game is derived), the time until the execution of the specified number of fluctuation display is completed can be further shortened. . In this way, the gaming machine 10 can shorten the transition time (state transition) to a game state that is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine 10 may set the probability of a big hit or a small win in the special figure 2 game to be the same as the probability of a big win or a small win in the special figure 1 game (151/300). Even in this case, a small hit or a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game with a certain probability, and at the same time, forced termination occurs to a certain extent during execution, so the execution of the specified number of fluctuation display ends. You can shorten the time until

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a probability of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 game of 299/
300, and the probability of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 game may be 151/300 (the probability in FIG. 143 may be replaced). In this case, when the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are executed at the same time, the gaming machine 10 frequently causes the forced termination of the special figure 2 game, and the execution time of the special figure 2 game is high probability ( Substantially, each time the result of the special figure 1 game is derived), it is possible to further shorten the time until the execution of the variable display of the specified number of times is completed.

Next, the game characteristics (playability) of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the gaming machine of Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment.
The game machine 10 has a normal game state without low-probability general electric support, a special game state A with low-probability general-purpose support, a special game state B with high-probability general-purpose support, and a low-probability general-purpose support. It can be controlled by switching to a relief game state.

In the relief game state, the game machine 10 can set a normal/universal power support frequency different from that in the special game state A in which there is a low-probability general/universal power support as in the relief game state. For example, the game machine 10 may set a predetermined fixed value of the general/universal electrical support number in the relief game state, or may set the general/universal electrical support number of times determined using a dedicated random number (for example, 100
Random numbers may be used to determine which of the number of times, 300 times, and 10000 times should be set. In addition, the gaming machine 10 diverts other random numbers (for example, winning random numbers, pattern random numbers, etc.) (
use) to determine and set the number of public electric support times. Also, the production mode (for example, the motif of production) in the relief game state may be different from that in the special game state A.

The game state 10 guides the left-handed game in the normal game state, and guides the right-handed game in the jackpot state, the special game state A, the special game state B, and the relief game state.
The normal game state is mainly a special figure 1 game (winning a game ball to the start winning opening 36 by hitting left)
is executed, and when the general electric is in an open state (open state) (a state in which it is easy to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37), the time until the execution of the specified number of variable display is completed Special figure This is a game state in which two games (a game ball wins a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 with a left-hand shot) are executed together. In the normal game state, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A and the special game state B triggered by a big hit in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game. In addition, in the normal game state, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the relief game state upon completion of execution of the variable display for the prescribed number of times.

Transition condition from normal game state to special game state A (state transition A establishment condition (transition condition A)
) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is low-probability general electric support. The transition condition from the normal game state to the special game state B (establishment condition of the state transition B (transition condition B)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being high-probability electric support. The transition condition from the normal game state to the relief game state (condition for establishment of state transition C (transition condition C)) is completion of execution of variable display for a specified number of times without occurrence of a big hit.

The special game state A is a game state in which a special figure 2 game (right-handed winning of game balls to normal variable winning device 37) is mainly executed. Although the special game state A is a low-probability state, there is a general electric support, and the frequent occurrence of small hits allows the game to progress without reducing the number of balls held by the player. It is a game state that realizes game progress more advantageous to the player than the state. In the special game state A, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the special game state B triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 2 game. Also, in the special game state A, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the normal game state with the end of the general electric support as a trigger.

Transition condition from special game state A to normal game state (state transition D establishment condition (transition condition D)
) is the end of the public electric support. General electric support in special game state A is the specified number of times (
The termination condition (condition for establishment of transition condition D) is the end of the execution of the variable display of the general electric support number).
Transition condition from special game state A to special game state A (state transition E establishment condition (transition condition E)
) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is low-probability electric support. The transition condition from the special game state A to the special game state B (state transition F establishment condition (transition condition F)) is
This is the end of the jackpot, with the control state after the jackpot being high-probability electric support.

The special game state B is a game state in which a special figure 2 game is mainly executed (right-handed winning of game balls to normal variable winning device 37). In the special game state B, there is general electric support, it is a high probability state, and the game can be progressed without reducing the number of balls held by the player due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. It is a game state that realizes game progress more advantageous to the player than the state. In addition, the special game state B is a game state that realizes more advantageous game progress than the special game state A because of its high probability. In the special game state B, the gaming machine 10
A transition to a special game state A and a special game state B can be triggered by a big hit in the special figure 2 game. In addition, in the special game state B, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the normal game state with the end of the general electric support as a trigger.

Transition condition from special game state B to normal game state (state transition G establishment condition (transition condition G)
) is the end of the public electric support. The general electric support in the special game state B is the specified number of times (
The completion of the execution of the variable display of the general electric support number) is set as the end condition (the establishment condition of the transition condition G).
Transition condition from special game state B to special game state A (state transition H establishment condition (transition condition H)
) is the end of the jackpot in which the control state after the jackpot is low-probability electric support. The transition condition from the special game state B to the special game state B (state transition I establishment condition (transition condition I)) is
This is the end of the jackpot, with the control state after the jackpot being high-probability electric support.

The relief game state is a game state in which a special figure 2 game (right-handed winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37) is mainly executed. Although the relief game state is a low-probability state, there is a general electric support, and the frequent occurrence of small hits allows the game to proceed without reducing the number of balls held by the player. This is a game state in which the game progresses more advantageous to the player than in this state. In the relief game state, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the special game state B triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 2 game. Further, in the relief game state, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the normal game state with the end of the general electric support as a trigger.

Transition condition from relief game state to normal game state (Condition for establishment of state transition J (transition condition J))
, is the end of the support system. In the general electric support in the relief game state, the end condition (the establishment condition of the transition condition J) is the end of the execution of the variable display of the prescribed number of times (the general electric support number of times). The transition condition from the relief game state to the special game state A (state transition K establishment condition (transition condition K)) is
This is the end of the jackpot, with the control state after the jackpot being low-probability general electric support. The transition condition from the relief game state to the special game state B (condition for establishment of the state transition L (transition condition L)) is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being high-probability electric support.

As a result, the game machine 10 realizes a game property in which a transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player is periodically guaranteed, even if losses occur repeatedly in the normal game state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 realizes unprecedented novel game characteristics (game characteristics) while suppressing excessive gambling characteristics in accordance with the game rules. In addition, the gaming machine 10 enhances the interest in the game while suppressing excessive gambling in accordance with the game rules by such game characteristics (playability).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or special game state B in the special game state A, the special game state B, and the relief game state as well, triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 1 game, but it usually occurs. The explanation is omitted because it is rare even if it occurs.

The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the normal variable winning device 37 so that winning can be aimed at by hitting to the right instead of aiming for winning by hitting to the left and hitting to the right. The game machine 10 has a normal variable winning device 3 so that a player can aim to win a prize by hitting to the right.
7 prevents the game ball from unintentionally winning the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal game state aiming at the start winning port 36 mainly by hitting to the left (until the execution of the variable display of the specified number of times is completed) It is possible to prevent the winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 when there is no intention of shortening the time. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent, for example, a highly anticipated special figure 1 game (for example, a special figure 1 game in which a big hit has been confirmed in advance notice or the like) from being forcibly terminated.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide a universal electric long open (universal electric open with a long open time) as a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game. By providing the general electric long open, the gaming machine 10 can more reliably secure the time for the player to earn the start memory of the special figure 2 game.

In addition, when the special figure 2 game is executed in the normal gaming state, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that the first fluctuation time of the special figure 2 game that is continuously executed is long (for example, 5 minutes). may The gaming machine 10 can prevent the special figure 1 game being executed from being forcibly terminated by lengthening the first variation time of the special figure 2 game which is continuously executed.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 may make the variation time after the second time of the special figure 2 game which is continuously executed shorter than the time required for the production development of the special figure 1 game. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can be forcibly terminated before the effect development of the special figure 1 game occurs.
It is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by forcible termination after the development of the performance (forcible termination of the variable game with high expectations). Incidentally, in this case, the gaming machine 10 may perform the highly anticipated performance only for small wins or big wins. According to this, the gaming machine 10
, it is possible to further prevent the risk of forcible termination after development of the presentation.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may issue a warning on a display screen or the like before disconnecting the mains power. According to this, the game machine 10 can prevent the winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 when there is no desire to shorten the time until the variable display of the specified number of times is completed.

[Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment and the modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine, which is in the gaming state in which the special figure 1 game is mainly executed in the normal gaming state, has been described. The gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment mainly executes the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game in the normal gaming state.

The gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 14
6 is a front view showing an example of a game board of Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

In the game board 980, on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32,
A normal pattern starting gate (normal pattern starting gate) 34 is provided to give a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch.

In addition, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, that is, below the normal figure starting gate 34. As shown in FIG. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch.

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a starting opening sorting device 981 (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game is provided. ing. The starting port distribution device 981 has a starting port 1 switch, a starting port 2 switch, and a distribution mechanism, and alternately distributes and guides game balls to the starting port 1 switch and the starting port 2 switch. . Therefore, the game ball that has won the starting port sorting device 981 is the starting port 1
Detected by the switch or starter 2 switch. The starter sorting device 981 is a device (a device in which the player aims to win) that allows the player to mainly win the game ball in the normal game state (the state in which there is no general electric support).

In addition, on the lower left side of the starting opening sorting device 981, there is provided a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game.
The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b at a position serving as an inflow portion. The movable member 37b is slid forward and backward by a general electric solenoid to prevent the inflow of game balls into the inflow portion, and in an allowable state to retreat backward and allow the inflow of game balls into the inflow portion. can be changed to The movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the state is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric).

Also, the center case 40 is provided with a warp port 39a below the special variable winning device 38. As shown in FIG. A game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from a warp port (warp entrance) 39a rolls on a stage in the center case 40, and a part of it is guided to a warp exit 39b. warp exit 3
9b is located directly above the starting opening sorting device 981, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b easily enters the starting opening sorting device 981.

In the gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 2 of the tenth embodiment, the game area 32 where the game ball flows down
Among them, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the starting opening distribution device 981, the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38 can be aimed at, and no prize can be aimed at by shooting a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting).

According to this, in the gaming machine 10, the starting memories of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are alternately generated by the game balls that have won the starting opening distribution device 981 that mainly aims at winning in the normal game state. The special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game are frequently executed at the same time in the state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can shorten the time until the execution of the variable display for the prescribed number of times is completed.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the case of transitioning to the game state with general electric support (state transition) triggered by the jackpot, the game machine may shift to the game state with general electric support without being triggered by the big win. explained.

The gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment provides a general electric support that is triggered by a big win and a general electric support that is not triggered by a big win by external information terminal boards 71 (photorelays). An external information signal is output so that the external device that acquires the information can be distinguished. The gaming machine 10 sends the external information signal to the external information terminal board 7 in the external information editing process (step S88).
1 and output to an external device via the external information terminal board 71 .

In the eleventh embodiment, input (supplied) to the external information terminal board 71 in order to be able to distinguish between the general electric support executed in the wake of the jackpot and the general electric support executed without the jackpot. The external information signal will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 147 shows the eleventh
It is a diagram showing an example of an external information signal of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

The external information signals include Grand Prize 1 (also referred to as Jackpot 1), Grand Prize 2 (also referred to as Jackpot 2), Grand Prize 3, and Grand Prize 4. Special prize 1 is an output signal (external information terminal board 7
1). The special prize 2 is an output signal (signal input to the external information terminal board 71) that is output during the jackpot (during the jackpot operation) and during the general electric support accompanied by the jackpot (triggered by the jackpot). The special prize 3 is an output signal (signal input to the external information terminal board 71) output during general electric support without a big win (not triggered by a big win). Grand prize 4
is an output signal (
signal input to the external information terminal board 71).

Here, each external information signal (grand prize 1 to grand prize 4) supplied to the external information terminal board 71 will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a timing chart (Part 1) for explaining the external information signal of the eleventh embodiment.

In the timing chart of FIG. 148, the gaming machine 10 starts from timing t1 to timing t.
The game state without general electric support is executed until 2, and at timing t2, the game state with general electric support is shifted due to the winning of the time saving pattern (general electric support not triggered by the jackpot), and the general electric support is performed until timing t3. There is a game state running. The gaming machine 10, timing t
At 3, the general electric support is ended and the game state is shifted to the game state without the general electric support, the game state without the general electric support is executed until timing t4, the game state is shifted to the big win game state due to the occurrence of the big win at timing t4, and the game state is shifted to the big win game state at timing t5. Until the jackpot game state is executed. The game machine 10 shifts to a game state with general electric support (a game state with general electric support triggered by a big win) from timing t5 upon completion of the jackpot, and executes the game state with general electric support until timing t6. , at timing t6, end the general electricity support and shift to a game state without general electricity support,
A game state without power supply support is being executed until timing t7. The game machine 10 shifts to a game state with general electric support with winning of the time saving pattern at timing t7, executes the game state with general electric support until timing t8, and shifts to a big win game state with occurrence of a big win at timing t8. Then, the jackpot game state is executed until timing t9. The gaming machine 10 shifts to a game state with general electric support with the end of the jackpot from timing t9, and timing t1.
The game state with general electric support is executed until 0, and the general electric support is ended at timing t10 to shift to the game state without general electric support.

When such a game state transition is performed, the special prize 1 is in the OFF state from timing t1 to timing t4, and is in the ON state from timing t4 to timing t5 during the jackpot game state. Also, the special prize 1 is OFF from timing t5 to timing t8, and ON from timing t8 to timing t9 during the jackpot game state.
state, and becomes OFF state after timing t9.

When such a game state transition is performed, the special prize 2 is in the OFF state from the timing t1 to the timing t4, and from the timing t4 to the timing t5 during the big win game state and after the big win (triggered by the big win). It is in the ON state from timing t5 to timing t6 during a game state with universal electric support (universal electric support accompanied by a big hit).
Special prize 2 is OFF from timing t6 to timing t8, and is ON from timing t8 to timing t9 during the jackpot game state and from timing t9 to timing t10 during the game state with general power support after the jackpot. , timing t
After 10, it becomes an OFF state.

When such a game state transition is performed, the special prize 3 is in an OFF state from timing t1 to timing t2, and is in a game state with general electric support not triggered by a big win (universal electric support without a big win). ON from timing t2 to timing t3
state. The special prize 3 is OFF from timing t3 to timing t7, ON from timing t7 to timing t8 in a game state with general electric power support not triggered by a big win, and OFF after timing t8.

When such a game state transition is performed, the special prize 4 is in an OFF state from timing t1 to timing t2, and is in a game state with general electric support not triggered by a big hit (universal electric support without a big hit). ON from timing t2 to timing t3
state. In addition, the special prize 4 is in an OFF state from timing t3 to timing t4, and from timing t4 to timing t5 during the jackpot game state and after the jackpot (initiating the jackpot). It is in the ON state from timing t5 to timing t6 during the game state of Yes. In addition, the special prize 4 is the timing t
From timing t7 to timing t8 in a game state with general electric support not triggered by a big win, from timing t8 to timing t9 in a big win game state and with general electric support after a big win. It is in the ON state from timing t9 to timing t10 during the game state, and is in the OFF state after timing t10.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible for the external device to determine all the general electric support states. In addition, the game machine 10 can distinguish between the general electric support triggered by the big win and the general electric support not triggered by the big win by the external device. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can allow an external device to determine the number of executions of general electric support not triggered by a big win (the number of winning times of time-saving symbols) and the number of executions of general electric support triggered by a big win.

By the way, when the general electric support is executed without using the big hit as a trigger, it may be executed when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value and when a predetermined lottery is won. The gaming machine 10 may output an external information signal so that an external device can grasp which of the general electric support that does not trigger a big hit has occurred. Here, a method of outputting an external information signal so that an external device can grasp which of the general electric support which does not trigger a big hit has occurred will be described with reference to FIG. 149 . FIG. 149 is a timing chart (part 2) for explaining the external information signal of the eleventh embodiment.

In the timing chart of FIG. 149, the gaming machine 10 executes the game state without general electric support from timing t11 to timing t12, and enters the game state with general electric support when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value at timing t12. Then, the game state with power supply support is being executed until timing t13. The game machine 10 ends the general electric support at timing t13, shifts to a game state without general electric support, executes the game state without general electric support until timing t14, and wins a predetermined lottery at timing t14. , the game state with general electricity support is executed until timing t15, and the general electricity support ends at timing t15, and the game state shifts to the game state without general electricity support.

In FIG. 149(a), the game machine 10 is executed by winning a predetermined lottery and a special prize 3a that is output during general electric support, which is executed when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value instead of the special prize 3. An external information signal is output so that an external device can grasp which of the general electric support that does not trigger a big hit has occurred by the special prize 3b output at the time of the general electric support.

When the transition of the game state as described above is performed, the special prize 3a is the timing t1
1 to timing t12, it is in the ON state from timing t12 to timing t13, which is a game state with general electricity support executed when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value, and it is in the OFF state after timing t13. .

When the transition of the game state as described above is performed, the special prize 3b is the timing t1
1 to timing t14, it is ON from timing t14 to timing t15 in a game state with general electric power support executed by winning a predetermined lottery, and it is OFF after timing t15.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can provide an external information signal (special prize 3a) that is output when the general electric support is executed when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value, and an electric By separately providing an external information signal (special prize 3b) that is output at the time of support, the external device can grasp the game state in more detail.

In FIG. 149(b), the game machine 10 is executed according to the form of the signal (waveform of the signal) output when the general electric support is executed when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, and when a predetermined lottery is won. External information so that the external device can grasp which of the general electric support that does not trigger the jackpot has occurred by making the form of the signal (waveform of the signal) output during the general electric support so that it can be distinguished Output a signal.

When the transition of the game state as described above is performed, the special prize 3 is the timing t11
From timing t12 to timing t, which is a game state with general electricity support that is executed when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value.
13, the first mode (intermittent (pulse) drive mode) in which the ON state and the OFF state are periodically repeated. Special prize 3 is in the OFF state from timing t13 to timing t14, and continues to be in the ON state from timing t14 to timing t15, which is a game state with general electricity support executed by winning a predetermined lottery. become the second
After the timing t15, it is in the OFF state.

In this way, the game machine 10 has the form (first mode) of the signal output when the general electric support is executed when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, and the general By making it possible to distinguish between the form (second form) of the signal output during the electric support, the external device can grasp the game state in more detail.

In FIG. 149(c), the gaming machine 10 is executed by the form of the signal (waveform of the signal) output during the general electricity support executed when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, and by winning a predetermined lottery. External information so that an external device can grasp which of the general electric support that does not trigger a big hit has occurred by making the form of the signal (signal waveform) output during the general electric support different so that it can be distinguished Output a signal.

When the transition of the game state as described above is performed, the special prize 3 is the timing t11
From timing t12 to timing t, which is a game state with general electricity support that is executed when the ceiling counter reaches a specified value.
During the period 13, the switch is turned to the ON state, then turned to the OFF state once, and becomes the first state to be turned ON again. In the first aspect, after turning ON state (start signal) for a specified period (time shorter than the duration of the second ON state (for example, 50 ms)), it is once returned to OFF state, and then the general electric support This is a mode in which the ON state continues until the end of . Special prize 3 is in the OFF state from timing t13 to timing t14, and continues to be in the ON state from timing t14 to timing t15, which is a game state with general electricity support executed by winning a predetermined lottery. It becomes the 2nd mode which becomes this, and it will be in an OFF state after timing t15.

In this way, the game machine 10 has the form (first mode) of the signal output when the general electric support is executed when the ceiling counter reaches the specified value, and the general By making it possible to distinguish between the form (second form) of the signal output during the electric support, the external device can grasp the game state in more detail.

By the way, the number of normal/universal electric supports generated without a big hit is not limited to a plurality of times (one or more times), and may be 0 times. A general electricity support with a normal electricity support count of 0 is, for example, a general electricity support that is being executed (for example, a normal electricity support count of 10000
It is used to forcibly terminate the general electric support of times (substantially terminated by the occurrence of a big hit) (forcibly end by overwriting the general electric support number of times to 0 times).

The gaming machine 10 may output an external information signal so that an external device can grasp the occurrence of such a general electric support with the number of general electric support of 0 times. A method of outputting an external information signal so that an external device can recognize the occurrence of a general electrical support with a general electrical support count of 0 will be described with reference to FIG. 150 . FIG. 150 is a timing chart (part 3) for explaining the external information signal of the eleventh embodiment.

In the timing chart of FIG. 150, the gaming machine 10 notifies the external device of the start of the N-th variation display game by turning the start signal that notifies the start of the variation display game from the ON state to the OFF state at timing t21 ( Start the Nth variable display game), timing t
23, the start signal is turned from the ON state to the OFF state to notify the external device of the start of the N+1th variation display game (the N+1th variation display game is started, and the start signal is turned from the ON state to the OFF state at timing t24). (The N+2th variation display game is started.) The start signal notifies the external device of the start of the variation display game. It is a signal used for the grand prize 1 ~
This is an example of an external information signal other than the grand prize 4. FIG.

FIG. 150(a) shows a case where the normal electric support with multiple normal electric support times is performed up to the N+1th variation display game (during the Nth and N+1th fluctuation display games, the game with the normal electric support This shows the special prize 3 in the case where the game state without the general electric support is entered from the (N+2)th variation display game. Specifically, Grand Prize 3 is ON until timing t24, and OFF after timing t24.

FIG. 150(b) shows a grand prize 3 in the case where a general electric support with a general electric support count of 0 occurs at timing t22, which is a gaming state without a general electric support. Specifically, the special prize 3 is in the OFF state until timing t22, and after being in the ON state for a specified period due to the occurrence of the general electricity support 0 times at timing t22, it is in the OFF state after that. .

In addition, during the specified period in which the special prize 3 associated with the general electric support of 0 times, which is caused by the derivation result of the variable display game, is in the ON state, the next variable display game will start after the result of the variable display game is derived. It is set to be shorter than the period to start. This makes it possible to easily grasp that the waveform that is in the ON state for the specified period based on the special prize 3 and the start signal is the normal electric support with the normal electric support number of 0 times. In FIG. 150(b), the timing at which the special prize 3 is turned ON and the timing at which the start signal is turned ON do not overlap.

FIG. 150(c) shows a grand prize 3 when the general electric support occurs 0 times at the timing t22 during the gaming state with the general electric support shown in FIG. 150(a). That is, although the game state with the general electric support was scheduled to continue until the N+2th variation display game starts, the general electric support with the general electric support number of 0 occurred during the Nth fluctuation. , shows the special prize 3 when the general electricity support in execution is forcibly terminated at the start of the N+1th variation display game. In this case, the gaming machine 10 places the special prize 3 in the signal waveform shown in FIG. The waveform of the synthesized signal is obtained by inverting the waveform of the signal obtained by combining the two signals.

Specifically, the special prize 3 is in the ON state until timing t22, and in the game state with the general electricity support, the general electricity support 0 times occurs at timing t22, so after the special prize 3 is in the OFF state for a specified period. , it is in the ON state until timing t23 when the next variation display game starts, and is in the OFF state after timing t23.

According to this, in the game machine 10, in the game state without the general electric support, the general electric support of 0 times has occurred, and in addition, in the game state with the general electric support, the general electric support of 0 times has occurred. The occurrence of support can also be grasped by the external device.

The gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. In addition, there is a problem that the game control information output by the conventional game machine may not be sufficient. The gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment has the effect of being able to provide more substantial game control information.

(1) The game machine 10 includes a win control means (game control device 100) capable of deriving a win as a result of a variable display game, and a first game state (a normal state triggered by a big win) that is advantageous to the player following the win. a first game state setting means capable of setting an electric support), and a second game state setting means capable of setting a second game state (general electric support not triggered by a big win) that is advantageous to the player independently of the win. , external information output means (external information terminal board 71) capable of outputting game control information to an external device as external information, and the external information output means is a first external information output capable of specifying a first game state. Means (special prize 2, etc.) and second external information output means (special prize 3, etc.) that enables specification of the second game state.

(2) The game machine 10 includes a win control means (game control device 100) capable of deriving a win as a result of a variable display game, and a first game state (a normal state triggered by a big win) that is advantageous to the player following the win. A first game state setting means capable of setting a power support), and a first condition independent of winning (reaching a specified value of the ceiling counter) or a second condition different from the first condition and independent of winning ( A second game state setting means capable of setting a second game state (general electric support not triggered by a big hit) advantageous to the player by establishment of a predetermined lottery (winning of a predetermined lottery), and game control information to an external device as external information. Outputtable external information output means (external information terminal board 71), the external information output means includes first external information output means (special prize 2, etc.) that can specify the first game state, and second game a second external information output means (grand prize 3, etc.) that makes it possible to specify the state;
The external information output means makes it possible to specify which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied (FIG. 149(c)).

[Twelfth Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with the gaming board 30 (see FIG. 2). In the description of the game machine of the fourth embodiment, the game board 801
(see FIG. 51), and in the description of the game machine of the seventh embodiment, the game machine is described as having game boards 802 and 803 (see FIG. 95), and the tenth embodiment. In the explanation of the game machine of the modified example, the game board 970 (see FIG. 142) and the game board 98
0 (see FIG. 146). The twelfth embodiment will be described as a game machine having a game board 801 similar to that of the fourth embodiment. The game machine of the twelfth embodiment may be provided with game boards 30, 800, 802, 803, 970, and 980. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as in the first to eleventh embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.

Also, in the description of the game machine control system of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 (
3), and in the description of the game machine control system of the third embodiment, the game machine is described as having a game control device 100a (see FIG. 29). In the explanation of the control system of the game machine in the form, the game control device 100b (Fig. 52
) has been described as a gaming machine. The twelfth embodiment will be described as a game machine provided with a game control device 100b similar to that of the fourth embodiment. Incidentally, the game machine of the twelfth embodiment may be provided with the game control devices 100 and 100a. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as in the first to eleventh embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.

Next, the game performance of the gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be explained using FIG.
FIG. 151 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a so-called 1 type + 1 type game feature. The game property called 1 type + 1 type is a game property in which two special feature games can be executed. One type of gameplay is
A big win can be derived as a result of a random number lottery in a special figure game (variation display game), and the result of the random number lottery is produced by the variable display of the symbols. The gaming machine 10 can execute a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game as two special figure games, and the two special figure fluctuation display games are executed in parallel except when a win (big win, small win) is executed. is executable. i.e.
The gaming machine 10 is capable of variably displaying the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game at the same time. In addition, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the other one when one side derives a win in the simultaneous fluctuation display, thereby eliminating duplicate execution of the win.

The special figure 1 game is one winning to the starting winning port 36, or one to the normal variable winning device 37
It is possible to execute one variable display triggered by one winning, and it is possible to store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. Special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/30 at low probability
0, the small hit probability is 150/300, and the remaining 149/300 is lost. Also, the special figure 1 game has a jackpot probability of 1/100 at the time of high probability.

The special figure 2 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the start winning hole 370, and can store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. special figure 2
In the game, when the probability is low, the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the probability of a small hit is 297/300,
The remaining 2/300 is discarded. In addition, the special figure 2 game has a jackpot probability of 1 at high probability.
/100. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 assumes that the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game have the same jackpot probability, they may be different.

Next, the game state (post-jackpot control state) after the jackpot for each game state will be described. The game machine 10 has a normal game state A without low-probability general electricity support, a normal game state B with low-probability general electricity support, a special game state A without high-probability general electricity support, and a high-probability general electricity support. can be controlled by switching to the special game state B of . Each game state will be described later with reference to FIG.

First, the post-jackpot control states in the normal game state A, the special game state A and the special game state B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can transition between the normal game state A, the special game state A, and the special game state B with a big win in the special game 1 or a big win in the special game 2 as a trigger. When a big win is derived in the special figure 1 game, the game machine 10 sets the control state after the big win to 5/10 of the big wins with low probability no electric support and 5/10 of the big wins with a high probability. Assume no power support. Further, when a jackpot is derived in the special figure 2 game, the gaming machine 10 sets the control state after the jackpot to 4/10 of the jackpots without high-probability general electric support,
It is assumed that 6/10 of the jackpots have a high-probability electric support.

In the gaming machine 10, depending on the general electric support state before the big hit, the main game progress may be biased to the progress of the special figure 1 game or the game progress of the special figure 2 game. have achieved sexuality.

Next, the post-jackpot control state in the normal game state B will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 153 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment.
In the normal game state B, the gaming machine 10 can transition to a game state triggered by a big win in the special figure 1 game or a big win in the special figure 2 game. When a big win is derived in the special figure 1 game, the game machine 10 sets the control state after the big win to 1/10 of the big wins with a low probability of no general electric support, and of 9/10 of the big wins with a high probability. Assume no power support. In addition, when a big hit is derived in the special figure 2 game, the gaming machine 10 sets the control state after the big win to 4/10 of the big wins without high probability general electric support, and 6/10 of the big wins It is assumed that there is high-probability public electricity support.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the main game progress in the normal game state B is biased toward the game progress of the special figure 1 game, and such bias realizes an interesting game.
Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 having such game performance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment.

The game machine 10 has a normal game state A without low-probability general electricity support, a normal game state B with low-probability general electricity support, a special game state A without high-probability general electricity support, and a high-probability general electricity support. It is possible to transition the game state including the special game state B of. The game machine 10 guides a left-handed game in the normal game state A and the normal game state B, and guides a right-handed game in the jackpot state, the special game state A, and the special game state B.例文帳に追加

The normal game state A includes "normal mode" and "chance mode A". "Normal mode"
is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game is mainly executed. "Chance mode A" is a game state in which the special game 1 is mainly executed, but the special game 2 can be executed based on the execution right (reserved memory) acquired in the special game state B before transition to the normal game state. .

"Chance mode A" is when the execution possibility of special game 2 disappears (for example, after normal game state transition), for a predetermined period (for example, 15 times of fluctuation display including special figure 1 game and special figure 2 game) ) is used as a transition condition (transition condition H) to transition to the “normal mode”.

The gaming machine 10 transitions to the special game state A or the normal game state A in the "normal mode" or the "chance mode A" triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 1 game, and the special game state A or the normal game state A triggered by the jackpot of the special figure 2 game. It can transition to game state A or special game state B. In addition, the gaming machine 10
In the "normal mode" or "chance mode A", the transition to the normal game state B can be triggered by the derivation of the result of rushing in time (for example, the display of the time saving pattern).

The transition condition (transition condition A) from the normal game state A to the special game state A is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot as no high probability general electric support. The transition condition (transition condition B) from the normal game state A to the normal game state A is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being no low-probability general electric support. Transition condition from normal game state A to special game state B (transition condition C)
is the end of the jackpot when the control state after the jackpot is high-probability electric support. however,
In the "normal mode" of the normal game state A, the gaming machine 10 compares the variation time of the special figure 1 game (eg, 10 seconds to 2 minutes) with the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 minutes)
By increasing the , the chance of getting a hit by the special figure 2 game is suppressed. Note that the gaming machine 10
, in the “chance mode A” of the normal game state A, the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes) is the same as the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes) As a degree, it does not suppress the chance to derive a hit by the special figure 2 game. The transition condition (transition condition J) from the normal game state A to the normal game state B is the derivation of the result of rushing into the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game.

The result of rushing into time is that the game result in the special game does not lead to a continuous jackpot over a predetermined number of games (for example, 750 times, which is 2.5 times the jackpot probability when the jackpot probability is 1/300). This is the result (game number ceiling: for example, the 750th loss counted from the previous big hit). In addition, regardless of the number of games, the result of rushing into time is the cumulative value of fluctuation time (game time ceiling), the number of times of derivation of special fluctuation display modes such as reach fluctuation (game point ceiling), or a combination of these, etc. It may be a result of satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the game history. Moreover, the result of rushing into time saving may be derived by a lottery (for example, 1/750) for each game regardless of the game history. Further, the result of rushing into time saving is clearly shown to the player by deriving the time saving pattern, but it may not necessarily be required to be shown to the player.

The normal game state B includes "chance mode B". "Chance mode B" mainly executes a special figure 1 game. Although the normal game state B has general electric support, it does not act more favorably on the player than the general electric support in the special game state B, and in the "chance mode B", the special figure 2 game is executed. Since it is not easy to get the opportunity, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 game. However, the gaming machine 10 compares the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes) in the normal gaming state B (“chance mode B”) to the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 minutes) is increased to suppress the chance to derive a hit due to the special figure 2 game. That is, the normal game state B is a game state in which the chance of winning by the special figure 2 game is suppressed while there is a general electric support that acts to increase the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 game.

In the normal game state B, the gaming machine 10 can transition to the normal game state A or the special game state A triggered by a big hit in the special figure 1 game. In addition, the game machine 10 is the result of the time-saving end (
For example, the normal game state A can be transitioned with the derivation of the display of the time saving end symbol) as a trigger.

The transition condition (transition condition K) from the normal game state B to the special game state A is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no high probability general electric support. One of the transition conditions from the normal game state B to the normal game state A (transition condition L) is the end of the jackpot, with the control state after the jackpot being no low-probability general electric support. In addition, one of the transition conditions from the normal game state B to the normal game state A (transition condition M) is the derivation of the result of time-saving end. The gaming machine 10 may not have the transition condition M assuming that the stay in the normal gaming state B is guaranteed until the next big win.

The result of the time-saving end is that after transitioning to the normal game state B, the game result in the special game does not lead to a continuous jackpot over a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times) (the end of the normal support number of times ). In addition, regardless of the number of games, the result of the time-saving end is the cumulative value of the fluctuation time (game time ceiling), the number of times of derivation of special fluctuation display modes such as reach fluctuation (game point ceiling), or a combination of these, etc. It may be a result of satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the game history. Also, the result of the time-saving end may be derived by a lottery (for example, 1/75) for each game regardless of the game history. Further, the result of the time saving end may be clearly indicated to the player by deriving the time saving end symbol in addition to the information display such as the guidance message or instead of the information display such as the guidance message.

The special game state A includes "special mode A". "Special mode A" is a gaming state in which a special figure 2 game is mainly executed. It should be noted that the game machine 10, special figure 1 in the "special mode A"
Since the starting memory of the game can occur, it is special by increasing the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 10 minutes) compared to the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 seconds to 2 minutes). FIG. 1 suppresses the chance of deriving a hit from the game. In the special game state A, there is no general electric support, but since small hits in the special figure 2 game occur frequently, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of balls possessed by the player. In addition, the advantageous game progress for the player in the special game state A is the probability fluctuation (high probability) of the special figure 2 game, and the normal game state A ("chance mode A
”) and shortening the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 game compared to the normal game state A (“chance mode A”
) and the extension of the variation time of the special figure 1 game compared to the special figure 1 game, and the high probability of a small hit of the special figure 2 game compared to the special figure 1 game. That is, the special game state A is a game state in which the game progresses in an advantageous manner for the player without accompanying the electric power support.

The gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the special game state B in the special game state A triggered by the big hit of the special figure 2 game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can derive a big hit by the special figure 1 game, although the chance of winning is suppressed. The game machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the normal game state A in the special game state A triggered by a big win in the special figure 1 game. omitted.
The transition condition (transition condition D) from the special game state A to the special game state A is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no high probability general electric support. The transition condition (transition condition E) from the special game state A to the special game state B is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being high probability general electric support. However, in the special game state A, the gaming machine 10 compares the variation time of the special figure 2 game (eg, 2 seconds to 2 minutes) with the variation time of the special figure 1 game (eg, 1
0 minutes) to suppress the chance to derive a hit by a special figure 1 game.

Special game state B includes "special mode B". "Special mode B" is a gaming state in which a special figure 1 game is mainly executed. It should be noted that the game machine 10, special figure 1 in the "special mode B"
Since the starting memory of the game can occur, it is special by increasing the variation time of the special figure 2 game (for example, 10 minutes) compared to the variation time of the special figure 1 game (for example, 2 seconds to 2 minutes). FIG. 2 suppresses the chance of winning by the game. In the special game state B, there is a general electric support, and although the frequency is lower than the special figure 2 game, the small hit of the special figure 1 game occurs frequently, so the game can be progressed without reducing the number of balls held by the player. I have to. In addition, the advantageous game progress for the player in the special game state B is the probability fluctuation (high probability) of the special figure 1 game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 game compared to the normal game state A ("chance mode A") Shortening and normal game state A
(“Chance Mode A”) can be cited for the extension of the variable time of the special figure 2 game and the general electric support. That is, the special game state B is a game state in which the game progresses in an advantageous manner for the player while being accompanied by the electric power support.

The gaming machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the normal game state A in the special game state B triggered by the big hit of the special figure 1 game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can derive a big hit by the special figure 2 game although the chance of winning is suppressed. The game machine 10 can transition to the special game state A or the special game state B in the special game state B triggered by the special figure 2 game jackpot. omitted.
The transition condition (transition condition F) from the special game state B to the special game state A is the end of the big win, with the control state after the big win being no high probability general electric support. The transition condition (transition condition G) from the special game state B to the normal game state A is the end of the jackpot with the control state after the jackpot being low probability general electric support. However, in the special game state B, the gaming machine 10 compares the variation time of the special figure 1 game (eg, 2 seconds to 2 minutes) with the variation time of the special figure 2 game (eg, 1
0 minutes) by increasing the hit derivation opportunity by the special figure 2 game is suppressed.

As a result, when the game machine 10 derives a big win accompanied by probability variation in the normal game state A, it realizes a game property in which two more big wins are guaranteed, that is, a variable probability double loop. In addition, the game machine 10 realizes a game property in which two more big wins are guaranteed by the occurrence of a big win without the high-probability general electric support in the probability variable two-time loop. The game machine 10 improves the interest in the game while suppressing excessive gambling in accordance with the game rules.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 replaces the opportunity for deriving a jackpot with a probability change in the normal game state B (for example, a transition probability of 9/10) with the opportunity for derivation of a big win with a probability change in the normal game state A (
For example, it is set more advantageous to the player than the transition probability 5/10). Moreover, the gaming machine 10
When a big win with a probability variation is derived in the normal game state B, it realizes a game property such that two more big wins are guaranteed, that is, a variable probability double loop. In addition, the gaming machine 10
To realize a game property such that two more big wins are guaranteed by the occurrence of a big win without a high-probability general/universal electric support in a probability variable two-time loop. The game machine 10 improves the interest in the game while suppressing excessive gambling in accordance with the game rules. Also, game machine 1
0 has the aspect of relieving a player who is likely to be immersed in a game in the normal game state A with a so-called ceiling function.

Such a gaming machine 10 has a transition path (state transition A) triggered by a win as a path from the normal game state A to the special game state A, and a normal game state B that can be transitioned by not being triggered by a win. and a transition path (state transition J, state transition K) via Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can achieve a game that has never existed in the past, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Next, general electric support performance for each game state will be described with reference to FIG. 155 . Figure 155
[Fig. 14] is a diagram showing an example of general/electric support performance of a gaming machine according to a twelfth embodiment. First, general electric support performance in normal game state A and special game state A will be described. Normal game state A
and special game state A are both game states without general electric support. Normal game state A and special game state A, for example, special figure fluctuation time (average) is T1, normal figure fluctuation time (average)
is T4, the probability per normal pattern is 10/256, the normal open time is 100ms,
The number of times the power supply is opened is 1, and the power supply count number (the number of prizes won) is not used as a blocking condition. In addition, although the common electric power support performance is the same between the normal game state A and the special game state A, it may be different. Such normal game state A and special game state A general electric support performance is general electric support performance which is said to have no general electric support or no time saving. In addition, although it is assumed that the number of electric power counts is not a blocking condition,
It may be

Next, general electric support performance in the special game state B will be described. Special game state B is a game state with general electric support. In the special game state B, for example, the special figure fluctuation time (average) is T2 (<T1), the normal figure fluctuation time (average) is T5 (<T4), and the normal figure per probability is 255/256. , the general electricity opening time is 1500 ms, the general electricity opening number is 3 times, and the general electricity count number (the number of winning prizes) is not a blocking condition. Such a general electricity support performance in the special game state B is a general electricity support performance that is generally said to have a general electricity support or a short working hours.

Next, general electric support performance in normal game state B will be described. The normal game state B is a game state with general electric support. In the normal game state B, for example, the special figure fluctuation time (average) is T3 (T2 < T3 ≤ T1), and the normal figure fluctuation time (average) is T6 (T5 < T6 ≤ T
4), the probability per normal pattern is 11/256, the normal power open time is 108 ms, the normal power open number is 1, and the power count number (the number of prizes) is not a closing condition. Such general electric support performance in the normal game state B is significantly inferior to the general electric support performance in the special game state B. support performance. However, the general power support performance of normal game state B is normal game state A
When compared with the general electrical support performance of the special game state A, it has a general electrical support performance that is acceptable or difficult to accept. That is, the general electric support performance in the normal game state B is substantially the same as the general electric support performance in the normal game state A and the special game state A. However, the normal game state B is a game state in which the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state A is high, and can produce a high expectation compared to the normal game state.

The game machine 10 may indicate to the player that the game state is the normal game state B by directing, or may suggest it by suggestion. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change patterns, backgrounds, characters, etc., depending on the difference between the chance modes A and B, or may change the appearance frequency of a predetermined effect.

The game machine 10 does not use the general electric count number as the blocking condition in the normal game states A and B and the special game states A and B, but the difference is set for each game state with this as the blocking condition. may In addition, the game machine 10 sets differences in the normal game states A and B and the special game states A and B in the special pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern per probability, the normal power opening time, and the normal power opening number of times. However, it is not always necessary to set the difference in all parameters, and the difference may be set in any parameter.

Next, when the normal game state A is changed to the normal game state B and the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving pattern displayed on various display devices will be described with reference to FIG. 156 . Figure 15
6 is a diagram showing an example of a stop symbol in the special game of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment.

The game machine 10 can display this special figure on the collective display device 50 and can display the decoration pattern on the display device 41 . The collective display device 50 can display the special figure 1 among the special figures in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53, and can display the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 among the special figures.

The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP01 when the special figure 1 game derives a "loss" that does not enter the time saving (general electric support) as a game result. In addition, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP03 when the special figure 1 game derives the "lost lottery time saving" that the special figure 1 game is lost and rushes into the time saving by lottery as a game result. . In addition, special figure 1 design display section 53, special figure 1
When the game derives a game result of "missing ceiling time saving" in which time is shortened by losing and reaching the ceiling, a symbol pattern belonging to pattern TZP05 is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP07 when the special figure 1 game derives a "minor hit" that does not rush into the time saving as a game result.
In addition, the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53, when the special figure 1 game derives a "small hit lottery short time" that enters into a short time by a small win and a lottery as a game result, displays a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP09. indicate. In addition, the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 derives the special figure 1 game as a game result, "small hit ceiling short time" that rushes into short time due to small hit and reaching the ceiling. display. Further, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP13 when the special figure 1 game derives a "jackpot" as a game result. Note that patterns TZP01, 03, 05,
07, 09, 11 and 13 are exclusive, and one symbol does not belong to two or more symbol patterns. However, that the display mode is the same in different pattern patterns,
not necessarily impeded.

The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP02 when the special figure 2 game derives "off" as a game result. In addition, the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54, when the special figure 2 game derives the "loss lottery short time" as a game result, the pattern TZP
04 is displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP06 when the special figure 2 game derives "reduced ceiling time" as a game result. Further, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP08 when the special figure 2 game derives a "small hit" as a game result. In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP10 when the special figure 2 game derives a "small winning lottery time saving" as a game result. Further, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP12 when the special figure 2 game derives "small hit ceiling time saving" as a game result. In addition, the special figure 2 design display unit 54
When the game derives a "jackpot" as a game result, a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP14 is displayed. Note that patterns TZP02, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12, 14
are exclusive, and one symbol does not belong to two or more symbol patterns. However, it is not necessarily prevented that the display modes are the same in different design patterns.

The gaming machine 10 can display two decoration patterns, a small pattern and a large pattern, on the display device 41, respectively. Small symbols and large symbols are symbols corresponding to the special figure 1 game or special figure 2 depending on the game state
Display the pattern corresponding to the game. For example, the small symbols and the large symbols display symbols corresponding to the special figure 1 game in the normal game states A and B and the special game state B, and display symbols corresponding to the special figure 2 game in the special game state A. The gaming machine 10 may display two sets of small symbols and large symbols on the display device 41 corresponding to each of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, and display a total of four decorative symbols. .

The gaming machine 10 can display large symbols as a large symbol group 501 and small symbols as a small symbol group 502 on the display device 41 (see FIG. 13). The small pattern group 502 is a special figure 1 game or a special figure 2
When the game derives "miss" as the game result, the symbol patterns belonging to the pattern KZP01 are displayed. Further, the small symbol group 502 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern KZP03 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "loss lottery short time" as a game result. In addition, the small pattern group 502 displays a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP05 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "lost ceiling time saving" as a game result. Further, the small symbol group 502 displays symbol patterns belonging to the pattern KZP07 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives a "small hit" as a game result.
Further, the small symbol group 502 displays a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern KZP09 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "small winning lottery short time" as a game result. Further, the small pattern group 502 displays a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP11 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "small winning ceiling time saving" as a game result. Further, the small symbol group 502 displays symbol patterns belonging to the pattern KZP13 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives a "jackpot" as a game result. In addition, the pattern KZP
01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11 and 13 are exclusive, and one symbol never belongs to two or more symbol patterns. However, it is not necessarily prevented that the display modes are the same in different design patterns.

The large symbol group 501 displays symbol patterns belonging to the pattern KZP02 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "loss" as a game result. Also, large pattern group 5
01 displays a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP04 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "loss lottery time reduction" as a game result. In addition, large pattern group 501
displays a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP06 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "reduced ceiling time" as a game result. Also, the large pattern group 501 is
When the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives a "small hit" as a game result, a symbol pattern belonging to the pattern KZP08 is displayed. In addition, the large pattern group 501 is the pattern K
The symbol patterns belonging to ZP10 are displayed. In addition, the large pattern group 501 is a pattern KZP
The symbol patterns belonging to 12 are displayed. Also, the large symbol group 501 displays symbol patterns belonging to the pattern KZP14 when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives a "jackpot" as a game result. Patterns KZP02, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12,
14 are exclusive, and one symbol does not belong to two or more symbol patterns.
However, it is not necessarily prevented that the display modes are the same in different design patterns.

In addition, the decoration pattern may be one that clearly indicates the time saving rush by providing a special pattern different from the pattern normally displayed (for example, a time saving rush, a ceiling time saving rush, etc.). In addition, the decorative pattern may be provided with a special pattern that makes it possible to distinguish between the short time rush and the short rush rush, or a special pattern that does not distinguish between the short rush rush and the short rush rush. In addition, the decorative pattern may be provided with a special pattern that clearly indicates the time-saving rush or the ceiling time-saving rush, or a special pattern that only suggests the time-saving rush or the ceiling time-saving rush, or a special pattern that only indicates the degree of expectation. may be provided.
In addition, as for the decorative patterns, special patterns may be displayed in both the large patterns and the small patterns, or only one of the large patterns or the small patterns may display the special patterns.

In addition, although the game machine 10 enables the display of the time-saving design in the decoration design, it may be possible to display the time-saving design only in the special design so that the time-saving design is not displayed in the decoration design.
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, description will be given of this special figure and decorative design when a plurality of types of time saving times are provided for time saving without going through a big hit. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a time saving pattern in a special game of the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment.

When the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "loss lottery time saving" as a game result, the gaming machine 10 can distribute the number of time saving times to any of "50", "100", and "10000". . In addition, the game machine 10 is the number of times of time reduction "50
”, if it is the result of the special figure 1 game, the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP031 included in the pattern TZP03 is displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and if the result of the special figure 2 game is the pattern TZP04 The symbol pattern belonging to the included pattern TZP041 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 . In addition, the game machine 10, when distributing the number of times of time reduction "100" in the "loss lottery time reduction", pattern TZP if the result of the special figure 1 game
The pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP032 included in 03 is displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and if it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the pattern TZP042 included in the pattern TZP04
The symbol pattern belonging to is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54. In addition, the game machine 10, when distributing the number of times of time reduction "10000" in the "loss lottery reduction time", if the result of the special figure 1 game pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP033 included in the pattern TZP03 special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and if it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP043 included in the pattern TZP04 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the pattern TZP031 or the pattern TZP041,
As decoration patterns, a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP031 included in the pattern KZP03 is displayed in the small pattern group 502, and a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP041 included in the pattern KZP04 is displayed in the large pattern group 501. - 特許庁In addition, the gaming machine 10 has the pattern TZP
032 or pattern TZP042, the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP032 included in the pattern KZP03 is displayed in the small pattern group 502 as a decoration pattern, and the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP042 included in the pattern KZP04 is displayed in the large pattern group 501. indicate. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP033 included in the pattern KZP03 as a decoration pattern in the small pattern group 502 corresponding to the pattern TZP033 or the pattern TZP043, and displays the pattern KZP included in the pattern KZP04.
The symbol patterns belonging to 043 are displayed in the large symbol group 501 .

In addition, the gaming machine 10, when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "reduced ceiling time saving" as a game result, distributes the number of times of shortening time to either "200", "300", or "10000". can be done. In addition, the game machine 10, when distributing the number of times of time saving "200" in the "reduced ceiling time", if the result of the special figure 1 game, the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP051 included in the pattern TZP05 is displayed in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and if it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP061 included in the pattern TZP06 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion . In addition, the game machine 10, when distributing the number of times of time reduction "300" in the "lost ceiling time reduction", if the result of the special figure 1 game, the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP052 included in the pattern TZP05 53, if it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the pattern T included in the pattern TZP06
The symbol pattern belonging to ZP062 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 . Moreover, the gaming machine 10
is, when distributing the time saving number of times "10000" in the "lost ceiling time saving", if it is the result of the special figure 1 game, the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern TZP053 included in the pattern TZP05 is displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, If it is the result of special figure 2 game, pattern TZP0
6 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the pattern TZP051 or the pattern TZP061,
As decorative patterns, the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP051 included in the pattern KZP05 are displayed in the small pattern group 502, and the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP061 included in the pattern KZP06 are displayed in the large pattern group 501. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has the pattern TZP
052 or pattern TZP062, a pattern pattern belonging to pattern KZP052 included in pattern KZP05 is displayed in small pattern group 502 as a decoration pattern, and a pattern pattern belonging to pattern KZP062 included in pattern KZP06 is displayed in large pattern group 501. indicate. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP053 included in the pattern KZP05 as a decoration pattern in the small pattern group 502 corresponding to the pattern TZP053 or the pattern TZP063, and displays the pattern KZP included in the pattern KZP06.
The symbol patterns belonging to 063 are displayed in the large symbol group 501 .

In addition, when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "small hit lottery time saving" as a game result, the gaming machine 10 distributes the number of times of time saving to "100", "1000", or "10000". be able to. In addition, when the game machine 10 distributes the number of times of time saving "100" in the "small hit lottery time saving", if it is the result of the special figure 1 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP091 included in the pattern TZP09 is displayed in the special figure 1 symbol. displayed in section 53,
If it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP101 included in the pattern TZP10 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display section . In addition, when the game machine 10 distributes the number of times of time saving "1000" in the "small hit lottery time saving", if it is the result of the special figure 1 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP092 included in the pattern TZP09 is displayed in the special figure 1 symbol. If it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP102 included in the pattern TZP10 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display part 54. In addition, when the game machine 10 distributes the number of times of time saving "10000" in the "small hit lottery time saving", if it is the result of the special figure 1 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP093 included in the pattern TZP09 is displayed in the special figure 1 symbol. Displayed in the part 53, pattern TZ if the result of the special figure 2 game
The symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP103 included in P10 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the pattern TZP091 or the pattern TZP101,
As decoration patterns, the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP091 included in the pattern KZP09 are displayed in the small pattern group 502, and the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP101 included in the pattern KZP10 are displayed in the large pattern group 501. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has the pattern TZP
Corresponding to 092 or pattern TZP102, a pattern pattern belonging to pattern KZP092 included in pattern KZP09 is displayed in small pattern group 502 as a decoration pattern, and a pattern pattern belonging to pattern KZP102 included in pattern KZP10 is displayed in large pattern group 501. indicate. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP093 included in the pattern KZP09 as a decoration pattern in the small pattern group 502 corresponding to the pattern TZP093 or the pattern TZP103, and displays the pattern KZP included in the pattern KZP10.
The symbol patterns belonging to 103 are displayed in the large symbol group 501 .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can distribute the number of times of time saving to "10000" when the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game derives "small hit ceiling time saving" as a game result. again,
The game machine 10 can make the benefit at the time of reaching the ceiling by increasing the expected value of the number of times of shortening of time for the "short hit ceiling" compared to the "shorter ceiling time".

When the gaming machine 10 distributes the time saving number of times "10000" in the "small hit ceiling time saving", if it is the result of the special figure 1 game, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP111 included in the pattern TZP11. , and if it is the result of the special figure 2 game, the symbol pattern belonging to the pattern TZP121 included in the pattern TZP12 is displayed on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the pattern TZP111 or the pattern TZP121,
As decoration patterns, the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP111 included in the pattern KZP11 are displayed in the small pattern group 502, and the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP121 included in the pattern KZP12 are displayed in the large pattern group 501.

Thereby, the game machine 10 can produce the number of times of time saving according to the time saving pattern. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display decoration patterns corresponding to the number of times of time saving, and the decoration patterns can further enhance interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, description will be given of a modified example of this special figure and decorative design when a plurality of types of time saving times are provided for time saving without going through a big hit. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of time-saving symbols in a special figure game of a gaming machine according to a modification of the twelfth embodiment. Since the design pattern of this special figure in the modification is the same as that of FIG. 157, the explanation is omitted.

The gaming machine 10 has patterns TZP031, 032, 033 or patterns TZP041,
042 and 043, the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP03 are displayed in the small pattern group 502, and the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP04 are displayed in the large pattern group 501 as decorative patterns.
to display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has patterns TZP051, 052, 053 or pattern TZP0.
Corresponding to 61, 062, 063, a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP05 is displayed in the small pattern group 502 and a pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP06 is displayed in the large pattern group 501 as decoration patterns.

In addition, the game machine 10 has patterns TZP091, 092, 093 or pattern TZP1.
Corresponding to 01, 102 and 103, the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP09 are displayed in the small pattern group 502 and the pattern patterns belonging to the pattern KZP10 are displayed in the large pattern group 501 as decorative patterns.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the pattern TZP111 or the pattern TZP121,
A pattern pattern belonging to the pattern KZP11 is displayed in the small pattern group 502 as a decorative pattern,
The symbol patterns belonging to the pattern KZP12 are displayed in the large symbol group 501. - 特許庁

Thereby, the game machine 10 can produce the number of times of time saving according to the time saving pattern. In addition, the game machine 10 can vaguely display the decoration pattern according to the number of times of time saving, and the decoration pattern can further improve interest.

Next, a modification of the game property of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of a gaming machine according to a modification of the twelfth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment includes a normal game state A, a normal game state B, a special game state A, and a special game state B, and is capable of transitioning game states, It is the same as the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. However, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment differs in that it has the state transition N and does not have the state transition A and the state transition F. FIG.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the modification of the twelfth embodiment does not have a transition path directly from the normal game state A to the special game state A, and the normal game It has to go through state B.

As a result, the normal game state B is changed from being positioned as one of the routes leading from the normal game state A to the special game state A to being positioned as an essential route, and the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.
has increased in importance compared to Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment can provide a game feature in which transition to the normal gaming state B is one of the goals.

In the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 154 or FIG. 159, the special game state A is set without high-probability general electric support, and the special game state B is set with high-probability general-purpose electric support. It is also possible to set the special game state B as having the general electric support and without the high probability general electric support.
In addition, the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 154 or FIG. 159 has a special game state A with a small winning rush and a special game state B without a small winning rush, but a special game state A without a small winning rush, The special game state B may have a small hit rush.

The gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect. It should be noted that the conventional game machine has a problem that the game may become monotonous due to the lack of variations in the transition of the game state, and the interest in the game cannot be sufficiently enhanced. first
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment has the effect of making the game more interesting.

(1) The gaming machine 10 is in a game state (for example, normal game states A, B, special game state) that can derive a win (for example, a big win) as a result of a game (for example, a special game 1, a special game 2) A, B) disadvantageous first game state for the player (for example, normal game state A
) and a second game state (for example, special game state A) that is advantageous for the player, the first game control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and the second game Control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first game control means can transition to the second game state based on the fact that a predetermined hit is derived as a result of the game in the first game state. The second game control means can transition based on deriving a predetermined loss (for example, short winning lottery time, short losing top time, small winning lottery short time, small winning top time short) as a result of the game in the first game state. It is possible to transition to the second game state via the third game state (for example, normal game state B) (see FIG. 154).

(2) The gaming machine 10 is in a game state (for example, normal game states A, B, special game state, etc.) that can derive a win (for example, a big win) as a result of a game (for example, a special game 1, a special game 2) A, B) disadvantageous first game state for the player (for example, normal game state A
) and a second game state (for example, special game state A) advantageous to the player, and includes first game control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first game control means can transition based on deriving a predetermined loss (for example, a short winning lottery, a short losing ceiling, a short winning lottery, a short winning ceiling) as a result of the game in the first game state. It is possible to transition to the second game state via the third game state (for example, normal game state B) (see FIG. 159).

(3) The gaming machine 10 is in a game state (for example, normal game states A, B, special game state, etc.) that can derive a win (for example, a big win) as a result of a game (for example, a special game 1, a special game 2) A, B) disadvantageous first game state for the player (for example, normal game state A
) and a second game state (for example, special game state A) that is advantageous for the player, the first game control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and the second game Control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first game control means can transition to the second game state based on the fact that a predetermined hit is derived as a result of the game in the first game state. The second game control means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in relation to the execution of the game in the first game state (for example, short winning lottery time, short losing ceiling time, small winning lottery short time, small winning ceiling time short). It is possible to transition to the second game state via a transitionable third game state (for example, normal game state B) (see FIG. 154).

(4) The gaming machine 10 is in a game state (for example, normal game states A, B, special game state, etc.) that can derive a win (for example, a big win) as a result of a game (for example, a special game 1, a special game 2) A, B), the first game state (for example, normal game state A) that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, no low probability general electric support), and the first mode that is advantageous for the player (for example, high probability general A second game state (for example, special game state A) in which there is no electric support and a small winning rush), and a second mode that is advantageous for the player from the first mode (for example, there is a high probability of normal electric support and a small No hit rush) third game state (for example, special game state B)
It is possible to transition to the first game control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) and the second game control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300
) and including. The first game control means can transition to the second game state or the third game state based on the fact that a predetermined hit has been derived as a result of the game in the first game state. second
The game control means determines that a predetermined condition has been established in relation to the execution of the game in the first game state (for example, a short winning lottery, a short losing ceiling, a short winning lottery, a short winning ceiling).
When passing through a fourth game state (for example, normal game state B) that can be transitioned based on the second
It is possible to transition to only one of the game state or the third game state (see FIG. 154)
.

Note that the processing functions described above can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. A program describing the processing content can be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical discs, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-RO
M/RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as a magneto-optical recording medium.
etc.

When distributing the program, for example, DVD, C
Portable recording media such as D-ROM are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. The computer then reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, the computer can execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

In addition, at least part of the above processing functions are DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De
vice) or other electronic circuits.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine. It can be applied to all game machines using game balls and slot machines which are game machines using medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modifications may be combined and applied. The scope of the invention is indicated by the appended claims rather than by the foregoing description,
All changes within the meaning and range of equivalence to the claims are intended to be included.

10 game machine 30, 800, 801, 802, 803, 970, 980 game board 41, 830 display device 100, 100a, 100b game control device 300 effect control device

Claims (1)

A first value can be given to a player when a first variation display game or a second variation display game is executed and a result of the first variation display game or the second variation display game is a first result . ,
When the result of the first variable display game or the second variable display game is a second result different from the first result, a second value lower than the first value can be awarded to the player. A gaming machine,
a main control unit capable of controlling variable display of first identification information corresponding to the first variable display game and second identification information corresponding to the second variable display game on a first display means;
Variation display control of a third variation display game for variably displaying the third identification information corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game based on a command received from the main control unit on the second display means a possible slave control unit;
winning device control means capable of converting the normal variable winning device into an easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to win and a non-easy winning state in which the game ball is not easy to win;
a game state control means capable of transitioning the game state from the first game state, which is the easy-to-win state, to the second game state, which is the non-easy-to-win state, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The slave control unit
The third identification information corresponding to the first identification information displayed as the result of the first variation display game when the first variation display game is executed is used as the result of the third variation display game. displayed on the display means,
The third identification information corresponding to the second identification information displayed as the result of the second variation display game when the second variation display game is executed is used as the result of the third variation display game. displayed on the display means,
The achievement status of the predetermined condition can be displayed on the second display means,
The first identification displayed as a result of the executed first variable display game when the second variable display game is executed after the first variable display game is executed based on the command received from the main control unit. The specific third identification information, which is the third identification information displayed on the second display means corresponding to the information, is the specific second identification information, which is the second identification information displayed on the first display means even if the third identification information does not correspond to the execution of the second variable display game without changing the specific third identification information to the third identification information corresponding to the specific second identification information. 3 Starting the variable display game from the specific third identification information,
The predetermined condition includes that the first variable display game or the second variable display game results in the second result,
The second result includes a first second result and a second second result, and the predetermined condition is different between the first second result and the second second result ,
game machine.

Images